Home

HP Integrity rx2660 Server User Service Guide

Contents

1. UUID B6DDD02D 774F 11DB 8759 5250AF09A183 System Bus Frequency 266 MHz PROCESSOR MODULE INFORMATION of L3 L4 Family CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor Module CPUs Speed Size Size hex Rev State 0 2 1 6 GHz 12 MB None 20 00 C1 Active CPU threads are turned off MEMORY INFORMATION DIMM A DIMM Besa DIMM Current DIMM Current 0 1024MB Active 1024MB Active 1 1024MB Active 1024MB Active 2 512MB Active 512MB Active 3 512MB Active 512MB Active Active Memory 6144 MB Installed Memory 6144 MB I O INFORMATIO BOOTABLE DEVICES Order edia Type Path 1 CDROM Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 2 1 Usb 0 0 CDROM Entry0 2 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 1 0 Sas Addr500000E011B1E0 3 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 1 0 Sas Addr500000E011B1E0 4 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 1 0 Sas Addr5000C500003A05 5 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 1 0 Sas Addr5000C500003A05 6 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 1 0 Sas Addr500000E0119F9C 7 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 1 0 Sas Addr500000E0119F9C Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot ID ID Path 00 00 01 00 0x103C 0x1303 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 1 0 00 00 01 01 0x103C 0x1302 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 1 00 00 O1 02 0x103C 0x1048 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 1 2 00 00 02 00 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0
2. After choosing the file system for the boot device for example s0 initiate the Linux loader from the EFI Shell prompt by entering the full path for the ELILO EFI loader By default the ELILO EFI loader boots Linux using the kernel image and parameters specified by the default entry in the elilo conf file on the EFI System Partition for the boot device To interact with the ELILO EF1 loader interrupt the boot process for example enter a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the ELILO EF1 loader use the exit command Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Shell To boot Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Shell ll Access the EFI Shell From the system console choose the EFI Shell entry from the EFl Boot Manager menu to access the shell Access the EFI System Partition for the Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot device Use the map EFI Shell command to list the file systems s0 s1 and so on that are known and mapped To choose a file system to use enter its mapped name followed by a colon For example to operate with the boot device that is mapped as fs3 enter fs3 at the EFI Shell prompt Booting and Shutting Down Linux 101 Enter ELILO at the EFI Shell command prompt to launch the ELILO EFI loader If needed you can specify the loader path by entering EFI redhat elilo at the
3. 188 Removing the Optional Smart Array P400 Controller and Battery oooooooccnnnnnoccnnooccccconnnonos 188 Removing the PCle Expansion Board sto coi RAR 190 Replacing the Smart Array P400 Controller Board ooooooooccccoooooocccccccoonnnnnnnccccconannnnnnnos 191 Replacing the PCle Expansion Bordo aaa 192 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board coocoooooccccccooooooonccccocononononcncnonnnnnncnccncnns 193 Removing the SAS Backplane BOTA A A A A eae xe 194 Replacing the SAS Backplane ntc dt ia ena 195 Removing and Replacing the System o e ad 196 Removing the System Board ado 196 Replacing the System Boars tise neice aie ic Mee heater lalate cil a cleat ele tts Ae gest 198 A Customer Replaceable Units Information cccccccccccccccccncnnnoninininanon 200 Parts Only Warranty SINC aaa aac a e e Ae 200 KSustomier o AAA A A A nee A Bae ee EE E Se 200 Customer Replaceable Units Lish2 s cits tet ook ccs torts eter sai 201 A A E ee ee 204 Upgrading the I O Bock daa 204 I O Backplane Upgrade Overview sci scc cscnc2ecs ef cncecaencstesuecatsavessudvnes devatuoneanyd vess desabwomentae oes 204 Required Service Too eres tl do da 204 AA II IN NR A xdecemanet 204 Upgrading the I O Bale le 205 Performing a Server BACKUP AAA 205 Powering Off the Serversasisnics sce cess cutee eevee A a aeayaese antead os 205 Accessing the A te oat tat cates last enlaces Y 205 Removing the I O Backplane Assembly
4. 240 Utilities Table 74 Disk Drives and Device Path continued Disk Drive Device Path SCSI Disk HDD3 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 0 Scsi PunO Lun0 Removable Media Boot Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 O ATA Boot From File Use this option to manually run a specific application or driver NOTE This option boots the selected application or driver one time only When you exit the application you return to this menu This option displays the file systems that are on your server or workstation and lets you browse these file systems ler applications or drivers that are executable Executable files end with the e fi extension You can also select remote boot LAN options that have been configured on your network For example Boot From a File Select a Volume O VOLUME LABEL Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Primary Master CDROM CD_FORMAT Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Secondary Master CDROM Removable Media Boot Acpi HWP0002 500 Pci 2 0 Ata Secondary Master oad File EFI Shell Built in oad File Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306E4C4F1A Exit Where e NO VOLUME LABEL A hard drive When you format a hard drive the EFI tools provide an option to LABEL the disk In this example the volume is not labelled e CD_FORMAT The label created for the disk currently inside the DVD drive e Removable Media Boot Allows you to boot from a re
5. cceceesseeeceetteeeeeeneeeeessneeeeeeenees 68 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS oia se titania tees 69 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using ARP Pi co DS 70 Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using the RS 232 A PERO 71 logging In tothe ilO 2X MP o eena A eis RPT E aT onan Pr 72 Additional Set pienia rieien iiei a a ese he a a i ia 73 Modifying User Accounts and Default Password 0 05 0 A 73 Setting Up ISCU meneers OREA ZN EA A A RS EE NC Kenna 74 Security Access e a ee oo do 74 Accessing the Host CA dde 74 Accessing the Host Console With the TUI CO Command cccccoooococcccconooonnnnccccnonnononcnccncannnos 74 Interacting with the iLO 2 MP Using the Web GUl ooooooooocccccccoooooocccoconoonnononccconanonnnnccnccannnos 74 Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA iis Ais cada alesse ada ieee ees 76 Powering On and Powering On the SEEN 77 Power Slates aea a e ATAR A 77 Powering On th Srs AA A ARA 77 Powering On the Server Using the iLO 2 MP oooooocccccocococononcccooonononcncnononanononnnnonannnnnnncinonns 77 Powering On the Server Manvally 00 bl 77 Powering Off La cces s eae eee ant PE RE SN EAN AB ee eee ee a eee 78 Powering Off the Server Using the ilO 2 MP iii iz a 78 Powering Off the Server Manually csc c052sdshecsesesutecndenebieandesniesmtucabdstcaesnteuneeaehdsenedentadeacasbans 78 Verifying Installed Components In the Server oooooccccocooooocccccccononononononoonnnnnnnnnnnonano non cncncnnnnnnnnnos 78 Installa
6. NOTE In some versions of EFI the Boot Configuration Menu is listed as the Boot Option Maintenance Menu To manage the boot options list for each server use the EFI Shell the EFI Boot Configuration Menu or operating system utilities At the EFI Shell the bc g command supports listing and managing the boot options list for all operating systems except Microsoft Windows On HP Integrity servers with Windows installed the MSUtil nvrboot efi utility is provided for managing Windows boot options from the EFI Shell For HP Integrity servers with OpenVMS installed the efi vms vms_bcfg efi and efi vms vms_show utilities are provided for managing OpenVMS boot options Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System The EFI Boot Configuration Menu provides the Add a Boot Option Delete Boot Option s and Change Boot Order menu items use this method if you must add an EFI Shell entry to the boot options list Operating system utilities for managing the boot options list include the HP UX set boot command and the HP OpenVMS SYSSMANAGER BOOT_OPTIONS COM command For details see the following sections o Setting HP UX boot options o Setting OpenVMS boot options o Setting Windows boot options o Setting Linux boot options Autoboot Setting The autoboot setting determines at startup whether a server automatically loads the first item in the boot options list or remains at the EFI Boot Manager menu When autob
7. This LED indicates the overall health state of the system including the state of system firmware and the OS If the LED is amber or red the system needs attention and the event logs should be examined for details of the problem Table 41 System Health LED States Definition Flash Rate LED Color System is off or system is booting firmware with no failures since SEL logs LED Off last examined System has left the firmware boot and an OS is booting or running with no Steady Green failures since SEL logs last examined A warning or critical failure has been detected and logged Flash 1 Hz Amber A fatal fault has been detected and logged Flash 2 Hz Red The LO 2 MP displays the following strings in its Virtual Front Panel for the four states of this LED Table 42 VFP System Health Description Off lt none gt On green OS booting or running Flashing amber Waring or critical fault check logs for details Flashing red Fatal fault system crashed or cannot boot check logs for details Locator Switch LED Unit Identifier or UID The locator switch LED enables a specific system to be identified in a rack or Data Center environment One locator switch LED is located in the front panel and a second is located in the rear of the server LEDs are incorporated inside the push button to minimize space Both switches are toggle switches meaning you push it once to turn on the LED and you push it again
8. 3 Pull the DVD drive straight out to remove it from the server 2 Figure 51 Removing the DVD Drive Replacing the DVD Drive To replace a DVD drive 1 Insert the DVD drive into the slot on the server and then push it straight into the drive bay until it clicks into place 2 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel The front bezel provides server control and port access and LED interfaces You must power off the server to remove the front bezel 154 Removing and Replacing Server Components Removing the Front Bezel To remove the front bezel l 2 CONOR 10 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 If rack mounted slide the server out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the four T 10 screws that hold the bezel to the server There are two screws on each side of the server that attach to the bezel through the rack flanges 3 Figure 52 Removing the Front Bezel ann a BE Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Remove the system fans in the fan carrier See Removing a Server Fan page 147 Remove the fan carrier See Removing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 158 Disconnect the System Insight Display power cable from the fan display boa
9. 3 Installing the Server This chapter provides information and procedures to install the server Safety Information Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures Voltages can be present within the server Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge ESD Follow the safety conventions listed below to ensure safe handling of components to prevent injury and to prevent damage to the server When removing or installing any server component follow the instructions provided in this guide If installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component when power is applied fans are running reinstall the server cover immediately to prevent overheating If installing a hot pluggable component complete the required software intervention prior to removing the component If installing an assembly that is neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable disconnect the power cable from the external server power receptacle before starting the installation WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is off Failure to obs
10. Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 ONDAY 30 Removing and Replacing the System Insight Display The System Insight Display is located in the front of the server and is attached to the front bezel A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or equipment damage A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the System Insight Display To remove the System Insight Display 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Remove the front fan carrier assembly See Removing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 158 Disconnect the System Insight Display power cable from the fan display board Remove the front bezel from the server See Removing the Front Bezel page 155 Push on the two plastic clips th
11. booting or running system firmware system health is flashing red internal health is flashing amber external health is steady green and power is steady green Check the diagnostic LED panel to identify failed or faulty internal CRU see Troubleshooting Tools page 111 The preceding problem is fixed when a redundant internal CRU is replaced iLO 2 MP logs are read and the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 4a Cannot see iLO 2 MP prompt on system console server power is off on Front panel LEDs indicate that the server is either booting or running system firmware or is booting or running the OS system health is off steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green Nothing is logged for this condition 1 The most common reasons for this are console cabling issues console configuration issues and so on Check these issues first 2 Examine iLO 2 MP heartbeat LED 3 If off then iLO 2 MP is not operational if flashing amber then ROM error exists 4 Reset iLO 2 MP by using the pinhole reset button on the rear panel of the server 5 If no change replace the system board see Management Subsystem page 132 The preceding problem is fixed when iLO 2 MP heartbeat LED and the system health led are steady green 4a
12. e Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI ACPI provides a standard environment for configuring and managing server systems ACPI moves system power configuration and management from the system firmware to the operating system and abstracts the interface between the platform hardware and the operating system software This enables each to evolve independently of the other The Data Center server firmware supports the HP UX 11i version 3 February 2007 release Linux Windows and OpenVMS 8 3 operating systems through the Itanium processor family standards and extensions and has no operating system specific functionality included Server Subsystems 25 The Office Friendly server firmware supports the HP UX 11i version 3 February 2007 release Linux Windows and OpenVMS 8 3 operating systems through the Itanium processor family standards and extensions and has no operating system specific functionality included All operating systems are presented with the same interface to system firmware and all features are available to the operating system User Interface The Itanium processor family firmware employs a user interface defined by an HP standard called Pre OS System Startup Environment POSSE The POSSE shell is based on the EFI standard shell Several commands were added to the standard EFI Shell to support HP value added functionality Event IDs for Errors and Events The system firmware generates event IDs for errors eve
13. for Help Q or C Al rt Level Threshold Filter 1 Major Forward Progress 2 Informational 3 Warning 5 Critical 7 Fatal Enter alert level threshold or Q to quit filter setup 3 gt Alert threshold level 3 filter will be applied Set up alert filter options on this buffer Y N Log Name Entries Full La 23437445 to 4 to 2 trl B to Quit gt a test Entry zal System Event 410 47 18 Feb 2 Event Log Navigation Help View next block forward in time e g View previous block backward in time e g lt CR gt Continue to the next or previous block D Dump the entire log for capture and analysis F First entry L Last entry J Jump to entry number V View mode configuration text keyword hex Display this Help menu Ctrl B Quit and return to the Main Menu Select A then a threshold filter number to filter events to desired level 003 09 38 10 from 3 to 4 from 3 to 2 MP SL lt CR gt D F L J H Ky T A U for Help Q or Ctrl B to Quit gt a Alert Level Threshold Filter 1 Major Forward Progress 2 Informational 3 Warning 9 Critical 7 Fatal Enter alert level threshold or Q to quit filter setup 3 gt Alert threshold level 3 filter will be applied Select t to change the display to text mode 120 Troubleshooting Display Mode Configuration C Ente level H Hex mode gt K
14. Init ToC button The Init Transfer of Control button initiates a system reset This preserves the entire memory image for obtaining a crash dump and OS error information Use this button to recover a hung system and to get debugging information It is less harsh than a power reset BHO O UID button LED Internal health LED Init ToC button External health LED System health LED Power LED and button Table 4 Front Control Panel Status LEDs e Off UID button is not activated e Blue UID button is activated There is an additional UID LED and button located on the rear panel of the server Both the front and rear UID LEDs illuminate when you activate either of the front or rear UID buttons Init ToC LED and button The Init ToC transfer of control LED button initiates a system reset This reset preserves the entire memory image to obtain crash dump and OS error information The LED illuminates when the system reset is in progress System health Provides information about the system status LED Controls Ports and LEDs 27 System Insight Display 28 Table 4 Front Control Panel Status LEDs continued Name States The following are LED states e Off system is off e Green system is operating normally e Flashing amber warning e Flashing red system fault Internal health LED Indicates the status of internal serviceable components This LED maintains its stat
15. This section covers booting and shutting down Linux on entry class HP servers Procedures for Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server are given in this section To add a Linux entry to the boot options list see Adding Linux to the Boot Options List page 100 To boot Linux on entry class HP Integrity servers use the following procedures o For details on Red Hat Enterprise Linux see Booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Operating System page 101 o For details on SuSE Linux Enterprise Server see Booting the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Operating System page 102 To shut down either Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server see Shutting Down Linux page 103 Adding Linux to the Boot Options List This section describes how to add a Linux entry to the system boot options list The processes for adding both Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Servers are given here You can add the EFI redhat elilo efi loader or the efi SuSE elilo efi loader to the boot options list from the EFI Shell or EFI Boot Configuration menu or in some versions of EFI the Boot Option Maintenance Menu NOTE On HP Integrity servers the operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list l Access the EFI Shell environment Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to access the system console When accessing the console confirm th
16. page 111 Front panel System Insight Display LEDs Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 System Event Log and Forward Progress Logs Recommended Troubleshooting Methodology 105 Table 33 Troubleshooting Entry Points continued Entry Point Subsection or Location Offline and Online Diagnostics INIT button Troubleshooting Tools page 111 System Event Analyzer SEA Troubleshooting Tools page 111 see also http h18023 ww 1 hp com support svctools webes for more information about this tool Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables The following troubleshooting tables are designed for use by both trained and untrained support personnel They should be the first tool used to determine the symptom s or condition of a suspect server Be aware that the state of the front panel LEDs can be viewed locally or remotely using the v p command from the iLO 2 MP The tables are designed to cover troubleshooting symptoms from AC power on up to booting the operating system OS specifically in Steps 1 5 In most cases the Table 34 Front Panel LED States page 106 identifies the step number where troubleshooting should begin in the Table 35 Basic Low End Troubleshooting page 107 Alternatively you can skip Table 34 and start with Step 1 in Table 35 sequencing through the table steps to locate the symptom condition most descriptive of your current server status this be
17. replacing or adding an additional processor use processors with identical part numbers Failure to observe this caution results in performance degradation or system failure To ensure compatibility use processors with identical part numbers Table 70 lists the processor upgrades that are supported and required system firmware levels for each server Table 70 Processor Upgrades Manufacturing Part Number Processor System Firmware Level HP Integrity rx2660 server AD392 2100B AD392AX 1 6 GHz 12 MB Single Core AD390 2100B AD390AX 1 42 GHz 12 MB Dual Core greater than 01 05 AD391 2100B AD391 AX 1 67 GHz 18 MB Dual Core HP Integrity rx3600 server AD390 2100C AD390AX 1 42 GHz 12 MB AD391 2100C AD391AX 1 67 GHz 18 MB greater than 02 03 HP Integrity rx6600 server AD388 2100C 1 6 GHz 24 MB AD389 2100C 1 6 GHz 18 MB greater than 02 03 AD390 2100C AD390AX 1 42 GHz 12 MB 210 Upgrades Table 70 Processor Upgrades continued Manufacturing Part Number Processor HP Integrity BL860c server blade System Firmware Level AD394 2101C 1 42 GHz 12 MB AD395 2102C 1 6 GHz 6 MB AD396 2101C 1 67 GHz 18 MB greater than 01 01 Upgrading Versus Adding On If your HP Integrity server already contains one or more of the processors listed in Table 70 then follow the processor removal and replacement procedures see Removing and Replacing
18. 5 To install the RAID battery onto the airflow guide a Align the tabs on the RAID battery with the slots on the airflow guide b Slide the RAID battery toward the rear of the server until the locking clip locks the RAID battery in place 1 Figure 30 Installing the RAID Battery 6 Connect one end of the RAID battery cable to the battery on the airflow guide 7 Connect the other end of the RAID battery cable to the SAS Smart Array P400 controller A CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS Smart Array P400 controller board If the cables are mismatched the server might not reboot Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channels Replacing the Top Cover To replace the top cover 1 Ensure the cover release lever is in the open position Figure 31 page 62 shows how to replace the top cover 2 Align the tabs of the top cover with the corresponding slots in the chassis and insert the tabs into the slots 1 3 Slide the cover forward until it is flush with the front of the chassis 2 4 Push the cover release lever down into the latched position 3 Installing Additional Components 61 5 Lock the cover release lever if necessary by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees clockwise Figure 31 Replacing the Top Cover Installing the Server into a Rack or Pedestal
19. EFI loader Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 89 NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output shown here Shell gt map Device mapping table fs0 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part1 Sig72550000 b1k0 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 b1k1 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part1 Sig72550000 b1k2 Acpi 000222F0 269 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 HD Part2 Sig72550000 b1k3 Acpi 000222F0 2A8 Pci 0 0 Scsi Pun8 Lun0 b1k4 Acpi 000222F0 2A8 Pci 0 1 Scsi Pun2 Lun0 Shell gt s0 fs0 gt hpux c Copyright 1990 2002 Hewlett Packard Company All rights reserved HP UX Boot Loader for IA64 Revision 1 723 Press Any Key to interrupt Autoboot efi hpux AUTO gt boot vmunix Seconds left till autoboot 9 Exit the server console and LO 2 MP interfaces when finished e To exit the server console and return to the iLO 2 MP Main Menu enter Ctrl B e To exit the iLO 2 MP enter x at the iLO 2 MP Main Menu Booting HP UX in Single User Mode From the EFI Shell environment boot in single user mode by stopping the boot process at the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt and entering the boot is vmunix command To boot HP UX in single user mode l Access the EFI Shell environment for the system on which you want to boot HP UX in single user mode
20. Ensure the battery socket is stationary and cannot flex when installing the battery 5 Reinstall the power supply housing 6 Replace the top access cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module The Trusted Platform Module TPM is an optional security component which enhances security capabilities for the server if it is running the HP UX operating system The TPM is a security chip that is unique to the server It performs key security processes independent of other hardware components The TPM creates and stores additional encryption keys from the root key of the system The encryption keys created by the TPM encapsulate system application encryption keys to provide an additional layer of security for sensitive system data O IMPORTANT The TPM is only supported on the HP UX operating system You must be running the supported version of the HP UX OS to use the TPM Replacing a failed TPM must be performed by an HP CE but a customer can move the TPM from a failed system board to a new system board The fundamental capabilities of the TPM include Platform authentication e Sensitive information protection Data integrity System privacy 186 Removing and Replacing Server Components O IMPORTANT You must run the supported version of the HP UX operating system to utilize the TPM security component A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power
21. Figure 83 Installing the PCle Expansion Board Ct eee ta i Le a SE Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board Serial attached SCSI SAS is a new faster version of the industry standard SCSI technology Although SCSI is a proven technology its parallel data communication model restricts it from providing the speed and scalability that is required for modern data transfer and storage In a parallel data communication environment multiple devices share one bus all data travels over the same cable and through the same port SAS provides serial or point to point data transfer A point to point architecture means that each device has its own private bus cable and port This architecture improves the reliability and availability of data and greatly enhances data transfer rates Current data transfer rates are 3 Gb s Additional features of the SAS technology include Full duplex capability all data reads and writes occur simultaneously Automatic device discovery and configuration each device is assigned a unique SAS address Thin cables and small connectors assist with cooling and ease cable management issues Increased s
22. Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to choose the server console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFl Boot Manager Menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition fsx where x is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to initiate the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing Boot to the HP UX Boot Loader HPUX gt prompt by pressing any key within the 10 seconds given for interrupting the HP UX boot process Use the HPUX EFI loader to boot HP UX in single user mode in the next step After you press a key the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader HPUX gt prompt launches For help using the HPUX EFI loader enter the help command To return to the EFI Shell enter exit fs0 gt hpux c Copyright 1990 2002 Hewlett Packard Company All rights reserved HP UX Boot Loader for IA64 Revision 1 723 90 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System Press Any Key to interrupt Autoboot efi hpux AUTO gt boot vmunix Seconds left till autoboot 9 User Types A Key to Stop the HP UX Boot Process and Access the HPUX EFI
23. Run all Skip lays status of all speedy boot bits al Displ tests for a normal boot time ll tests for a faster boot time lays status of specific Speedy Boot bit Sets or clears a specific Speedy Boot bit system firmware response to BOOTING If OS Speedy Boot aware set to on early CPU selftests late CPU selftests system board hardware tests EFI driver Core I O tests memory initialization Parameters test Each test can be set or cleared booting_valid Enable disable bit early_cpu Enable disable late_cpu Enable disable platform Enable disable chipset Enable disable CEC tests io_hw Enable disable mem_init Enable disable mem_test Enable disable full destructive memory tests EFI POSSE Commands 219 Example 7 boot test command Shell gt boottest BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable Selftest Setting booting_valid On OS speedy boot aware early_cpu Run this test late_cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test Example 8 boottest early_cpu off command Shell gt boottest early_cpu off BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable Selftest Setting booting_valid On OS speedy boot aware early_cpu Skip this test late_cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this test mem_init Run this test mem_te
24. The cables connect directly to the system board for a non RAID configuration and connect to the Smart Array P400 controller board for a RAID configuration Remove the Trusted Platform module if necessary See Removing the TPM page 187 Disconnect the power cable that attaches the Smart Array P400 controller board to the battery on the airflow guide if necessary Remove the Smart Array P400 controller backplane and the PCle expansion card if necessary Remove the I O fan carrier See Removing the I O Fan Carrier Assembly page 161 Disconnect the cables that attach to the system board 1 See Figure 85 Pull up on the post in the center of the system board to unlock it from the server chassis See Figure 85 Shuttle the system board toward the front of the server until the board keyways clear the server guide pins Tilt the system board toward the rear of the server and lift it out at an angle from the server to remove it Removing and Replacing the System Board 197 Figure 85 Removing and Replacing the System Board System board connections System board unlocking post NOTE If the optional Smart Array P400 controller and PCle expansion boards are installed in your server the SAS cables will not be plugged into the system board as shown in Figure 85 page 198 Replacing the System Board A CAUTION When replacing an Office Friendly system board you must use system board part number AB419 69004
25. This section describes how to add an HP UX entry to the server boot options list You can add the EFI HPUX HPUX EFTI loader to the boot options list from the EFI Shell or EFI Boot Configuration menu or in some versions of EFI the Boot Option Maintenance Menu NOTE On HP Integrity servers the operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list This procedure adds an HP UX item to the boot options list from the EFI Shell To add an HP UX boot option when logged in to HP UX use the set boot command For details see the setboot 1M manpage l Access the EFI Shell environment Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to access the server console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose the EFI Shell menu option to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition fsx where x is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the HP UX loader is EFI HPUX HPUX EFI and it should be on the device you are accessing At th
26. This section provides instructions on how to install the server into a rack or a pedestal Installing the Server into a Rack The following sections describe how to install the server into an HP rack or an approved non HP rack HP Rack HP servers that are installed into racks are shipped with equipment mounting slides An installation guide comes with each set of slides HP 2U Quick Deploy Rail System Installation Instructions for HP Products Follow the steps in this installation guide to determine where and how to install the server into the rack Non HP Rack The Mounting in non HP racks guide enables you to evaluate the installation of HP equipment into non HP racks Use this guide when you need to quality whether you can install maintain and service any HP equipment in a non HP rack The guide is located on the HP website at http www hp com racksolutions on the HP Integrity and HP 9000 Servers infrastructure page Click the Rack Systems E link Select Mounting information from the menu then select the guide titled Mounting in non HP racks Installing the Server into a Pedestal The server ships with a pedestal mount if you order the rackless configuration option The pedestal mount is packaged in a separate carton which is attached to the server carton 62 Installing the Server To change the server from a rack mount to a rackless configuration you need a Server Rackless Mount Kit The rackless mount kit comes with the HP
27. You are now in SERVICE mode c Use the sysset command to verify that all values are set Shell gt sysset System Information Manufacturer hp Product Name server rx2660 Product Number AB463A Secondary Product Number is Identical Serial number SGH43442VB Secondary Serial Number is Identical UUID 3C33C58E 2E5A 11D8 A33B 4188C0AEFAE2 Valid Secondary UUID is Identical Product ID 0x601 NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your sysset output might not exactly match the output shown here 11 Verify the System Insight Display replacement and operation by using the following system utilities e Use the iLO 2 MP DF command to check the customer replaceable unit CRU ID of the System Insight Display Removing and Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly A The server contains an fan carrier assembly located behind the front bezel that houses eight of the 12 server fans if you have a Data Center server or four of the six fans if you have an Office Friendly Server WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or equipment damage CAUTION Observe all ESD
28. ZIF socket for processor O ZIF socket for processor 1 Processor O in slot 0 E Processor slot 1 dust cover Alignment hole on processor Alignment post on processor cage Alignment post on processor cage Processor 1 slot label module 1 Removing and Replacing a Processor 175 Figure 68 ZIF Socket Unlocked Installing a Processor NOTE Prior to installing a processor into the server read the following instructions carefully and refer to the figures in this chapter for a complete understanding of this process To install a processor l 2 gt Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 If rack mounted slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Remove the airflow guide if not already done See Removing the Airflow Guide page 143 Open the processor cage if not already done See Figure 64 a Grasp the processor cage handle and apply adequate force to rotate the handle upward b Use the handle to rotate the cage closure approximately 90 degrees toward the front of the assembly until it stops See Figure 65 IMPORTANT Ensure the processor slot is entirely exposed The processor must clear the cage enclosure for proper installation Locate the appropriate processor slot CPU O or CPU 1 for the pr
29. cont 108 Troubleshooting Still no iLO 2 MP prompt on system console Nothing is logged for this condition note if the iLO 2 MP is off the system health is off as well Front panel LEDs indicate that the server is either booting or running the OS Table 35 Basic Low End Troubleshooting continued Step Condition Action 1 Verify that the proper terminal type is set Supported settings are hpterm VT100 default and VTUTF8 2 Verity that the RS 232C configuration matches between the server and the local console or modem see Supported Configurations page 121 3 Look for loose damaged or disconnected power and signal cables on the I O backplane The preceding problem is fixed when iLO 2 MP menu appears on the system console and the system health is steady green 4b Cannot see EFI prompt on system console Nothing is logged for this condition system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green Front panel LEDs indicate that the server is either booting or running the OS 1 Examine the state flashing or steady on of the three LEDs located in the back left corner of the server visible through the perforations in the server Server logic and system firmware stages are tracked by the PDH FPGA using these three LEDs see Troubleshooting Tools page 111 2 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries re
30. e When the power button is pressed the BMC signals the bulk power supplies to fully power on e 12 VDC comes up and all of the cooling fans and the various VRMs come up sequentially e The BMC signals when the server is ready to come out of reset clocks are programmed and stable for example e The server is brought out of reset e The zx2 chip resets all components connected and the server begins the boot process Power LED Switch The front panel system power LED indicates the status of system power It is incorporated inside the power button itself The power button has a momentary switch as opposed to a latching switch that is recessed or covered to prevent accidental activation or de activation If the OS is up pressing the power button for less than four seconds results in a graceful shutdown of the operating system and a subsequent removal of system power Pressing the power button for greater than four seconds results in a hard shutdown system power removed While the server is 128 Troubleshooting booting before the system has passed EF I_EXIT_BOOT_SERVICES the BMC immediately powers the server off on a button press since there is no concept of soft shutdown in this state In the event that the OS is absent or hung or that the manageability subsystem specifically the BMC in the server is not responding a greater than four second press of the power button is required to powe
31. platforms The distribution method is through the web Table 46 General Diagnostic Tools List Diagnostic Tool IPMI Event Decoder Description Provides detailed information about the IPMI event Problem description cause action System Event Analyzer SEA 116 Troubleshooting Program which automatically analyzes system error logs and IPMI SEL events Produces Callout reports and CRU information Table 46 General Diagnostic Tools List continued Diagnostic Tool Description see http h18023 www 1 hp com support svctools webes for more information about this tool MCA Analyzer Program that assists in the evaluation of an MCA or HPMC Available as both a standalone PC based program and as a monitor Fault Management Overview The goal of fault management and monitoring is to increase system availability by moving from a reactive fault detection diagnosis and repair strategy to a proactive fault detection diagnosis and repair strategy The objectives are as follows e To detect problems automatically as nearly as possible to when they actually occur e To diagnose problems automatically at the time of detection e To automatically report in understandable text a description of the problem the likely cause s of the problem the recommended action s to resolve the problem and detailed information about the problem e To ensure that tools are available to repair or recover fr
32. 1 Check the previous sections of this chapter and attempt to solve the problem e Note failure symptoms and error indications LEDs and messages e Capture and permanently log the current SEL and FPL contents e Try to determine precisely what did or did not happen Reporting Your Problems to HP 137 2 Collect the following information The model number of your server for example rx2660 The product number of your server This can be found on the identification label which is found at the front of the unit The serial number of your server This can be found on the identification label 3 Be familiar with your system configuration Are you using the LAN RS 232 or web interface to monitor the server How many processors DIMMs and PCI cards have been installed What versions of processor memory and PCI cards are used and where are they installed What accessories are installed 4 Determine the following 138 Troubleshooting Which firmware versions are in use When did the problem start Have recent changes been made to the system Which OS and version is in use 6 Removing and Replacing Server Components This chapter describes safety information required service tools accessing the server and the removal and replacement of hardware components for the server Service Tools Required Service of this product requires one or more of the following tools e Electrically Conductive Field Service Grou
33. 2 MP Media Access Protocol MAC address on the Network Information Tag The Network Information Tag is on the right side of the server above the rail The DNS name is 14 characters long consisting of the letters mp followed by the 12 characters of the MAC address for example mp0017A499CD77 This address is assigned to the iLO 2 MP hardware The LO 2 MP hardware has a unique MAC address that identifies the hardware on the network IMPORTANT Make sure you obtain the MAC address of the iLO hardware and not the MAC address of the server core LAN card Connect the LAN cable into the iLO 2 MP port on the rear of the server Figure 32 page 64 shows the location of the iLO 2 MP port Connect the LAN cable from the server to an active network port Apply AC power to the server if not already done Open a browser telnet or SSH client and enter the iLO 2 MP IP address The iLO 2 MP Log In window opens Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using ARP Ping The Address Resolution Protocol ARP and Packet Internet Grouper Ping utility uses ARP packets to ping or discover a device on the local network segment The IP address you assign to the server must use the same network segment or subnet as the computer assigning the address ARP does not work across routed or switched networks 70 ARP Ping operational issues include the following You can use ARP Ping regardless of the status of DHCP unless an IP address has ever been acquir
34. 46 2 Remove the airflow guide See Removing the Airflow Guide page 47 Installing Additional Components 49 3 Complete the following memory installation prerequisite tasks before installing the memory a Determine the DIMM load order For more information see Memory Load Order page 49 b To determine which DIMM slots to populate see Figure 19 page 49 c Read understand and follow the general guidelines to install memory in the server 4 Install each DIMM a Align the DIMM with the slot located on the memory board and align the key in the connector with the notch in the DIMM b Firmly and evenly push on each end of the DIMM until it seats into the slot c Ensure the extraction levers are in the fully closed position 5 Replace the airtlow guide if you are finished installing additional components See Replacing the Airflow Guide page 55 6 Replace the top cover if you are finished installing additional components See Replacing the Top Cover page 61 Otherwise continue with installing components 9 TIP If you see abnormal error lights after installing DIMMS try uninstalling and reinstalling the DIMMs to make sure the DIMMS are correctly seated Installing a Processor The rx2660 server utilizes single or dual core processors Dual core processors contain two cores that function as separate processors Dual core processors double the processing power of the processor while main
35. 55 to determine the physical PCI slot number Table 53 I O Subsystem Events That Light System Insight Display LEDs Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s I O Card Type 02h 03h 05h 01h Over current on PCI slot BMC Likely a short on CURRENT_LIMIT_EXCEEDED eer I O Backplane Type 02h 02h 07h 03h Voltage on CRU is BMC A voltage on the VOLTAGE_DEGRADES TO NON RECOVERABLE inadequate I O backplane is out of range likely too low Disk Backplane Type 02h 02h 07h 03h Voltage on CRU is BMC A voltage on the VOITAGE_DEGRADES_TO_NON RECOVERABLE inadequate I O backplane is out of range likely too low Table 54 I O Card Events That Could Light System Insight Display LEDs Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s I O Card Type EOh 4658d 26d A non hot plug I O SFW Disallow O S 1O_PCI_POWER_OVERLOAD_ERR SIDE power past and displdy Do consumption increases the following EFI the total I O power error message 1 0 130 Troubleshooting Table 54 I O Card Events That Could Light System Insight Display LEDs continued Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s consumption beyond configuration the supported limit exceed I O Card Type EOh 137d 26d Insufficient power to SFW Display EFI IO NOT ENOUGH POWER ERROR power on a hot plug warning message E FRRO PCI X slot Failed I O slot s dec
36. 7 System Insight Display LEDs NOTE The System Insight Display is the same for the Data Center server and the Office Friendly server However the Office Friendly server only uses the bottom row of fan LEDs since there are only six fans for the Office Friendly server Storage and Media Devices The server contains up to eight hot pluggable SAS disk drives and one DVD or DVD RW drive Storage and media devices have LEDs that indicate activity and device status SAS Disk Drive LEDs The SAS hard drives have two LEDs per drive as described below See Figure 8 Drive Activity LED Drive Status LED The drive activity LED is steady green during normal operation and flickers when a drive is accessed The drive status LED is bi color and can display amber or blue Amber indicates a warning or failure condition Blue is a locator LED that identifies a particular disk drive The locator LED is activated through various software utilities such as online diagnostics and SAS disk drive configuration tools Controls Ports and LEDs 29 Drive activity LED Activity LED Off Steady green Flickering green Off Steady green Drive status LED Table 5 lists the SAS disk drive LEDs and states shown in Figure 8 Table 5 SAS Disk Drive LEDs Status LED Off Off Off Flashing amber at 1 Hz Flashing amber at 1 Hz SAS Disk Drive State Offline or not configured Normal operation no activity Normal operation disk rea
37. A A 139 O NEE SAE EE GE vnn naeeua 139 Server Component Class Mi Goblet sc its es ad ha ee eh ee eB oie ae a a ae a 140 Hot Swappable Componentsa cacit ts trac eel leo ce tee Riches et edt neta Ot dtl 140 Hot Pluggable Component ti ii 140 Cold Swappable COMP RA AT AE A AAA ARE 140 Accessing a RACK Mounted ett et rafia 141 Extending the Server from the RACK otsi lo dE 141 Inserting the Server into the ROCk c ccccccccesseeceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeesseseeeeecesesteeeeeeeeeseeteeeesesens 141 Accessing a Pedestal Mounted Severa dec tein anata toh RA a 141 Removing and Replacing the Top Covetisscsneiviccenssded deceesutcdandadsizsnnedueivendadelvesueboed dendeleleccstoxtadede 142 Removing the Top AAA A 142 Replacing th Top Cover iocis iin irene a ee lal eel os e E Ea 142 Removing and Replacing the Airflow Guide ooooooooccccooooooocccccooonnnnnnncccncnnnn nono nnnconanononcncnnnnns 143 Removing the E A O A 143 Replacing the AO e e e 145 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Server FaM oooooooocccccccooooooncccccocononononccconnnononnncconnns 145 Data Center Seria 145 Office Friendly Servern zante acu enini CETE E ERE AEREE REEERE 146 Removing a Server RIN se supra cine enii lay te i eves cal lo boots ren ene EEEE EE ea ba EEEo TE 147 Replacing Server Fi Ti aaa 149 Contents 7 8 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Supply ccccoooooooccccconooononccnccconanononcccconns 149 Power Supply Loading Guidelines tl
38. Ad Co Ed Sungate 7 gt 3 Su Remo HP Edit 0 gt 22 SN AutoBo Console Help Console Status Bo BootNe lt ENTER gt to enable disable P Primary Jus Sy 3 P p to select primary S Secondary ve Se Driver T t to select terminal type NC Not Configured ve Consol B b to select baud rate Noe System l i N gt So OS Use lt v gt to scroll lt ENTER gt to Select lt ESC gt or lt X x gt for Previous Menu Select the appropriate console configuration for your environment NOTE When exiting the Console Configuration screen be sure to save your changes and perform a server reset to activate your configuration changes IMPORTANT When selecting a console as Primary all other consoles must be set to NC to enable the OS console messages to display to the proper device This applies to all operating systems To manage the boot options list for each server use the EFI Shell the EFI Boot Option Maintenance Menu or operating system utilities At the EFI Shell use the bcf g command to support list and manage the boot options list for HP UX The EFI Boot Option Maintenance Menu provides the Add a Boot Option Delete Boot Option s and Change Boot Order menu items use this method if you must add an EFI Shell entry to the boot options list Operating system utilities for managing the boot options list include the HP UX set boot command
39. EFI Shell command prompt Allow the ELILO EF1 loader to proceed with booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux kernel By default the ELILO EFI loader boots the kernel image and options specified by the default item in the elilo conf file H To interact with the ELTLO EF1I loader interrupt the boot process for example enter a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the loader use the exit command Booting the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Operating System You can boot the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 operating system on HP Integrity servers using either of these methods Choose a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu To load the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server operating system at the EFI Boot Manager menu choose its entry from the list of boot options Choosing a Linux entry from the boot options list boots the operating system using ELILO EF loader and the elilo conffile Initiate the ELILO EFT Linux loader from the EFI Shell For more information see Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server from the EFI Shell page 102 On a SuSE Linux Enterprise Server boot device EFI System Partition the full paths to the loader and configuration files are as follows efi SuSE elilo efi and efi SuSE elilo conf After choosing the file system for the boot device for example s0 you can initiate the Linux loade
40. EOh 143d 26d I O rope reset failed SFW IO_ROPE_RESET_ERROR to complete I O Backplane LBAs Ropes PDH PCI X PCle Slots 131 Table 54 I O Card Events That Could Light System Insight Display LEDs continued Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s I O Card Type EOh 7346d PCle link failed to train SFW CC_IODISC_LBA_LINK_TRAIN_ERR I O Card Type EOh 7356d PCle link is not SFW IO_PCIE_LINK_SUBOPTIMAL running at max capable bandwidth Table 55 PCI X Rope to ACPI Paths Physical Slot Physical Rope Number Logical ACPI Path 1 public PCI X E 266 MHz 12 15 Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 700 Pci 1 0 2 public PCI X 133 MHz 10 11 Acpi HWPO0002 PNPOA03 600 Pci 1 0 3 public PCI X O 266 MHz 4 7 Acpi HWPO0002 PNPOA03 300 Pci 1 0 Table 56 PCle PCI X Rope to ACPI Paths Physical Slot Physical Rope Number Logical ACPI Path 1 public PCI e E 333 MHz 12 15 Acpi HPQ0002 PNPOA08 700 Pci O 0 2 public PCI e E 333 MHz 4 7 Acpi HPQ0002 PNPOA08 300 Pci O 0 3 public PCI X 133 MHz 10 11 Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 600 Pci 1 0 Management Subsystem LO 2 MP LAN LED on the Rear Panel The LO 2 MP LAN supports two LEDs viewable from the rear of the system 1 iLO 2 MP LAN LED which indicates link activity status 2 LAN LED which shows the link speed Only 10 Mb and 100 Mb speeds are currently supported on the iLO 2 MP LAN Table 57 iL
41. Event Logs To consult the event logs 1 2 3 Connect to the system console Use Ctrl B to access the iLO 2 MP menu Use the s1 command to view event logs System Event E and Forward Progress F logs are very useful in determining the context of an error 118 Troubleshooting NOTE E shows only event logs for Warning Critical or Fatal faults by default F shows all event log outputs System Event Logs SELs are never overwritten unless they are first manually cleared since they employ ring buffering oldest logs get overwritten first Forward Progress Logs FPL are circular and contain additional non critical information The alert threshold can be changed iLO 2 MP Event Logs The LO 2 MP provides diagnostic and configuration capabilities For details on the LO 2 MP commands see the HP Integrity iLO 2 Operations Guide To access the iLO 2 MP NOTE The iLO 2 MP must be accessed from a terminal console which has access to the LO 2 MP l Login with proper username and password NOTE Default operator login and password login oper password oper Press c1 to display the console history log This log displays console history from oldest to newest Press s1 to display the status logs The status logs consist of e System Event e Forward Progress e Current Boot e Previous Boot e Live Events e Clear SEL FPL Logs For a more information on configuring the iLO 2
42. Exit Where e NOVOLUME LABEL A hard drive You can search through the disk for bootable applications to add to the Boot Manager list of Boot options e Removable Media Boot Treats the removable media as a bootable device e Load File EFI Shell Adds a new instance to the EFI Shell Load File with the MAC address adds a network boot option e Load File with the MAC address Adds a network boot option Edit Boot Entry Use this option to edit the boot options on the EFI boot menu NOTE This does not delete any files applications or drivers from your server This option displays a list of boot options that are configured on your server The names match the options on the main Boot Manager menu If you remove a drive from your server you must manually delete it from the boot options list e To delete an item from the list use the arrow keys to highlight the item and press Enter e To remove all of the entries from the EFI boot menu select Delete All Boot Options This setting can be used as a security device on servers that are accessed remotely Delete Boot Option s Use this option to remove boot options from the EFI boot menu NOTE This does not delete any files applications or drivers from your system This option displays a list of boot options that are configured on the system The names match the options on the main Boot Manager menu If you remove a drive from the system you
43. External Power System Insight Normal Power Up Through OS Health Health Health Display Boot 5 Off Steady Steady Steady Off System is booting firmware green green green has passed BOOT_START in firmware 6 Steady Steady Steady Steady Off System has finished booting green green green green firmware and an OS is either booting or running NOTE In the normal boot process shown in the preceding table even though the BMC is running while the system is shut down power LED is steady amber it doesn t drive the external health LED to steady green until 12 VDC power from the Bulk Power Supplies is applied The following list itemizes the steps that characterize basic platform boot flow Step numbers provided correspond to the steps in Table 62 3 System power switch turns on bulk power supplies and fans and releases RESET on all CPUs simultaneously when toggled on 5 Initial CPU firmware code fetch is PAL code from EEPROM in PDH retrieved 4 bytes at a time by DMDC in zx2 No shared memory or I O devices are available at this time for example they are not initially configured 5 Firmware code stack is initially in BBRAM in PDH retrieved 4 byes at a time through PDH and DMD buses 5 PAL code configures all CPUs 5 SAL code configures all platform zx2 chips including shared memory and all responding O devices 5 Firmware code and stack are relocated to shared memory after all x4 DIMM ranks in shared memory are
44. FLASHING AMBER Steady green Steady green 8b in Table 36 FLASHING AMBER FLASHING AMBER Steady green Steady green 3a 3b in Table 35 OR RED Off Steady green Steady green Steady green 4a 4b 4c and 4d in Table 35 Steady green off Steady green Steady green Steady green 8a in Table 36 Steady green Steady green Steady green Steady green 5 6 and 7 in Table 35 and Table 36 106 Troubleshooting Table 35 Basic Low End Troubleshooting Step 1 Condition Server appears dead no front panel LEDs are on and no fans are running Action Nothing is logged for this condition 1 For new server installations review the install procedures 2 Verify that the power cord s are connected to both the power supplies and to the AC receptacle s 3 Verify that AC power at the proper AC voltage levels is available to the receptacle s 4 Check the front panel connector and the cable to the rest of the system 5 If the integrated power button LED on front panel remains off then re seat the power supplies replace the power cords and replace the bulk power supplies in that order see Power Subsystem page 128 The preceding problem is fixed when the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is off external health is off and power is steady amber 2a 2b Server does not power on after front panel power button is momentarily pressed less th
45. HP requires that an authorized service provider replace the part Based on availability and where geography permits CRU parts are shipped for next business day delivery Same day or four hour delivery might be offered at an additional charge where geography permits If assistance is required you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the telephone HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CRU part whether a defective part must be returned to HP In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP you must ship the defective part back to HP within a dened period of time normally five 5 business days The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement With a CRU HP pays for all the shipping and part return costs and determines the courier to be used For more information about HP s Customer Self Repair program contact your local service provider For the North American program refer to the HP website at http www hp com go selfrepair Table 67 provides customer self repair information Table 67 Customer Self Repair Information Code Level Description Comments AY Yes Level A with instructions Requires you to replace these parts under warranty No available in the service guide technical skills required BY Optional Level B wi
46. Integrity rx2660 Server Pedestal Installation Guide Follow the steps in this installation guide to attach the pedestal to the server Connecting the Cables This section describes the cables to connect to power the server and to provide LAN connectivity for the server AC Input Power The server can receive AC input from two different AC power sources The power receptacles are located at the rear of the chassis They are labeled Power Supply 1 and Power Supply 2 For the Data Center server you can install a maximum of two power supplies in the server Installing two power supplies in the server provides 1 1 redundancy meaning that if one power supply fails there is still enough power supplied to the server to operate You must promptly replace the failed power supply to restore 1 1 functionality A minimum of one power supply is required to power the server If only one power supply is installed in the server there is no 1 1 capability For the Office Friendly server two power supplies are required to power the server The office friendly server can run on one power supply but runs quieter and more efficiently with two power supplies installed Power States The server has three power states e Standby power e Full power Off Table 24 Server Power States Power States Power Cable Power Activated through the iLO 2 MP Pc Standby DC DC Voltage Plugged Into Command or Front Panel Power Button Voltage Applied Receptac
47. LAN Disabled To display the current device connection policy setting fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init Fast initialization Enabled To disable fast initialization fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init off Fast initialization Disabled To enable the System Wake On LAN setting fs0 X gt ioconfig wol on System Wake On LAN Enabled baud Sets the baud rate and communication settings for a universal asynchronous receiver transmitter UART Syntax baud lt index gt lt baudrate gt Parameters lt index gt 0 through the total number of UARTS minus one lt baudrate gt baud rate Operation Use this command to change the speed for a UART in the system This command works for all UARTs visible to EFI POSSE If the UART is part of processor dependent hardware PDH space and is initialized by the core firmware this command communicates the settings to core firmware so the UART can be initialized with the new settings on the next boot System default is 9600 baud Table 72 Communications Parameters Parameter Value RECEIVE_FIFO_DEPTH TIMEOUT 1000000 PARITY No parity 218 Utilities Table 72 Communications Parameters continued Parameter Value DATA_BITS 8 STOP_BITS 1 CONTROL_MASK 0 boottest Interacts with the speedy boot variable allowing it to be set appropriately Syntax boottest boottest on boottest off boottest test boottest test onloff Displ
48. LwAd 5 9 B Maximum configuration disk active LwAd 7 0 B LwAd 5 9 B Sound Pressure Level LpAm 51 6 dB LpAm 41 4 dB Altitude Operating altitude O to 3000 m 10 000 ft maximum Storage altitude i Typical configuration at room temperature 25 C O to 4572 m 15 000 ft maximum 2 Single processor one to two SCSI hard disk drives and less than 8 GB of memory 3 Dual processor three SCSI hard disk drives and more than 8 GB of memory Table 19 Physical and Environmental Specifications for the Data Center Server Server Specifications Condition Weight Server Dimensions Typical Heat Nominal Maximum Release Airflow Airflow 35 degrees 100 127 200 240 c Server Rack Pedestal Rack Pedestal VAC VAC Watts Watts CFM m3 hr CFM m3 hr 21 kg 25 30kg D67 3 D 69 cm W 27 6 28 kg kg 37 kg cmW cm with feet W Minimum 363 W 363 W 6l 104 112 190 46 lb 32 66 Ib 48 3 cm 12 7 cm w o Config 61lb fkg 81 lb H8 6 feet H 50 8 D 55 cm D 27 2 in W 10 8 oo 782 W 782 W 79 134 112 190 Ib 26 5 in in with feet W onig 70 W 19 in 5 0 in w o feet Typical 483 W 483w l 104 112 190 Ib H 3 4 in H 20 0 in Config ASHRAE Airflow cooling scheme front to rear Min Two 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs n o PCle PCI X public cards Class 1 config or RAID card on private I O slot A Ma
49. P Primary Jus loe P p to select primary S Secondary ve Driver T t to select terminal type NC Not Configured A ZE B b to select baud rate i Edit O ronca This menu is identical to Console Error Devices HP Integrity servers do not support different configurations for Input Output and Error console For correct operation you must do the following e When changes are made to Input Output or Error console menus you must make the identical change in all menus e When changing serial devices you must also make changes to Input Output and Error menus To define the devices that are used to provide input and output to the system console 1 Select the console P Serial or S VGA Each option is identitied with an EFI device path Not all options are available depending on the configuration of the server and the options purchased NOTE Device paths might differ slightly on different servers 2 Select the console configuration option On both serial device examples UART 9600 indicates the current baud rate of the serial device can be changed with the EFI Shell baud command VenMsg Vt100 is the current emulation type several different terminal emulation protocols are supported Only one terminal emulation type can be selected for each serial console but multiple serial consoles can be selected at a time Select Active Standard Error Devic
50. Pci 2 0 00 00 02 01 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 2 1 00 00 02 02 0x1033 0x00E0 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 2 2 00 00 03 00 0x1002 0x515E XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 3 0 00 01 01 00 0x1000 0x0054 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 200 Pci 1 0 00 01 02 00 0x14E4 0x1648 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 2 0 00 01 02 01 0x14E4 0x1648 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 2 1 00 02 01 00 0x1133 0xB921 03 Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 300 Pci 1 0 00 03 01 00 0x13F6 0x0111 02 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 600 Pci 1 0 00 04 01 00 0x8086 0x1079 01 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 700 Pci 1 0 00 04 01 01 0x8086 0x1079 01 Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 700 Pci 1 1 Fast initialization Disabled Verifying Installed Components In the Server System Wake On LAN Enabled BOOT INFORMATION Monarch CPU Current Preferred Monarch Monarch CPU CPU Module Module Logical Logical Warnings 0 0 0 0 AutoBoot OFF Timeout is disabled Boottest BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable OS is not speedy boot aware Selftest Setting early_cpu Run this test late_cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test LAN Address Information LAN Address Path 0017A4990DFB 0017A4990DFA 001560045FE0 001560045FE1 Mac Mac Mac Mac HWP0002 PNP0A03 200 HWP0002 PNP0A03 200 HWP0002 PNPOA03 700 HWP0002 PNPOA03 700 0017A4990DFB 0017A4990DF 001560045F 00
51. Problem Front panel LED blinking NOTE The front panel health LEDs flash amber with a warning indication or flash red with a fault indication o System Alert on console Analyze the alert by using the system event log SEL to identify the last error logged by the server Use the iLO 2 MP commands to view the SEL either through the iLO 2 MP serial text interface or through telnet SSH or through the web GUI on the iLO 2 MP LAN You should now have a good idea about which area of the system requires further analysis For example if the symptom was system won t power up the initial troubleshooting procedure might indicate a problem with the DC power rail not coming up after the power switch was turned on You have now reached the point where the failed CRU has been identified and needs to be replaced Perform the specific removal and replacement procedure and verification steps see Chapter 6 Removing and Replacing Server Components page 139 for the appropriate procedures NOTE If multiple CRUs are identified as part of the solution a fix cannot be guaranteed unless all identified failed CRUs are replaced There could be specific recovery procedures you need to perform to finish the repair For example if the system board is replaced you need to restore customer specific information 104 Troubleshooting Should a failure occur the System Insight Display LEDs and the system event log SEL help you ide
52. SAS controller is allowed to resynchronize the disks the data on the primary disk is available by accessing the newly created volume AUTO Command The AUTO command automatically creates an IM volume on the SAS controllers The volume is created with the maximum number of disks available for use in the specified volume type The main difference between the AUTO command and the CREATE command is that with AUTO command you do not specify SCSI ID values for disks to use in the volume The cfggen utility uses the first disks it finds that are usable in the IM volume Firmware and hardware limitations for the family of controllers limit the number of configurations that are possible 234 Utilities Syntax cfggen lt controller gt auto lt volume type gt lt size gt qsync noprompt Parameters lt volume type gt Volume type for the volume to be created Valid value is IM lt size gt Size of the RAID volume in megabytes or MAX for the maximum size available qsync Quick synchronization of the volume created noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts Operation When AUTO creates an IM volume the first disk found is assigned as the primary disk If the controller is allowed to resynchronize the disks the data on the primary disk is available by accessing the newly created volume Reply Yes if you want to complete the creation HOTSPARE Command The hot spare command creates a hot spare disk The hot spare
53. Server from the EFI Sh ll oooooooonnocccnnnnnccnnncocccnconancccnnnoo 102 SA O eatatee ERE a ae 103 SMA tie cn sls E cash ball R E 104 General Troubleshooting Methodology ooooccccooooooonococoononnnnnncccononon ono nnncnononononcnnccnnnnnnnnnno 104 Recommended Troubleshooting Methodology oooccccocoooocccccccononononncconconnn nono ncnconnononncccnonns 105 Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables oca 106 Troubleshooting TO cti 111 a A A A vend aS eSa 111 NE ETa A O CN 111 o A IT 111 Internal HD a a a a is 112 System Health ED cpr O ENS A T ORE E EE 113 Locator Switch LED Unit Identifier or UID ooooooncnncncnonnnononononinonnonananannccoos 113 System Insight Display LEDS ld as 114 Field Replaceable Unit Health LEDS ocoooooooconcoooooooonccccnonononononononanononcnccnonnnnnnnnno 114 Diagnostics sso fran a eatery O 114 Online Diagnosis Exeo sescsacet a aie sais Caen cst bx sisimescaceds es aetaesen eased esata duces ccwiele oudeetaot 115 Online Support Tool Awa anit e ts li et ate ae 115 Online Suppor Tools sia ii dci 115 Linux Online A elt cleng eR atv he danas tend hee sto abt 116 Offline Support Tools LIST acccescautcouco seeusbsucnbecsbdeiedsanshemenantdeded sebadantnontaneaduandcentecsmmaseduatadendes 116 General Diagnostic e Be Re eed 116 Fault Management Or sean eat a a olaaa 117 HP UX Fault Mano ME tata 117 WBEM Indication Providers and EMS Hardware MonitoFS
54. T15 screwdriver 3 Insert the PCle PCI X card into the empty slot and exert even pressure to seat the card in the slot A CAUTION Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card can fail after power is applied to the slot 4 Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card if it is full length Installing the Server 5 Attach the PCle PCI X card to the I O backplane by tightening the T 15 screw on the I O backplane Replacing the I O Backplane Card Cage To replace the I O backplane card cage into the server 1 Align the tabs with the guide slots in the server and slide the O backplane assembly into place 2 Tighten the two captive screws a Press the black knob down while turning it clockwise until it is fully tightened b While holding the black knob and pressing down press and release the blue button to lower the black knob to the locked position 3 If you are done installing additional components replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 61 If you have more components to install continue on to the next section Installing the SAS Smart Array and PCle Expansion Boards The rx2660 server has two slots dedicated for the SAS Smart Array P400 controller and PCle expansion boards If you purchase the RAID option you must install these boards on the system board See for the slot locations on the system board Installing the PCle Expansion Board To install the PCle expansio
55. The firmware version 03 01 or later is current as of the release date of this guide System firmware updates are available from the HP Business Support Center at http www hp com go bizsupport To update your firmware 1 Start up the system and go to the EFI command prompt 2 To determine the current firmware version run the EFl info fw command at the EFI Shell prompt 3 Choose the appropriate firmware package from the choices available on the HP Support Center web page at http www hp com go bizsupport If a new version of the firmware is available download it and save it to CD or copy it over the network to the system you are updating Server Interface System Console All system console connections VGA USB local RS 232 and iLO 2 MP LAN are located on the rear panel of the rx2660 server HP UX uses the RS 232 serial text connection to a dumb terminal or terminal emulator software running on a PC to control server operations locally HP UX alternatively uses the LO 2 MP LAN connection over a private network to control server operations locally through telnet or SSH and remotely over a public network through web GUI Both the Windows and LINUX operating systems use the VGA monitor and USB keyboard and mouse connections to control server operations locally Troubleshooting Tips RS 232 connection If a dumb terminal PC running terminal emulation software is attached to the iLO 2 MP local port and does not
56. ada aC aot areas ce 150 Removing a Power SUD IVseeu he cee ca thct e ed a 150 Replacing a Power SUBD Ysastaedsecer iodo tiens lvl lsinpidedo ee 151 Removing and Replacing a Hard Drive Piller oc ais 151 Removing a Hard Drive llene tii did 151 Replacing a Hard Drive Hill ida 152 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable SAS Hard Drive occcooooooooccccoooooonononocoononononcnccnnnns 152 Removing a SAS Hard DE TR ea 152 Replacing SAS Hard Driver a AS 153 Removing and Replacing the DVD Drive occccooooooccccccocooonnnononooonnnnonnnncoconono non nnncnnnnononcncnnnnns 154 Removing the DVD Drive A deca ALA AAN EREE its 154 Replacing the DVD Dive oi A eau Cosa A 154 Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel a e de 154 Removing the Front Bezana 155 Replacing the Front A ste oid at nie Aunt ent Malvade eae Bunnell bat ats 156 Removing and Replacing the System Insight Display oooooooccccccoooooooccccononannccccoconanononccccnnnns 156 Removing the System slap ie 156 Replacing the System Insight Displays sxas cetsueastaneeta gs aaweaitaeet ste auto teicataey sa itaiealaese 157 Removing and Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly ccoooooococccccoooooononcccononanononccononnononcnninnnns 158 Removing the Fan Carrier Assembly ict A 458 ceri eavien da 158 Replacing the Fan Carrier Ass mba a 160 Removing and Replacing the I O Fan Carrier Assembly ooooooccccoooooooocccoooooonnononocconnnononcnccnnnns 161 Removing the I O Fan Carrie
57. adjacent power supply or metal filler panel 3 Plug the power cord into the power supply receptacle 4 Attach the power cord to the power cord anchor attached to the power supply Removing and Replacing a Hard Drive Filler There are hard drive fillers installed in a vertical orientation for all slots that do not contain a hard drive The slot fillers are hot swappable O IMPORTANT For cooling purposes always leave hard drive fillers in slots that do not contain a hard drive Removing a Hard Drive Filler To remove a hard drive filler 1 Squeeze the tabs on the front of the filler to release it from the slot in the drive bay 1 2 Pull gently until the filler slides out of the server 2 Removing and Replacing a Hard Drive Filler 151 Figure 48 Removing and Replacing a Hard Drive Filler Replacing a Hard Drive Filler To replace a hard drive filler 1 Orient the hard drive filler so that the airflow holes are on the bottom of the filler 2 Insert the filler into the slot guides and slide the filler into the slot until it clicks into place and is fully seated 2 Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable SAS Hard Drive You can install up to eight hot pluggable SAS hard drives located on the front panel of the server Replace the SAS hard drives using these procedures when server power is on or off The SAS hard drives are small form factor 2 5 in disk drives Supported capacities are as follows e 36GB e 73
58. and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 93 4 5 6 7 From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list to boot OpenVMS using the chosen boot option Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the server on which you want to boot OpenVMS Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to choose the system console NOTE When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFl Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading At the EFl Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments to use when booting the device Press Enter to initiate booting using the chosen boot option Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Enter Ctr1 B to exit the system console and return to the iLO 2 MP Main Menu Exit iLO 2 MP by entering x at the LO 2 MP Main Menu Booting HP OpenVMS EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment to boot OpenVMS on a device first access the bootable partition for example s0 for the root device and enter efi vms vms_loader to initiate the OpenVMS loader l Access the EFI Shell environment for the server on which you want to boot OpenVMS Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to choose the system console NOTE When acc
59. b Grounding The site building shall provide a safety ground protective earth for each AC service entrance to all cabinets Install a PE protective earthing conductor that is identical in size insulation material and thickness to the branch circuit supply conductors The PE conductor must be green with yellow stripes The earthing conductor is to be connected from the unit to the building installation earth or if supplied by a separately derived system at the supply transformer or motor generator set grounding point Electrical Specifications This section provides electrical specifications for the server System Power Specifications 36 Available power output is the maximum DC power that the power supply can supply to the system Maximum input power is what the power supply requires from the AC line to deliver that maximum DC output given worst case efficiency and maximum loading Maximum input current is the worst case highest current given the lowest input voltage and the maximum input power Table 16 System Power Specifications Parameter Total Rating Input voltage 100 VAC 100 127 VAC 200 240 VAC Marked input current 10 A 10 A 7A Input current maximum 10A 10A 6 7 A Input frequency 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz 47 to 63 Hz Server Specifications Table 16 System Power Specifications continued Parameter Total Rating Maximum AC input power 1000 W 1000 W 1205
60. buildup such as wool or synthetic materials e If installing an internal assembly wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit e Handle accessory boards and components by the edges amy Do not touch any metal edge connectors or any electrical components on accessory boards A WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury from hot surfaces allow the internal server components to cool before touching them Upgrading the I O Backplane Use these procedures to upgrade the O backplane assembly from a PIC X I O backplane to a PCI X PCle I O backplane The I O backplane assembly consists of the O backplane board and a sheet metal enclosure The PCI X I O backplane board contains three full length public PCI X I O slots Performing a Server Backup Record the boot configuration settings To find the settings use the INFO ALL EFI Shell command TIP Running the info io command from the EFI Shell allows you to record the device codes given in HEX for your I O devices This can be helpful in verifying I O cards after the upgrade Powering Off the Server 1 Shut down the operating system See Chapter 4 page 85 2 Power off the server See Powering Off the Server page 78 Accessing the Server 1 There are two mounting configurations for the server pedestal mounted and rack mounted Depending on the your mounting config
61. configuration Unpacking and Inspecting the Server This section describes procedures you perform before installation Ensure that you have adequately prepared your environment for the new server received the components that you ordered and verified that the server and its containers are in good condition after shipment Verifying Site Preparation Verifying site preparation is an essential factor of a successful server installation and includes the following tasks e Gather LAN information The IP addresses for the iLO 2 MP LAN and the system LAN are located on the right side of the server near the bezel above the rack mounting rail e Establish a method to connect to the server console e Verify electrical requirements Ensure that grounding specifications and power requirements are met e Validate server physical space requirements e Confirm environmental requirements For server specific information on electrical physical space and environmental requirements see Chapter 2 page 35 For general site preparation information see the HP website and search for Generic Site Preparation Guidelines Inspecting the Shipping Containers for Damage HP shipping containers protect their contents under normal shipping conditions After the equipment arrives carefully inspect each carton for signs of shipping damage Shipping damage constitutes moderate to severe damage such as punctures in the corrugated carton crushed box
62. contents are a list separated by you must choose one of the items The contents are required in syntax If the contents are a list separated by you must choose one of the items The preceding element can be repeated an arbitrary number of times O Indicates the continuation of a code example Separates items in a list of choices WARNING A warning calls attention to important information that if not understood or followed will result in personal injury or nonrecoverable system problems CAUTION A caution calls attention to important information that if not understood or followed will result in data loss data corruption or damage to hardware or software IMPORTANT This alert provides essential information to explain a concept or to complete a task NOTE A note contains additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text HP UX Release Name and Release Identifier Each HP UX 11i release has an associated release name and release identifier The uname 1 command with the r option returns the release identifier This table shows the releases available for HP UX 11i Table 2 HP UX 11i Releases Release Identifier Supported Processor Architecture B 11 31 HP UX 11i v3 Intel Itanium Related Information You can find other information on HP server hardware management Microsoft Windows and diagnostic support tools in the following publications You can find other information on HP
63. down Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 95 2 At the OpenVMS DCL prompt issue thee SYS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN command and specify the shutdown options in response to the prompts given S sysS system shutdown SHUTDOWN Perform an Orderly System Shutdown on node NODE1 How many minutes until final shutdown 0 Reason for shutdown Standalone Do you want to spin down the disk volumes NO Do you want to invoke the site specific shutdown procedure YES Should an automatic system reboot be performed NO When will the system be rebooted later Shutdown options enter as a comma separated list REMOVE_NODE Remaining nodes in the cluster should adjust quorum CLUSTER_SHUTDOWN Entire cluster is shutting down REBOOT_CHECK Check existence of basic system files SAVE_FEEDBACK Save AUTOGEN feedback information from this boot DISABLE_AUTOSTART Disable autostart queues POWER_OFF Request console to power off the system BIB_STATE Request console to reboot all CPUs to the Itanium BIB state Shutdown options NONE REBOOT_CHECK oe SHUTDOWN I BOOTCHECK performing reboot consistency check SHUTDOWN I CHECKOK basic reboot consistency check completed oe oe UTDOWN I OPERATOR this terminal is now an operator s console UTDOWN I DISLOGINS interactive logins will now be disabled T U oe oe nan Ww I INTSET login interac
64. facilitate the reproduction of intermittent problems Information modules create a log of information specific to one device including e The product identifier e A description of the device e The hardware path to the device e The vendor e Onboard log information if applicable e Miscellaneous information associated with the device e The firmware revision code if firmware is present in the device is also displayed Expert tools are device specific troubleshooting utilities for use by sophisticated users Their functionality varies from tool to tool but they are intended to be interactive and rely on users to provide information necessary to perform a particular task These tools require users to have the appropriate license if they wish to run them Online Support Tool Availability Online diagnostics are included in the HP UX OE media and are installed by default Online Support Tools List The following online support tools are available on HP UX 11 23 hosted systems In some cases a tool such as a disk exerciser is generic to many types of hardware in other cases a tool such as a tape diagnostic is specific to a particular technology or type of tape drive Table 44 Online Support Tools List Functional Area Information Exercise Diagnose System CPU FPU No No Yes No Yes Memory Yes No Yes No No Graphics Yes Yes Yes No No Core I O LAN Yes Yes Yes Yes No Disk Arrays Yes Yes Yes No
65. is used as a parameter verbose help displays for that command If you issue the help command with the bch option it displays a list of BCH commands and their corresponding EFI POSSE commands It instructs you to repeat the command line followed by a menu name for more information on that menu If you issue help within the bch option and a menu name it displays a list of commands that appear under that BCH menu You can then issue help followed by bch the menu name and a BCH command name to display information about that command This points you to the EFl command that has taken the place of that BCH functionality or informs the user that the functionality no longer exists Alternately enter help followed by bch and a BCH command name to go straight to that command The following examples show the available options and output EFI POSSE Commands 215 Example 2 he 1p command Shell gt help List of classes of commands boot Booting options and disk related commands configuration Changing and retrieving system information devices Getting device driver and handle information memory Memory related commands shell Basic shell navigation and customization scripts EFI shell script commandsType help followed by a class name for a list of commands in that class Type help followed by command name for full documentation Example 3 help bch command COnfiguration help bch co INformation help bch in PAth help b
66. left slot is P2 Figure 14 Power Supply Location Power supply 1 Power supply 2 A CAUTION Ifyou do not purchase a second power supply the empty power supply slot must remain covered with the supplied metal filler panel Failure to observe this caution can result in server shutdown due to overheating Installing a Power Supply To install a power supply 1 Remove the metal slot filler by pulling it straight out of the server using the finger holes 1 Installing Additional Components 45 Support the power supply with both hands and slide it into the empty slot until it clicks into place 2 IMPORTANT Ensure the power supply is flush with the adjacent power supply Figure 15 Installing a Power Supply Removing the Top Cover 46 When installing internal components into the server you must first remove the top cover To remove the top cover l 2 3 Unlock the cover release lever if necessary by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees counterclockwise with the Allen wrench provided on the rear panel of the server 1 Pull up on the cover release lever to disengage the top cover from the chassis 2 Slide the cover toward the rear of the server until the tabs release from the slots in the chassis 3 Lift the cover off the chassis 4 Figure 16 Removing the Top Cover Installing the Server Removing the Airflow Guide The airflow guide in the rx2660 server directs airflow from eight o
67. must manually delete it from the boot options list e To delete an item from the list use the arrow keys to highlight the item and press Enter e To remove all of the entries from the EFI Boot menu select Delete All Boot Options This setting can be used as a security device on systems that are accessed remotely Change Boot Order Use this option to remove boot options entry The order in which options are listed in the EFI boot menu also reflects the order in which the server attempts to boot If the first boot option fails the server tries booting the second then the third and so forth until a boot option succeeds or until all options have failed For example if you normally boot using a configuration on your LAN but would like to boot from a local hard drive if the LAN is unavailable move the LAN boot option to the top of the list followed by the hard drive boot option The menu lists boot options that currently exist in the main Boot Manager menu You can change the priority of the items by moving them up or down in the list e Press U to move an option up e Press D to move an option down e Select Save Settings to NVRAM to modify the order in the Boot Manager menu which modifies the order that the Boot Manager attempts to boot the options e The items at the bottom of the screen are descriptions of the selected option Change boot order Select an Operation EFI Shell Built in Current OS 242 Utilities Save Setting
68. o detected by cache parity processor Table 47 Processor Events That Light System Insight Display LEDs continued Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s errors on processor Processors Type EOh 5824d 26d Too many WIN Agent Threshold PEM CORR ERROR MEM corrected exceeded for 7 errors detected cache errors by platform from processor corrected by zx2 Processors Type 02h 02h 07h 03h Voltage on BMC Power Pod VOLTAGE_DEGRADES_TO_NON_RECOVERABLE CRU is vollage on inadequate of range likely too low Table 48 Processor Events That Could Light System Insight Display LEDs Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s Processors Type EOh 734d 26d Installed SFW BOOT_CPU_LOADING_ERROR prore sanare not compatible Processors Type EOh 2953d 26d Processors SFW BOOT_CPU_LOADING_ERROR andor termination out of order Processors Type EOh 36d 26d A logical CPU SFW BOOT_CPU_LATE_TEST_FAIL ubrecd tailed late self test Processors Type EOh 677d 26d A logical CPU SFW MC_RENDEZVOUS_SLAVES_FAIL ulead slaye failed to rendezvous Processors Type EOh 30d 26d A CPU core SFW BOOT_CPU_CONFIG_FAIL ai configuration process Processor Type EOh 790d 26d A processor SFW BOOT_CPU_BAD_CORE_FIXED_RATIO ined core _ frequency ratio is incompatible with bus frequency Processor _ Type EOh 745d 26d A watchdog SFW BOOT_FINAL_RENDEZ
69. of one power supply You can install or replace a hot swappable power supply using the procedures in this section when power is on or off if you have two power supplies Removing and Replacing a HotSwappable Power Supply 149 The supported configuration of the Office Friendly server is two power supplies You can install or replace a hot swappable power supply using the procedures in this section when power is on or off A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can cause damage to the server NOTE A hot swappable device does not require that you interact with the operating system before the device is removed from or installed into the server Power to the server does not have to be off to install or replace a hotswappable power supply as long as there is another power supply installed in the server and is connected to a power source Power Supply Loading Guidelines The supported configuration for the Data Center server requires that at least one power supply be installed in slot P1 or slot P2 You can install a second optional hot swappable power supply to provide 1 1 capability The right side viewed from the rear of the server hot swappable power supply is identified as P1 and the second hot swappable power supply to the left is P2 See Figure 47 The supported configuration for the Office Friendly server requires that both power suppli
70. operating system For more information see the operating system documentation DD 0 Aa0N gt Powering On the Server Manually NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the LO 2 MP PR command the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server To manually power on the server 1 Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server Powering On and Powering Off the Server 77 2 Press the power button to start the server 3 Start the operating system For more information see the operating system documentation Powering Off the Server Power off the server using the following methods if the server is in the standby or full power state e iLO 2 MP PC command e Power button Powering Off the Server Using the LO 2 MP To power off the server using the iLO 2 MP 1 Gracefully shut down the operating system See the operating system documentation for more information Initiate a console session and access the MP Main Menu Enter CM to enable command mode Enter PC to use the remote power control command Enter OFF to power off the server and enter YES when prompted to confirm the action AP ca ed A CAUTION The main DC voltage is now removed from the system however AC voltage for standby power is still present in the server 6 Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server P
71. safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Fan Carrier Assembly This procedure applies to the Data Center server fan assembly or the Office Friendly server fan assembly To remove the fan carrier assembly 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 158 Removing and Replacing Server Components gt Remove all of the fans from the fan carrier See Removing a Server Fan page 147 Lift up on the fan carrier assembly handle and rotate it approximately 90 degrees 1 See Figure 55 Figure 55 Removing and Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly Removing and Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly 139 6 Lift the fan carrier assembly straight up and out of the server 2 See Figure 56 or Figure 57 Figure 56 Data Center Fan Carrier Assembly Removed Figure 57 Office Friendly Server Fan Carrier Assembly Removed Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly This procedure applies to the Data Center server fan assembly or the Office Friendly server fan assembly To replace the fan carrier assembly 1 Align the tabs on the fan carrier assembly with the guide slo
72. server backup block diagrams I O subsystem 20 system 18 boot EFI boot manager 212 boot configuration menu 240 Boot Manager menu see EFI Boot Manager menu boot option delete 242 boot options list adding HP UX 88 adding Linux 100 adding Windows 96 boot options list update 85 booting HP UX 87 LVM maintenance mode 91 single user mode 90 Linux 100 OpenVMS 92 Red Hat Linux 101 SuSE Linux 102 from EFI Shell 102 Windows 96 E cfggen utility 233 AUTO command 234 CREATE command 234 HOTSPARE command 235 parameters 233 starting 233 checklist server installation 40 CM command 77 78 cold swappable components listed 140 defined 140 command mode see CM commands devtree EFl capable devices and controller handles displaying 237 drvcfg EFI configurable components displaying 237 EFI driver handle determining 238 EFI SCSI setup utility starting 238 info adapter path 236 adapter slot number 236 component classification 140 components cold swappable defined 140 hot pluggable defined 140 configurable components EFI capable displaying 237 configuring boot options 85 87 console problems occur 84 console session determining connection method 68 using VGA 76 controller handle 237 controls front panel functions 27 cooling 23 see also fans cooling zones 145 146 cover top remove 46 142 removing and replacing 46 142 143 replace 61 142 209 thermal considerations 142 C
73. server hardware management and diagnostic support tools in the following publications HP Technical Documentation Website http www hp com go Integrity Servers docs Windows Operating System Information Find information about administration of the Microsoft Windows operating system at http www microsoft com technet Diagnostics and Event Monitoring Hardware Support Tools HP UX Release Name and Release Identifier 15 Complete information about HP hardware support tools including online and offline diagnostics and event monitoring tools is on the HP website at htto www docs hp com HP UX dia Website for HP Technical Support htto h20219 www2 hp com services cache 126868 0 0 225 121 html jumpid reg R1002 USEN Books About HP UX Published by Prentice Hall You can find the entire Prentice Hall Professional Series on HP at htto www informit com imprint series detail aspx st 61305 Contacting HP Before You Contact HP Be sure to have the following information available before you call contact HP e Technical support registration number if applicable e Product serial number e Product model name and number e Product identification number e Applicable error message e Add on boards or hardware e Third party hardware or software e Operating system type and revision level HP Contact Information For the name of the nearest HP authorized reseller e In the United States see the HP US service locator webpa
74. servers you must install the second processor in the CPU 1 slot Table 66 Processor Load Order Processor 1 CPU O 2 CPU 1 Required Tools To install and remove processors use the processor install tool fastened to the airflow guide Removing a Processor To remove a processor 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Remove the airflow guide See Removing the Airflow Guide page 143 5 Open the processor cage a Grasp the processor cage handle and apply adequate force to rotate the handle upward See Figure 64 b Use the handle to rotate the cage closure approximately 90 degrees toward the front of the server until it stops See Figure 65 IMPORTANT Ensure the processors are entirely exposed and can clear the cage enclosure for removal 6 Disconnect the processor power cable from the connector cable attached to the system board See Figure 66 7 Unlock the processor from the socket on the processor board See Figure 67 a Unfasten the processor installation tool 2 5 mm driver from the tool holder on the airflow guide b Insert the processor tool into the hole on the side of the heatsink 172 Removing and Repl
75. supply does not illuminate in the standby power state The LED illuminates green when the server is powered on to full power If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO 2 MP PR command the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged into the server If the server has two power supplies plug the second power cord into the power supply in slot P2 Plug the other end of the power cord into an appropriate outlet Connecting to the LAN The server has two LAN ports that provide network connectivity Figure 32 page 64 shows the available LAN ports for the server To enable general network connectivity for the server l 2 Obtain valid IP addresses for each LAN port you plan to activate Connect the LAN cable from an available LAN port into a live connection on the network Connecting and Setting Up the Console This section describes how to set up and start a console session on the server Setting Up the Console Setting up the console includes the following steps Determine the physical access method to connect cables There are two physical connections to the iLO 2 MP o RS 232 o LAN Configure the Integrity iLO 2 MP and assign an IP address if necessary Though there are several methods to configuring the LAN DHCP with DNS is the preferred method DHCP with DNS comes preconfigured with default factory settings including a default user account and password O
76. the socket on the system board 2 Insert the power supply riser board into the slot and use firm even pressure to seat the board 180 Removing and Replacing Server Components 3 Turn the knurled thumb screws clockwise until the power supply riser board tightens to the power supply housing Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 5 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Replace the power supplies See Replacing a Power Supply page 151 7 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 gt S Removing and Replacing the System or iLO 2 MP Battery A The system and iLO 2 MP batteries are located on the system board Replace the target battery with only the identical or equivalent battery Follow the manufacturer recommendations Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer instructions WARNING If mishandled lithium batteries can explode Do not recharge disassemble or dispose of the battery in a fire Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment Removing the System or iLO 2 MP Battery A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server w
77. using Special Administration Console SAC restart or shutdown commands under normal circumstances Issuing restart or shutdown at the SAC gt prompt causes the server to restart or shutdown immediately and can result in the loss of data Instead use the Windows Start menu or the shut down command to shut down gracefully To shut down Windows use either of the following methods Choose Shut Down from the Start menu and choose either Restart or Shut down from the pull down menu The Restart menu item shuts down and restarts the server The Shut down menu item shuts down the server Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System You can use this method when using a graphical interface to the server Issue the shutdown command from the Windows command line un For more information see page 99 You can issue this command from a command prompt through the Special Administration Console SAC or from any other commond line The Windows shutdown command includes the following options s Shuts down and halts power off the server This is the equivalent of Start gt Shut Down Shut down To power on the server use the iLO 2 MP PC command Te Shuts down and restarts the server This is the equivalent of Start gt Shut Down Restart a Aborts a server shutdown t xxx Sets the timeout period before shutdown to xxx seconds The timeout period ranges from 0 600 with a default of 30 See the help shutdown Windows
78. 0 Processor Load Order Processor 0 Module O 1 Module 1 Required Tools To install processors use the processor install tool fastened to the airflow guide 9 TIP Prior to installing a processor into the server read the following instructions carefully and refer to the figures in this chapter for a complete understanding of this process To install a processor 1 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 46 2 Remove the airflow guide See Removing the Airflow Guide page 47 Installing Additional Components 51 3 Open the processor cage a Grasp the processor cage handle and apply adequate force to rotate the handle upward Figure 20 Processor Cage Handle Open b Use the handle to rotate the cage closure approximately 90 degrees toward the front of the assembly until it stops Figure 21 Processor Cage Open e a_a TP rn a IMPORTANT Ensure the processor slot is entirely exposed The processor must clear the cage enclosure for proper installation 4 Locate the slot Module 1 on the system board for the processor installation 52 Installing the Server Figure 22 ZIF Socket Alignment Holes and Posts and Slot Locations Fil n i pi pam Remove before installing processor Y ssod ip I 16 a hiss Alignment hole on the processor Processor slot 1 on the system board a g Access hole for the ZIF socket Module 1
79. 000030 Usb Ohci Driver 00000040 USB Bus Driver 00000020 USB Bot Mass Storage Driver 00000020 Generic USB Mass Storage Driver 00000020 CLPrelay App 00000100 Indicates active system firmware image In this case gt 3 02 indicates that this server does not need system firmware updated to use the memory modules described in this document The firmware upgrade instructions are included in the Release Notes on the firmware package download page for your server product To locate the Release Notes and download the firmware 1 Go to http www hp com bizsupport 2 Select Download Drivers and Software 3 Select HP Integrity Servers 4 Select the link for your server product After the firmware has been downloaded you can install the memory To install DIMMs see Installing Memory page 170 Cooling Data Center Server Cooling Twelve fans cool the Data Center server The fans are all redundant hot swappable and interchangeable Eight fans cool the eight DIMMs and two processors Four fans cool the hard disk drives and the PCI riser board The fans cool three zones in the server Fans 1 through 4 cool Zone 1 fans 5 through 8 cool Zone 2 and fans 9 through 12 cool Zone 3 Each zone can run with one fan failure The other fans in the zone increase speed to compensate for the fan failure The fans are N 1 per zone meaning that the server has 12 fans but can operate with 9 fans running one fan failure per zone See Figur
80. 0013 Power Pod 1 0032 CPU O PIROM 0033 CPU 1 PIROM 0036 Processor 0 RAM 0037 Processor 1 RAM 0128 DIMMOA 0136 DIMMOB 0144 DIMMOC 0152 DIMMOD 0160 DIMM1A 0168 DIMM1B 0176 DIMM1C 0184 DIMM1D 0000 Motherboard If the installed CRUs are all functional then the system should initiate POST on all processors It is recommended to observe the system console output through Live Logs to ensure that POST is initiated and completes without error If power on self test POST does not start after a few seconds then suspect some sort of system board or processor problem Typical problems show up in the SEL or FWP If the IMPI event logs do not point to a root cause then escalate to bring in expert assistance CPU Memory SBA All of the CPU Memory controller and System Bus Adapter SBA or I O rope controller functions reside on the system board DIMMs reside on the system board and the Local Bus Adapter LBAs or PCI X bus controller chips reside on the I O Backplane and the system board along with customer Host Bus Adapter HBA device controller I O cards This section discusses the roles of logical CPUs physical memory ranks and the rope interfaces in the SBA logic of the zx2 chip CPU Memory SBA 123 Troubleshooting rx2660 CPU The rx2660 server supports both single and dual core processors Each rx2660 server supports one or two IPF processor modules The dual core processor modules contain two individual CPU cores This results in
81. 002 PNP0A03 200 Pci 1 0 Sas Addr500000E0119F9C1 2 Lun0 HD Part1 Sig4258E658 7952 11DB 8002 D6217B60E588 2 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 200 Pci 2 Lun0 HD Part3 Sig4258E6B2 7952 11DB 8004 D6217B60E588 Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot ID ID Path 00 00 01 00 0x103C 0x1303 XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 00 01 01 0x103C 0x1302 XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 00 01 02 0x103C 0x1048 XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 00 02 00 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 00 02 01 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 EF 00 00 02 02 0x1033 0x00E0 XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 00 03 00 0x1002 0x515E XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 01 01 00 0x1000 0x0054 XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 01 02 00 0x14E4 0x1648 XX Acpi HWP0002 F 00 01 02 01 0x14E4 0x1648 XX Acpi HWP0002 F Fast initialization Enabled System Wake On LAN Enabled BOOT INFORMATION Monarch CPU Preferred Monarch Current Monarch POA03 0 POA03 0 POA03 0 POA03 0 POA03 0 Pcei POA03 0 Pci POA03 0 Pci PQA03 200 Pci POQA03 200 Pci Pci Pci Pci Pci P0A03 200 Pci EFI POSSE Commands 225 CPU CPU Module Module Logical Logical Warnings 0 0 0 0 AutoBoot OFF Timeout is disabled Boottest BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable OS is not speedy boot aware Selftest Setting early_cpu Run this test late_cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this
82. 00E7F7E07FB Displays the core I O MAC address Path Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 Mac OO306E4COFF2 Syntax lanaddress Parameters none Example 20 1 anaddress command LAN Address Information LAN Address Mac O0306E4C4F1A Mac 00306E4C0FF2 monarch E4C4F1A Displays or modifies the ID of the bootstrap processor The preferred monarch number is stored in NVM EFI POSSE Commands 229 Syntax monarch lt cpu gt Parameters lt cpu gt specifies a cpu Operation If specitied with no parameters monarch displays the Monarch processor for the server Specifying a processor number alters the preferred Monarch processor None of these changes takes affect until after a reboot Example 21 monarch command Shell gt monarch Current Preferred Monarch Monarch Possible Warnings 0 0 0 0 To view monarch fs0 monarch Processor current status 0 next boot status 0 To set the monarch processor to 1 fs0 monarch 1 Processor current status 0 next boot status 1 pdt Displays or clears the contents of the Page Deallocation Table PDT Syntax pdt clear Parameters lt clear gt clears the pdt Operation With no options specified the command displays the PDT information for the server The PDT is cleared and a reboot is required for memory reallocation and safe booting 230 Utilities Example 22 pdt com
83. 1 1 redundancy Two hot swappable AC DC power supplies generate 12 VDC for the system and peripherals and a housekeeping voltage 3 3 V standby One active power supply operating at 100 VAC is sufficient to operate the system at its maximum load Each power supply receives AC power through integrated AC inlets The system can operate at 100 or 240 VAC and achieve 1 1 redundancy The power supplies are power factor corrected and the maximum DC power output of each power supply is 900 watts at 120 VAC and 1000 watts at 240 VAC 24 Overview Office Friendly Server Power The Office Friendly server has two power supplies in the standard configuration The server is designed to provide high availability with 1 1 redundancy However the server runs more quietly and efficiently with two power supplies installed The AC DC power supplies generate 12 VDC for the server and peripherals and a housekeeping voltage 3 3 V standby Each power supply receives AC power through integrated AC inlets The system can operate at 100 or 240 VAC The power supplies are power factor corrected and the maximum DC power output of each power supply is 900 watts at 120 VAC and 1000 watts at 240 VAC Mass Storage The server mass storage subsystem contains the following major components e Small form factor SFF 2 5 in serial attached SCSI SAS hard drives with the following supported capacities o 36GB o 73GB o 146 GB e SAS cables e SAS backplane e
84. 1 43 Data Strobe dqs dqs dqs dqsf 18 35 18 35 Add On Memory 22 To locate the HP part number look at the HP Security CT Label located on the DIMM AD275A 2 x 2 GB DIMMs memory with the HP part number AB565DX cannot be mixed on the same physical rank as 2 GB memory with the AB565BX or AB565AX HP part number IMPORTANT Earlier versions of system firmware do not support the installation of this replacement memory and can result in de allocation of the entire quad or pair Firmware Updates The HP Integrity rx2660 servers require system firmware version 03 01 or later to support the following Memory Add On products e AD274A 2 GB DDR2 Memory Pair 2 x 1 GB DIMMs e AD275A 4 GB DDR2 Memory Pair 2 x 2 GB DIMMs e AD276A 8 GB DDR2 Memory Pair 2 x 4 GB DIMMs Before installing any of these memory products verify the server firmware version is equal to or higher than the version listed above for your product On HP Integrity servers you can determine the firmware version using the following EFI Shell info fw command Shell gt info fw Overview FIRMWARE INFORMATION System Firmware A Revision 3 02 4819 System Firmware B Revision 3 02 4819 BMC Revision 5 20 Management Processor Revision T 02 17 Updatable EFI Drivers Floating Point Software Assistance Handler 00000118 Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Driver 00090404 SCSI Bus Driver 00000031 SCSI Disk Driver 00000020 SCSI Tape Driver 00
85. 1 n a BY 314581 003 TPM module 406059 001 n a N CY AB419 60004 Display fan board AB419 67004 n a BY AB419 60011 Display fan board Office Friendly AB419 67019 n a BY AB419 60009 I O fan board AB419 67009 n a AY AB419 60012 I O fan board Office Friendly AB419 67020 n a AY Internal Disks Removable Media 375863 001 36 GB SAS hard drive 376596 001 AY 375863 002 72 GB SAS hard drive 376597 001 AY 431959 B21 146 GB SAS hard drive 432320 001 432320 001 AY AD142 2100B DVD drive AD142 2100B n a AY AD143 2100B DVD RW drive AD143 2100B n a AY Add On I O Cards AB620 60503 Audio card AB620 60503 n a BY RAID AB419 60008 PCI expansion board AB419 67008 n a BY 012760 001 Smart array P400 controller 405831 001 n a BY 012764 004 Smart array P400 controller cache module 405836 001 n a BY 256 MB 381573 001 Smart array P400 controller battery module 398648 001 n a BY 408658 001 Smart array P400 controller battery cable 409124 001 n a BY assembly 11 5 in Fans 394035 001 Fan assembly 407747 001 n a AY 6070B0178401 Fan assembly Office Friendly AB419 67021 n a AY Cables n a Cable kit Includes the following cables AB419 67012 n a BY e Fan display signal cable e Diagnostic panel to display fan board signal cable e O fan board to display fan board signal cable 202 Customer Replaceable Units Information Table 68 HP Integrity rx2660 CRU List continued Manufacturing Description Replaceme
86. 1560045F Pci Pci Pci Pci Acpi Acpi Acpi Acpi A 0 I a a FIRMWARE INFORMATION System Firmware A Revision 1 05 4645 PAL_A 7 31 7 46 PAL B 8 30 EFI Spec 1 10 EFI Intel Drop 14 62 EFI Build 5 65 SAL Spec 3 20 SAL_A 2 00 SAL_B 1 05 POSSE 0 21 ACPI 7 00 SMBIOS 2 3 2a System Firmware B Revision 1 04 4645 BMC Revision 5 06 IPMI 1 00 Management Processor Revision F 01 58 Updatable EFI Drivers Floating Point Software Assistance Handler Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Driver SCSI Bus Driver SCSI Tape Driver Usb Ohci Driver USB Bus Driver USB Bot Mass Storage Driver Generic USB Mass Storage Driver 00118 90404 00021 0020 0034 0014 0014 0015 OOOO OOC 0 D OOO OGOGO O OGOOGO Oc Indicates active system firmware image WARNING AND STOP BOOT INFORMATION 80 Installing the Server CHIP REVISION INFORMATION Chip Logical Device Chip Type ID ID Revision Memory Controller 0 4032 0020 Root Bridge 0 4030 0020 Host Bridge 0000 122e 0032 Host Bridge 0002 122e 0032 Host Bridge 0003 12ee 0011 Host Bridge 0006 12ee 0011 Host Bridge 0007 12ee 0011 Other Bridge 0 0 0030 Other Bridge 0 0 5003 Baseboard MC 0 0 0506 SYSTEM SECURITY CONFIGURATION Trusted Boot Not Supported TPM Activated PM Next Boot Status Activated TPM Vendor ID Ox15D1 TPM Product ID 0x0006 PM TCG Spec Version 1 1 0 0 Shel
87. 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core I O devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 for more details Table 36 Advanced Low End Troubleshooting continued Step Symptom Condition Action The preceding problem is fixed when the MCA does not repeat or the source of the MCA has been determined and dealt with 8b MCA occurs during server Front panel LEDs indicate that the server detected a fatal front side bus operation server reboot of OS error caused by MBEs reading cache or DIMM or by any parity in the is prevented NOTE The I O path between SBA LBA or HBA system health is off internal health troubleshooting actions for this is flashing amber external health is steady green power is steady green step are identical to those in System firmware is running to gather and log all error data for this MCA Step 8a except that the server event in this step must be hard reset to begin the booting process You must hard reset the server to clear the fatal condition and boot the OS The preceding problem is fixed when the MCA does not repeat 1 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core O devices See Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 for more details Troubleshooting Tools LEDs Front Panel The front panel of the system contains the
88. 3 Push the fan carrier handle down until it is flush against the airflow guide 2 Figure 42 Replacing the Airflow Guide a z 4 Ensure that the fans are seated correctly in their connectors by gently pressing down on each fan in the fan carrier 5 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 6 Replace the server back into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Server Fan When removing a hot swappable server fan from the server there are different procedures depending on if you have a Data Center server or an Office Friendly server Data Center Server Twelve fans cool the Data Center server The fans are all redundant hot swappable and interchangeable Fans 1 through 8 are located in a removable fan carrier directly behind the front bezel Fan units 9 through 12 are located in a removable O fan carrier between the SAS backplane and the I O card cage The server is set up into three cooling zones Fans 1 through 4 cool Zone 1 Fans 5 through 8 cool Zone 2 Fans 9 through 12 cool Zone 3 Each zone can have one fan failure and still run with the other fans in the zone speeding up until the failed fan is replaced Replace the fans using the procedures in this section whether the server is powered on or off Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Server Fan 145 Figure 43 Data Center Server Fan and Cooling Zones Zone 1 Office Frie
89. 60 Data Center and rx2660 Office March 2010 i Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002C_ed8 le HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office May 2010 i Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002C_ed HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office June 2010 i Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS Publishing History 13 Table 1 Publishing History Details continued Document Operating Systems Supported Supported Product Versions Publication Date Manufacturing Part Number AB419 9002C_ed10 HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office January 2011 f Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002D e HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office April 2011 Friendl e Microsoft Windows neay e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002E e HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office September 2011 f Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS Document Organization The HP Integrity rx2660 Server User Service Guide is divided into several chapters and each contains information about servicing the HP Integrity rx2660 server The appendixes area of the book contains supplemental information Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Provides information on the major server subsystems dimensions and weights specifications and safety Provides server details such as system configuration phys
90. A ae eed 37 Installing the SAS Smart Array and PCle Expansion BOArdS ooocccccioocccccooocccnononccononancccnnnnnnos 59 Installing the PCle Expansion Borruel 59 Installing the SAS Smart Array P400 Controller and RAID Battery cccceccseseeeeeetteeeeeees 60 Replacing the Top Covers c 22a eased ci aletc A SS AS A 61 Installing the Server into a Rack or Pedestal seicsceioxsdsecsadeiecesden tedezdeectzcanes avedendaacananenavsseesgenexens 62 Installing the Server into a Racks fw rata 62 A ROT 62 Non HP RA aie pes oe eau th lanes da A Tanah at ahaa nels cate A a E 62 Installing the Server into a Pedestals cac d 01 lt ciscewsucendschedevtueutedond ashy deuleeubeaesduentaenivoubigetdaghiaexteens 62 Connecting the Cable e Re die a e a e e iaat 63 ALMA A a e e e aU o a eS 63 A ni ea ere a a a dad ant dialban st a e a a nama tuner 63 Applying Standby Power to the vii A dea eens 64 Connecting to the LAIN a teaeate cece cate ieee vai lyin Meeit aloe dain Sate Ae ge oot teria Soane cence aaa nae acwsstescae ke 65 Connecting and Setting Up the Console its a ees 65 4 Contents Setting Up the Console a dede dad 65 O eee renee nny eel Smee NT 65 Setup SHOW Eis ites cee Beaten eet ad ale hart el tetra its Sleek Cee alah Ral des es tesa eaten cect ta 66 A O a aaae Eat 68 Determining the Physical iLO 2 MP Access Meth0d ooooooooccccconocononccocconoonononccconananonnnnnnonns 68 Determining the iLO 2 MP LAN Configuration Method
91. CD that is shipped with the server To troubleshoot the server you must be familiar with the Offline Diagnostics Environment ODE which runs in the Extensible Firmware Interface EFI Descriptions and user information about offline troubleshooting tools are available at http www docs hp com The offline tools are available for downloading at http www software hp com Troubleshooting Using the Server Power Button The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held in and on what the system is doing when the button is pressed You must be aware of its uses to properly troubleshoot the system Table 30 describes what happens when the server is at EFI and you press the power button Installation Troubleshooting 81 Table 30 Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and at EFI CO SSCS 1 3 seconds System power turns off immediately hard power off 5 seconds or longer System power turns off immediately hard power off Table 31 describes what happens when the server is on with the operating system running and you press the power button Table 31 Server Power Button Functions When Server is On and OS is Running fen iin SSSSOSCSCSCSCSCSCSCSSSCSCSY 1 3 seconds System power turns off software controlled power off 5 seconds or longer System power turns off immediately hard power off If the server is off and power is not connected to server power supplie
92. E76936 BE45 47FA 9AC7 BOECF2D912F2 3 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 2 0 Sas Addr5000C50000347735 LunO HD Part1 Sig92C8CB4C E0F2 11DA 8002 D6217B60E588 4 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 400 Pci 2 0 Sas Addr5000C50000347735 Lun0 HD Part3 Sig92C8CB7E E0F2 11DA 8004 D6217B60E588 Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot ID ID Path 00 00 01 00 0x103C 0x1303 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 0 00 00 01 01 0x103C 0x1302 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 1 00 00 01 02 0x103C 0x1048 XX Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 2 Fast initialization Enabled System Wake On LAN Disabled Shell gt Devices such as USB ports that do not occupy a slot are referenced as being in slot xx Slots that do not contain an I O card are not be listed in the output Using the output confirm that a device detected in each slot that is populated Booting the Operating System For instructions on booting to the operating system see Chapter 4 page 85 Processor Upgrades The HP Integrity rx2660 server supports upgrades from Dual Core Intel ltanium 2 processors 9000 series to Intel Itanium Dual Core Intel ltanium 2 processors 9150M A CAUTION Intel Itanium Dual Core Intel ltanium 2 processors 9150M cannot be intermixed with similar Dual Core Intel Itanium 2 processors 9000 series Processor speed and cache size must be identical for all processors in a system To ensure compatibility whether upgrading
93. From the Server c ccccccccccceceeeseteeeeeeeseessseeeees 206 Removing the PCI X I O Backplane Board from the O Backplane Assembly 207 Installing the PCI X PCle I O Backplane Board Into the I O Backplane Assembly 208 Replacing the I O Backplane Assembly Into the Server cccccccscceeeeeeeteeeceeeesestseeeeeeeess 209 Replacing the Top Coven ti at dallas de tains 209 Installing the Server Into the Rack ws scien false ers cee essere Aes eves ec AA 209 Installing the Server Into a Pedestal ooooooocccnocooooccononoooononononcccconononononconanonnnnccinnnns 209 Powering On Ihe A ene sda tee ea aha teats AEA aS EAA alle 209 Upgrade Venice hones Ge stein skola heats lactis Gis Lis ayes dtl iia et eae i 209 Viewing VV CITING A e 209 O 209 Booting the Operating MS bi 210 Ms a A e aceite te aad mets Clash antes e dans AEE 210 Upgrading Versus Adding e es ad 211 II Evoctsnca dle AAA AAA A AAA AAA AAA EA AAA SALA 211 Op rating OSOS DEA RARA AAA AAN 211 SA A A ceeducs 9a 212 Extensible Firmware Interface Book Mania A Seitenende Ga 212 A O 213 EF POSSE Command isla ll Le OO 215 O EE A pete Ares Ain tener E fear ear eat RD E ge See PUES ea eae 215 SYOK ess tesa stern E O 215 E A A A tae Cela IO 219 ROSA ON sess Gi he Fee Leche Beauty oy ec teh E Sa lee es AEEA Heese ea ee 215 Contents 9 SVU eS a 218 PONGIMCIONS casts cir saceabacdhatncd E E ttt A EE dau ttal E T erase a ye 218 DEMO
94. GA VGA port used primarily to connect to a monitor that displays console output Windows and Linux operating systems only iLO 2 MP LAN LEDs Table 7 iLO 2 MP LAN Link Speed LEDs 100 Mb Steady amber 10 Mb Off Overview Table 8 iLO 2 MP LAN Link Status LEDs Link Status Activity LED State Blinking green Link with no activity Steady green No link iLO 2 MP Status LEDs Table 9 iLO 2 MP Status LEDs iLO 2 MP Status LED iLO 2 MP heartbeat Off LED State Flashing green iLO 2 MP self test Off The LED is steady amber when AC power is applied It remains steady amber for a few seconds until the iLO 2 MP completes its self test then the LED turns off BMC heartbeat Flashing green Standby power System LAN The system LAN functionality is integrated into the system board The following describes the system LAN ports e Two RJ 45 style 10 Base T 100 Base T 1000 Base T system LAN ports Table 10 System LAN Link Status LEDs Steady green Power Supply Link Status LED State Activity Blinking green Link with no activity Steady green No link Oft Table 11 System LAN Link Speed LEDs Link Status LED State 1000 Mb Steady orange 100 Mb Steady green 10 Mb Oft The server is equipped with one or two power supplies labeled PS1 and PS2 Each power supply has an AC input receptacle and an LED that shows the powe
95. GB e 146 GB A CAUTION A hot pluggable device might require that you interact with the operating system before you can safely remove it from or install it into the server Verify that the operating system supports removing and replacing disk drives while the operating system is running If the operating system does not support this feature shut down the operating system before attempting this procedure Failure to observe this caution can cause system failure NOTE The replacement SAS hard drive must have the same product number as the disk drive that is replaced Removing a SAS Hard Drive To remove a SAS hard drive 1 Push down on the release tab 1 The drive extraction handle extends from the drive 2 Pull the extraction handle up 2 152 Removing and Replacing Server Components 3 Gently slide the hot pluggable hard drive out of the server 3 Figure 49 Removing a Hot Pluggable Hard Drive NOTE For cooling purposes always leave hard drive fillers in empty drive slots Replacing a SAS Hard Drive To install a SAS hard drive NOTE Load the SAS hard drives in order starting with number 8 working from right to left 1 Remove the SAS hard drive filler if required See Removing a Hard Drive Filler page 151 NOTE Save the SAS hard drive filler for future use For cooling purposes always place hard drive fillers in empty drive slots 2 Insert the SAS hard drive into the slot guid
96. H236 2100A CPU module 1 6 GHz 6 MB single core AH236 2100A AH236 6900A BY AH236AX AH238 2100A CPU module 1 6 GHz 18 MB dual core AH238 2100A AH238 6900A BY AH238AX AD392 2100B CPU 1 6GHz 12MB single core AD392 2100B AD392 6900A BY AD392AX AD390 2100B CPU 1 42GHz 12MB dual core AD390 2100B AH240 6900A BY AD390AX AD391 2100B CPU 1 67GHz 18MB dual core AD391 2100B AH241 6900A BY AD391AX Memory DIMMs AB563 6001A 512 MB DIMM AD326A AB563 69001 BY AB564 6001A 1 GB DIMM AD327A AB564 69001 BY AB565 6001A 2 GB DIMM AD328A AB565 69001 BY AB566 6001A 4 GB DIMM AD329A AB566 69001 BY AB567AX 8GB 2Rx4 PC2 4200 DDR 1 2 DIMM AB567 67001 BY Boards AB419 60001 System board AB419 67001 AB419 69001 CY AB419 60001 System board AB419 67024 AB419 69004 CY Customer Replaceable Units List 201 Table 68 HP Integrity rx2660 CRU List continued Manufacturing Description Replacement Part Exchange Part Customer Self Part Number Number Number Repair AB419 60002 I O backplane assembly PCI X AB419 67002 AB419 69002 BY AB419 60003 I O backplane assembly PCle PCI X AB419 67003 AB419 69003 BY AB419 60010 SAS backplane AB410 67010 n a BY AB419 60005 System Insight Display Diagnostic Panel AB419 67005 n a BY 380622 001 Bulk power supply 403781 001 n a AY 379123 001 Bulk power supply AB419 67023 n a AY 399428 001 Bulk power supply riser 407750 00
97. HBA is installed the SAS cables are connected to the HBA instead of the LSI 1068 controller on the system board PCle MPS Optimization For PCle based systems each PCle device has a configurable MPS maximum payload size parameter Larger MPS values can enable the optimization to gain higher performance MPS Optimization is supported on PCle systems running HP UX Open VMS and Linux System firmware level greater than 01 05 performs an optimization during boot time to set the MPS value to the largest size supported by both a PCle root port and the devices below it The default server state is optimization disabled When disabled system firmware sets MPS to the minimum value on each PCle device The info io command displays the current PCle MPS optimization setting See info page 224 20 Overview To enable PCle MPS optimization use the ioconfig mps_optimize command See iocontig page 221 For non PCle systems ioconfig and info io does not display the MPS optimization policy setting The Set PCle MPS Optimization boot manager menu also is not displayed When you run the ioconfig mps_optimize on off command from a non PCle system the following output displays Shell gt ioconfig mps_optimize ioconfig PCIe MPS optimization is not supported Shell gt ioconfig mps_optimize on ioconfig PCIe MPS optimization is not supported Exit status code Unsupported Shell gt To restore MPS to the de
98. HP Integrity rx2660 Server User Service Guide HP Part Number AB419 9002E Published September 2011 Edition 12 Copyright 2006 2011 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Legal Notices The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Printed in U S A Intel Pentium Intel Inside Itanium and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries Microsoft and Windows are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Warranty To obtain a copy of the warranty for this product see the warranty information on the HP website at BCS Global Limited Warranty and Technical Support Contents A bour UNIS DO GUIMe Mi sacuseeseniennactyce A 12 Intended a a AAA IR ctl at ts IA 12 New and Changed Information in This Edition cerda ARAN Aes DAA 12 Publishing History issuri neuint sidas a a esaa ENE EAr PE RE Aa E E iN 13 Document Organization ds 14 T pogr phic Conventions iesin bach a iniiae ld 14 HP UX Release Name and Release ldentifier oooooononoocccccocooonoonnncccononononcncncnonanoncnnconanano
99. HWP0002 600 Pci 1 0 Ctr1 11 Acpi HWP0002 700 Ctr1 27 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pc1 110 Ctr1 28 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pc1 1 1 Ctr1 43 16550 Serial UART Driver Ctr1 44 VI 100 Serial Console Ctr1 3E Primary Console Input Device Ctr1 3F Primary Console Output Device Ctr1 3D Primary Standard Error Device Ctr1 29 Acpi HWP0002 700 Pc1 210 Ctr1 40 Acpi PNPO501 0 Ctr1 41 16550 Serial UART Driver Ctr1 42 VT 100 Serial Console Ctr1 54 VenHw D65A6B8C 71E5 4DF0 A909 FOD2992B5AA9 This information describes the SCSI interface because the path on the first line Acpi HWP0002 100 is the path from the information displayed by the info io command The next two lines describe the SCSI interface two channels one line for each channel The lines contain the SCSI interface description LST Logic Ultral60 SCSI Controller The value shown for Ctr1 17 and 18 at the beginning of each line is the controller handle for each channel You need this value for the next step NOTE The controller handle values change on every boot From the EFI Shell prompt enter the She11 gt drvcfg command to obtain the EFI driver handle for the SCSI interface A list of all EFl capable configurable components in the system is displayed For example Shell gt drvcfg Configurable Components Drv 3D Ctr1 15 Lang eng Drv 3F Ctr1 19 Lang eng Specifying SCS
100. I Parameters 237 238 Utilities Drv 45 Ctr1 1C Lang eng Drv 45 Ctr1 1D Lang eng This listing shows which driver controls which device controller This information describes a SCSI interface because the values shown for Ctr1 17 and 18 are the controller handles for the SCSI interface two channels from the information displayed by the devt ree command NOTE The EFI driver handle values change on every boot TIP From the drvcfg command record these two pieces of information for each channel of each SCSI interface for parameters to be changed Drv the EFI driver handle e Ctrl the controller handle Using the driver handle Drv and the controller handle Ct r1 from the drvcfg command start the EFI SCSI Setup Utility for one channel of this SCSI interface At the EFI Shell prompt enter Shell gt drvcfg s drvr_handle cntrl_handle where e drvr handle The handle of the driver that controls the channel with the SCSI ID you want to display or change e cntrl_handle The handle of the controller for the channel with the SCSI ID you want to display or change For channel A of this SCSI interface enter Shell gt drvcfg s 45 18 The EFI SCSI Setup Utility starts and its main menu appears showing a list of all the EFI capable SCSI interfaces in the system Move the cursor to highlight the channel of the SCSI interface Press Enter to determine which channel of the interface to highlight match the PCI Bu
101. Linux Local RS 232 serial 1 RS 232 DB 9F to DB 9F modem eliminator cable port Remote modem 2 Console device for example a laptop or ASCII terminal port LAN port 10 100 LAN cable OpenVMS Local RS 232 serial 1 RS 232 DB 9F to DB 9F modem eliminator cable port Remote modem 2 Console device for example a laptop or ASCII terminal port LAN port 10 100 LAN cable Windows VGA Port no iLO 2 1 Monitor VGA MP access EFI only 2 Keyboard USB 3 Mouse USB LAN port 10 100 LAN cable Determining the iLO 2 MP LAN Configuration Method 68 To access the iLO 2 MP through the iLO 2 MP LAN the iLO 2 MP must acquire an IP address The way the iLO 2 MP acquires an IP address depends on whether DHCP is enabled or disabled on the server and if DHCP and DNS services are available to the server See Table 27 for possible scenarios Once you have determined the iLO 2 MP access you must determine how you will configure the iLO 2 MP LAN to acquire an IP address using the following methods DHCP DNS ARP Ping Local RS 232 serial port Remote modem port Table 27 provides all the possible scenarios Use this table to help you select the appropriate LAN configuration method to obtain an IP address Installing the Server Table 27 LAN Configuration Methods DHCP DNS RS 232 Serial Port iLO 2 MP LAN Configuration Method LC command Yes Yes No DHCP Yes Yes Yes DHCP RS 232 serial port or remote modem p
102. Loader Type help for help HPUX gt At the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader HPUX gt prompt enter the boot is vmunix command to boot HP UX the stand vmunix kernel in single user is mode NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your sysset output might not exactly match the output shown here HPUX gt boot is vmunix gt System Memory 4063 MB loading section 0 Sighs aur br to eee le Seren A RS RA is complete loading section 1 A complete loading symbol table loading System Directory boot sys to MFS loading MFSFILES Directory bootfs to MFS Launching stand vmunix SIZE Text 25953K Data 3715K BSS 3637K Total 33306K Console is on a Serial Device Booting kernel Exit the server console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them e To exit the system console and return to the LO 2 MP Main Menu enter Cirl B e To exit the iLO 2 MP enter x at the LO 2 MP Main Menu Booting HP UX in LVM Maintenance Mode From the EFI Shell environment boot in LVM maintenance mode by stopping the boot process at the HPUX EFT interface the HP UX Boot Loader HPUX gt prompt and entering the boot 1m vmunix command Use the following procedure to boot HP UX in Logical Volume Management LVM maintenance mode le Access the EFI Shell environment for the system on which you want to boot HP UX in LVM maintenance mode Log in to the LO 2
103. MP and enter CO to choose the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager Menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose EFI Shel1 to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition fsx where x is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to initiate the EFI HPUX HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing Type any key within the 10 seconds given for interrupting the HP UX boot process This stops the boot process at the HPUX EFI interface the HP UX Boot Loader prompt HPUX gt At the HPUX EFI interface enter the boot 1m vmunix command to boot HP UX the stand vmunixkernel in LVM maintenance 1m mode Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 91 6 Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Press Ctrl B to exit the system console and return to the LO 2 MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the Main Menu Shutting Down HP UX To shut down HP UX running on a system use the shut down command You have the following options when shutting down HP UX e To shut down and reboot an HP UX system use the shutdown r command e To shut down and halt power o
104. MP and using the iLO 2 MP commands see the HP Integrity iLO 2 Operations Guides System Event Log SEL Review l 2 Access the main menu under the iLO 2 MP command prompt entering cm brings you to the command menu Run the s1 command The Event Log Viewer menu displays SL Event Log Viewer Log Name Entries Full Latest Entry E System Event 9 1 29 Oct 2002 19 15 05 F Forward Progress 129 35 B Current Boot 82 P Previous Boot 0 C Clear All Logs Live Events Enter menu item or Ctrl B to Quit Selecte to review the system events The Event Log Navigation menu displays Enter menu item or Ctrl B to Quit e Errors and Reading Error logs 119 5 Log Name Entries Full Latest Tim stamped Entry ae E System Event T2 1 31 Oct 2003 Event Log Navigation Help View next block forward in time e g from 3 View previous block backward in time e g from 3 lt CR gt Continue to the next or previous block D Dump the entire log F First entry L Last entry J Jump to entry number H View mode configuration Hex K View mode configuration Keyword T View mode configuration Text A Alert Level Filter options U 2 Q Cc Alert Level Unfiltered Display this Help menu Quit and return to the Event Log Viewer Menu trl B Exit command and return to the MP Main Menu MP SL lt CR gt D F L J H K T A U
105. Ms later Install DIMMs in the appropriate slots on the system board Each slot has a unique ID See Figure 63 for the DIMM slot IDs A CAUTION Failure to observe the following cautions results in system degradation or failure e Do not mix DIMM sizes or types in a pair e Load DIMM pairs in order of size from largest to smallest For example if you are installing a pair of 4 GB DIMMs and a pair of 1 GB DIMMs install the pair of 4 GB DIMMs first Table 64 Memory Load Order Pair Number Memory Slots OA OB 2 1A 1B 3 2A 2B 4 3A 3B Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines Use the following rules and guidelines when installing memory Install DIMMs in pairs Ensure all DIMMs pairs are identical Install pairs in order of size from largest to smallest Install DIMM pairs in the specified order Installing Memory To install memory 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 170 Removing and Replacing Server Components 3 Remove the top cover from the server See Removing the Top Cover page 46 4 Complete the following memory installation prerequisite tasks before installing the memory a Determine the DIMM load order For more information see Memory Load Order page 170 b See Figure 63 to
106. N Index Status Type Device Path T NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 2 P Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 NC VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 Example 14 conconfig 3 on command To enable a console Shell gt conconfig 3 on CONSOLE CONFIGURATION Index Status Type Device Path 1 NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 2 P Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 S VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 default Enables you to restore non volatile memory NVM to default values and clear NVM storage values Syntax default efilsal default clear bmclefilsal Parameters clear clears NVM storage values EFI POSSE Commands 223 Operation Sets NVM and stable store values to predefined default values Normally only a subset of values are available for default To reset the system issue the default clear command errdump Displays the contents of processor internal memory logged on the first machine check abort MCA for all processors present in the system Syntax errdump mca cpe cmc init la clear Parameters mca dumps the Machine Check Abort error log cpe dumps the Corrected Platform Error log cmc dumps the Corrected Machine Check log init dumps the Initialization log la dumps the Logic Analyzer log clear erases all of the logs mca cpe cmc init la Operation Enter errdump with no parameters to display usage Otherwise the specified error log displays Add n to the clear parameter to disable the confirmation pr
107. N lt i5acizszvohavsdanlsanpasvundseicael sangnele db idiota 218 BOOTS fas sso ble eee tee ender re teeter Aas eee dt daa tte as at hand tat Sa dct tia Aes toad hn 219 SYNTAX sso aaa eae esa ape areca o Gy aati ts sees fats 219 O 219 A serv cent hot arsenite nce AA SREE a os ee ance oN 220 E CoRR TS 220 A O 220 Ds A A E 220 E AN AE ERA ADA SEA NANTES 221 IMD IO LODO UN RR A 221 Paramete seian ed 221 Operahonr aeaiia n a eae 221 CONC e a e RE Nee ERE 222 A wan daieeg satan O TEE EE EEA 222 Parameters ae aana apa ces y aausatun eee A cow e raa Ea EAEN aa Siirt a 222 A OO 222 A A NR e MO ee ae eee 223 SY TINK 2c oss ener ack chan remem EAE AE a areas 223 O 223 Operation O O 224 O A A AA E nC ee 224 MARLEN E EE EA ANA eee 224 PAra meter sita snasdsasiaenddsnndeandaestasndlaaddsaninantasdanthdaaadseatageheuasjaanacentndeataabdothases 224 LN 224 A A O 224 OS 224 O elvaninesllenqaahiadeesenstarutases 224 A E TT Ree ey ree EA er eee ee ee 229 TE ra err 229 aotre UNELI st cel A NO 229 A ued nae Sole Git ee heed oa een la hd ka Oa 229 Dy FINI O E CI 230 Parameters o Esa 230 A E saad 230 O E a 230 A O jndgtaoutetwed gu ndasusdonbenand nehaaeubegniana anand senkdeein tend aa 230 KOLLA A E E E T tas panmriaas uae meeanmate cea aes 230 Operationen ae tnersusea e E Moat eta aw tenet E eae 230 o Ne RAs at TEE E math Ou AEA E E ot deka lattes Sata 231 SYNTAX 55 o4ccisdmandddanddabissieueansdsergaaninaeadaned saxaesbacskonstad dantienlnabaada ge A se
108. No Tape Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes M O Yes No No No Yes Troubleshooting Tools 115 Table 44 Online Support Tools List continued Functional Area Information Verify Exercise Diagnose Expert Add On Network I O Yes Yes Yes No Yes Cards Add On Mass Storage Yes No No No No I O Cards Linux Online Support Tools Online support tools are provided through Insight Manager IM7 on Linux hosted systems The exact coverage of these tools is the same as for the current lA 32 implementation The IPF version of Insight Manager IM7 has been re architected to take advantage of current standards for example WBEM WMI CDM CIM XML Offline Support Tools List The following offline support tools are available Table 45 Offline Support Tools List Offline Tool Functional Area CPUDIAG Processor Diagnostic MEMDIAG Memory Diagnostic MAPPER System Mapping Utility TITANDIAG SBA LBA Chipset PERFVER Peripheral Veritier DFDUTIL SAS SCSI Disk Firmware Update Utility DISKUTIL Disk Test Utility Non Destructive COPYUTIL Data Copy Utility DISKEXPT Disk Expert Utility IODIAG I O Diagnostics Launch Facility Runs third party diagnostics and runs BIST if available CIODIAG2 Core I O Diagnostic Specific card O diagnostics Card Specific O Diagnostics BIST General Diagnostic Tools The following tools are currently available for support on other HP 9000 and Integrity server
109. O 02 System Wake On LAN 228 Utilities 0 0 0 0 0 0010 0 010 0 0 00 0 00 OO H Oi D E a E OA O O A OA O DON AO RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR KR H EUO O OOOO O 00 0 00 00 000 D D OGOOOO ODO OOGO OO ID ID Path 1033 0x0035 XX Acpi 1033 0x0035 XX Acpi 1033 0x00E0 XX Acpi 1095 0x0649 XX Acpi 00 0x0030 XX Acpi 00 0x0030 XX Acpi 86 0x1079 XX Acpi 86 0x1079 XX Acpi 00 0x0021 03 Acpi 77 0x2312 02 Acpi 77 0x2312 02 Acpi 00 Ox000F 01 Acpi 00 Ox000F 01 Acpi 00 0x0021 04 Acpi 3C 0x1290 XX Acpi 3C 0x1048 XX Acpi 02 0x5159 XX Acpi led 02 0 Pci 0 01 O OO COC OO 0 0 0 00 OO SAB RRRRR RRR SS RR RSS 0 24 00 KH uh Ove RO Fe Entry0 Example 19 info boot command Shell gt info boot BOOT INFORMATION Monarch CPU Current Preferred Monarch Monarch CPU CPU Module Module Logical Logical Warnings 0 0 0 0 AutoBoot ON Timeout is 10 sec Boottest BOOTTEST Settings Default Variable OS is not speedy boot aware Selftest Setting early_cpu Run this test late_cpu Run this test platform Run this test chipset Run this test io_hw Run this test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test LAN Address Information LAN Address Path Mac OOOE7F7E07FA Mac OOOE7F7E07FB lanaddress Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 Mac 000E7F7EO7FA Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 1 Mac 0
110. O 2 MP LAN LED States Link Status LED State Activity Flashing green Link with no activity Steady green No link Off NOTE For information on the LAN LED see System LAN LEDs page 134 iLO 2 MP Status LEDs There are four iLO 2 MP status LEDs on the rear panel of the server They are as follows e iLO 2 MP heartbeat e iLO 2 MP self test e BMC heartbeat e Standby power 132 Troubleshooting Table 58 iLO 2 MP Status LEDs iLO 2 MP Status LED iLO 2 MP heartbeat LED State Flashing green LO 2 MP self test Off The LED is steady amber when AC power is applied It remains steady amber for a few seconds until the iLO 2 MP completes its self test then the LED turns off Standby power Flashing green BMC heartbeat Steady green Manageability Reset Button on System Board Bulkhead The Manageability reset button accessed from the rear of the server allows you to reset the iLO 2 MP it optionally also resets user specified values to factory default values A momentary press causes a soft reset of the LO 2 MP when the button is released A greater than four second press does the same and also returns user specified values to factory default values hard reset The crucial values to be reset are as follows e Serial terminal baud settings e User names and passwords Manageability Status LED The manageability status LED indicates the state and health of th
111. PU see processor CRU list see customer replaceable units list customer replaceable units list 201 D Data Center server introduction 18 data paths ACPI 240 devt reecommand EFl capable devices and controller handles displaying 237 DHCP and DNS 69 defined 69 DHCP enabled security risk 74 dimensions server 36 247 DIMM see memory disk drive activity LED 29 activity LED location 30 activity LED states 30 LEDs 29 30 load order 153 status LED 29 status LED location 30 status LED states 30 DNS defined 69 Domain Name Server see DNS drvcfgcommand EFI configurable components displaying 237 EFI driver handle determining 238 EFI SCSI setup utility starting 238 dual core processing defined 50 171 dual core processor see processor DVD drive introduction 28 removing 154 replacing 154 DVD problems occur 83 DVD RW drive see DVD drive Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol see DHCP E EFI capable devices and controller handles displaying 237 commands 213 214 configurable components displaying 237 defined 25 driver handle determining 238 info all command 181 197 EFI boot manager 212 EFI Boot Manager menu entry class servers 85 EFI commands info io 209 info warning 209 see also viewing warnings EFI SCSI setup utility starting 238 EFI POSSE 215 231 EFI POSSE commands 215 electrical specifications 36 emulation device configuring 72 Extensible Firmware Interface see EFI exte
112. Processor O ZIF socket on the system board El Kg Processor socket dust cover Alignment post on the system board Module 1 label on the system board 5 Remove the plastic airflow blocker covering the processor slot if installed 6 Remove the protective dust cover from the processor socket if installed 7 Ensure the cam on the ZIF socket is in the unlocked counterclockwise position Alignment hole on the processor Alignment post on the system board oo off oil Installing Additional Components 53 54 Figure 23 ZIF Socket Unlocked CAUTION The ZIF socket for the processor is locked and unlocked by half a full turn of the processor install tool The counterclockwise 180 degree rotation half turn unlocks the socket A clockwise 180 degree rotation locks the socket Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket Remove any protective packaging from the processor NOTE Protective covers are installed to protect connector pins Save these covers for future use Inspect the processor pins to verify the pins are not bent Align the alignment holes on the processor with the alignment posts on the processor cage and carefully lower the processor onto the processor socket Figure 22 page 53 shows the alignment holes and posts on the processor and system board CAUTION Do not press the processor into the socket When properly aligned the processor pins seat int
113. SAS HP Smart Array P400 controller card power cable and battery optional The server supports up to eight SAS hard drives Each drive is equipped with LEDs that indicate activity and device status The SAS drives connect directly into the SAS backplane Two cables connect the SAS backplane to the integrated SAS core I O on the system board Optionally these cables connect to the SAS Smart Array P400 controller card installed in a private PCle slot on the system board Firmware Firmware consists of many individually linked binary images that are bound together by a single framework at run time Internally the firmware employs a software database called a device tree to represent the structure of the hardware platform and to provide a means of associating software elements with hardware functionality The firmware incorporates the following main interfaces e Processor Abstraction Layer PAL PAL provides a seamless firmware abstraction between the processor and system software and platform firmware e System Abstraction Layer SAL SAL provides a uniform firmware interface and initializes and configures the platform e Extensible Firmware Interface EFI EFI provides an interface between the operating system and the platform firmware EFI uses data tables that contain platform related information and boot and runtime service calls that are available to the operating system and its loader to provide a standard environment for booting
114. Slide the I O backplane up to lock it onto the I O backplane assembly posts Figure 89 Installing the PCI X PCle I O Backplane Slot 1 PCle x8 PCI X PCle I O backplane keyways Slot 2 PCle x8 A 1 O backplane posts Slot 3 PCI X 133 MHz Bulkhead T 15 thumbscrews PCI X PCle I O backplane 3 Install and tighten the three T 15 screws to attach the I O board to the I O backplane assembly 208 Upgrades 4 Insert the I O cards into the I O card slots on the I O backplane a Insert the tab at the base of the card bulkhead into the slot on the I O backplane b Align the card connectors with the slots on the I O backplane c Apply firm even pressure to both sides of the card until it fully seats into the slot d Install and tighten the bulkhead T 15 thumbscrew to secure the I O card to the I O backplane assembly A CAUTION Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card could fail after power is applied to the slot Replacing the I O Backplane Assembly Into the Server To replace the I O backplane assembly into the server 1 Align the tabs with the guide slots in the server and slide the O backplane assembly into place 2 Press down evenly on the I O backplane assembly to seat the O backplane into the connector on the system board 3 Tighten the two captive screws See Figure 86 a Press the black knob down while turning it clockwise until it is fully tightened b While holding the black knob and pressing d
115. System Insight Display is cleared see System Insight Display LEDs page 114 also see the respective system specification for the server in question Events that cause each internal CRU or System Insight Display LED to light are listed in the CRU section Amber supersedes green This LED is cleared when all failed internally accessible entities are repaired and report that they are good or on any AC standby power cycle NOTE The LEDs are cleared on the System Insight Display by turning off not by turning green The iLO 2 MP displays the following strings in its Virtual Front Panel for the three states of this LED 112 Troubleshooting Table 40 VFP Internal Health Description Off lt none gt On Green Internal parts including CPUs and memory okay Flashing Amber An internally accessible CRU failed check System Insight Display System Health LED The rx2660 server has this LED for the following reasons e To carry forward the ATTENTION functionality of legacy Integrity and HP9000 front panel designs To give the customer an indication of whether the system is up or down external and internal health LEDs do not tell the user if the system is booted To cover the wide range of faults for which software firmware is not 100 sure that a CRU must be re seated replaced external and internal health LEDs do not light unless sottware tirmware can make a solid determination that a CRU must be re seated replaced
116. T r new value urrent O 3 and above For example Log Alert Keyword Entry 14 Level 3 War EFI_SYSID Keyword mode Text mode r O to Quit To decode the blinking state of system LED review the entire SEL and look at events with alert 01 Jan 1998 00 09 19 ning BMC_READ ERROR Cannot read a system ID Logg Data 0x77 Log Keyw Entry 11 Alert ed by Sta 8002 System FO0E00150 ry Level 3 EFI _SYSID ord Firmware 0 tus return from PDC function call 0000000000000013 01 Jan 1998 00 00 48 Warning BMC_READ ERROR Cannot read a system ID Logg Data 0x77 Log Entry 7 Alert ed by Status retur 8002EF00E00100 23 Ju Level 3 War System Firmware 0 n from PDC function call 0000000000000013 n 2006 13 40 06 ning Keyword PDH_INVALID_RTC_CLEARED The Logg Data 0x60 Log Aler Entry 4 RTC was found ed by Data field u 800F8D00E00090 23 Ju Level 3 War System Firmware to be invalid and has been cleared 0 nused 0000000000000000 n 2006 13 39 35 ning Keyword COOLING_UNIT_WARNING Cool ing unit warni ng Logged by Baseboard Management Controller Sensor Data 0x20 1 transition 449BEF17020050 Cooling Device Fan 11 1 0 to Non Critical from OK FFFF01072B0A0300 NOTE shown here Due to the type of
117. This chapter covers procedures for booting and shutting down an operating system on the server The following operating systems are supported on HP Integrity servers HP UX 11i Version 3 11 31 HP OpenVMS Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Operating Systems Supported on HP Integrity Servers HP supports the following operating systems on entry class HP Integrity servers e HP UX Ti Version 3 11 31 For details see Booting and Shutting Down HP UX page 87 e HP OpenVMS 164 For details see Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS page 92 e Microsoft Windows Server 2003 For details see Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows page 96 e Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 For details see Booting and Shutting Down Linux page 100 e SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 For details see Booting and Shutting Down Linux page 100 Configuring System Boot Options This section discusses the configurable server boot options on entry class HP Integrity servers including the boot options list and the autoboot setting for the server The version shown is EFI Boot Manager version 2 00 e Boot Options List The boot options list is a list of loadable items available for you to choose from the EFI Boot Manager menu Ordinarily the boot options list includes the EFI Shell and one or more operating system loaders The following example includes boot options for HP
118. UX Linux and the EFI Shell EFI Boot Manager ver 2 00 14 62 OS might use only the primary console set via boot manager or conconfig command System Overview Boot Menu hp server BL870c HP UX Primary Boot 0 2 1 0 Serial USE7234MV8 Internal Bootable DVD EFI Shell Built in System Firmware 3 01 4739 iLO Virtual Media BMC Version 5 20 Core LAN Port 1 MP Version T 02 17 SuSE on fs0 Installed Memory 6144 MB HP UX 11 31 from SAS disk CPU Logical Boot Configuration Module CPUs Speed Status System Configuration 0 2 1 4 GHz Active Security Configuration 1 2 1 4 GHz Active Use and v to change option s Use Enter to select an option Operating Systems Supported on HP Integrity Servers 85 86 To correctly view the operating system console messages go to the Boot Configuration Menu under the EFI Boot Manager menu From the Boot Configuration Menu select Console Configuration The Console Configuration screen displays the current configuration of the system console EFI Boot Manager ver 2 00 14 62 OS might use only the primary console set via boot manager or conconfig command Ae System Overview HP UX Console Configuration In P Serial Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 1 2 Vt100 9600 EF NC VGA Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 0 Pci 4 0 iL
119. W Power supply maximum output power 800 W 850 W 1000 W Max current at 12 V 65 A 69 A 82 A Max current at 12 V 0 3 A 0 3 A 0 3 A Max current at 3 3 V standby 8A 8A 8A Max current at 5 V standby 2A 2A 2A If an overload triggers the power supply overload protection the system is immediately powered off To reset the power supply unit 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Determine what caused the overload by contacting an HP support representative 3 Reconnect the power cord 4 Reboot the system NOTE If an overload occurs twice there is an undetected short circuit somewhere When you use the front panel power button to turn off the server power consumption falls below the low power consumption but doesn t reach zero To reach zero power consumption in off mode either unplug the server or use a power block with a switch Power Consumption and Cooling The power consumptions listed in Table 17 are valid for a standard configuration as shipped one 1 4 GHz dual core processor 1 GB of memory one 1000 W power supply one internal hard disk drive and one internal DVD RW drive All information in this section is based on primary power consumptions with one power supply installed Table 17 Additional Component Power Consumption Additional Component Power Consumption Processor 130 W 443 6 Btu h SAS disk drive with I O access 23 W 78 4 Btu h SAS disk idle 16 W 54 5 Btu h PCle PCI X
120. _WATCHDOG FAIL niei expired and determined that a monarch processor is not responding Processors Type EOh 83d 26d A logical CPU SFW Bad or slow BOOT_RENDEZ_FAILURE thread processor J j rendezvous failure CPU Memory SBA 125 Table 48 Processor Events That Could Light System Insight Display LEDs continued Troubleshooting rx2660 Memory Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s Processors Type EOh 67d 26d The logical SFW BOOT_MONARCH_TIMEOUT monarch CPU thread has timed out Processors Type EOh 57d 26d A logical slave SFW BOOT_INCOMPATIBLE_SLAVE CPU thread is incompatible with logical monarch CPU Processor Type EOh 56d 26d CPU PAL SFW BOOT_INCOMPATIBLE_ PAL incompatible with processor Processors Type EOh 34d 26d A processor SFW BOOT_CPU_FAILED failed Processors Type EOh 33d 26d A logical CPU SFW BOOT_CPU_EARLY_TEST_FAIL thread failed early self test Processors Type 02h 25h 71h 80h No physical BMC Possible MISSING FRU DEVICE CPU cores seating or So present failed processor The memory controller logic in the zx2 chip supports the eight slots for rx2660 servers It provides two physical ranks that hold two or four DIMMs in memory cells O and 1 Memory DIMM Load Order For a minimally loaded server two equal size DIMMs must be installed in slots OA and OB in the DIMM slots on the system board The DIMM load order of pairs is as foll
121. a Processor page 171 to add another processor Updating the firmware and OS is unnecessary when adding another processor If your HP Integrity server does not currently contain one or more of the processors listed in Table 70 then a server upgrade is being performed and system firmware and OS updates might be necessary After any necessary system firmware and OS updates are performed tollow the processor removal and replacement procedures see Removing and Replacing a Processor page 171 Firmware Before upgrading the processor ensure the server is at the required system firmware level Check the system firmware version by executing the info fw command at the EFI Shell prompt NOTE HP recommends using the latest version of firmware System firmware updates are available on the HP website at http www hp com support itaniumservers Operating Systems O IMPORTANT Check the HP IT Resource Center ITRC website at http itrc hp com for any required OS patches HP UX HP UX supports the processor upgrade at the following minimum release levels e HP UX 11 23 0706 e HP UX 11 31 0709 OpenVMS OpenVMS must be upgraded to OpenVMS V8 3 1H1 to support the processor upgrade Windows Windows supports the processor upgrade Linux Linux supports the processor upgrade If you choose to move any O cards or storage during this upgrade Linux must be reinstalled Processor Upgrades 211 C Utili
122. a e a A a e ae etal EAE 172 Installing a Processot ce cc eel di Pete et A O 176 Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Housing scccceceeeesseceeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeenens 177 Removing the Power Supply HOusSINO osos iaa 177 Replacing the Power Supply HOUSING tS 179 Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Riser Board oooooocccccooooooccccconooonncconccconanononcccconnns 180 Removing the Power Supply Riser Board sciv0s cus enctects dee sinexcseidvensnedseaeeviscceesae Maa eeiones 180 Replacing the Power Supply Riser Board ooooooooccccooooooonnocccoonononononoccnnnn nono nnnconanonnnnncnnnnns 180 Removing and Replacing the System or iLO 2 MP Baltery oooooocccccccooooccnccccononanononcnononnononcncnnnnns 181 Removing the System or ilO 2 MP Batea tac 181 Replacing the Battery on System Boards with EDC lt 473O ooooooonooccccccccoooooocncccoconanononcnccnnns 183 Contents Installingthe Battery Clip csc ad tec II osa 183 Removing and Replacing the Battery in the Socket ooooooooccccccooocooccccccooonanononcccononononnncnnnns 185 Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module ooooooocccccoooooooccccoconononcccccconanononccccnnnns 186 Removing the UIPMissuiec0ia aitestermttaanieethacsttosetnansuchidceedsianddebvekaveshd dons encolado 187 Replacing Ahe TPM ss ccs niinen as tae a it cea ad a ed dentate A Parte aaa 187 Removing and Replacing the Smart Array P400 Controller and PCle Expansion Board
123. aa 31 LA A dexideadeeueensaldeedad 31 LO Ze Reser BUON ol e i e arte 32 lO 2 MP Re ee Phe eRe EEEa AR EEEE AET AELE A TEE RE e 32 MOZA TAINTED Ss alts atl at nate ek tM a cle Oh ect dental ttl da ts tlk 32 LA lE Dss cesta 82 be R E EEE 2 ee eae kaa 33 Syslem TAN een O A 33 Power SUPPI soc eninin niais a e E baa A A ad on cad TE Ea 33 Rear Panel UID LED and BN a Eten 34 PCIX PCle Card A A IN 34 a AAA A 35 AS E A asa oem eo 35 o A AAA A ade ERES 36 Contents 3 A e E A A ase 36 Electrical sa o A iini e EEE E e Slane E t A adidas ale 36 System Power SpeCiCCN ONS cass o ah cet ee ae 36 Power Consumption and COO NG viclesahssanazcatvcknvetlivendadeaveeneced denssiathuchensatldandaiuiecxeshanidendateaven 37 Physical and Environmental Specifications i cscs heer Sakis Aner ies earls cereal eee ake ae ai sessed 37 Sst iG TS SEN AA sat o E sea ase entices an E 40 Safety A A A A A 40 Installation Sequence and Checklist dada 40 Unpacking and Inspecting the Server cicccxtsensceclvonteectdaenddeuientdsendeahdaestvenhds sid sendaceiventesend ash adeaberss 41 Verifying Site A A Bes 41 Inspecting the Shipping Containers for DOMAJE ccccoooooocncccccoooonnnonccoonananoncnccnonn ono nnncnanannnos 4 Unpacking the SeLvelccts acon O etc le hella heads 41 Checking th vento liar acid inienn an kaa vend saaa E N Kaaa Ea venigesimeds 41 Returning Damaged Equipment odds oa 42 Unloading the Server With a rs AA ae a acl Meee dasbaes 42 Installi
124. acement and operation by using the system utilities e Use the iLO 2 MP ss command to verify operation e Use the EFl info cpu command to verify operation Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Housing The power supplies seat into a housing that attaches to the system board through the power supply riser board A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Power Supply Housing To remove the power supply housing Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Housing 177 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 4 Loosen the three captive screws shown in Figure 69 page 178 a Press the blue button to release the black knob b Turn the bl
125. acing Server Components c Rotate the processor tool counter clockwise 180 degrees A CAUTION The processor zero insertion force ZIF socket is locked and unlocked by turning the processor tool half of a full turn The counter clockwise 180 degree rotation half turn unlocks the socket A clockwise 180 degree rotation locks the socket Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket d Refasten the processor install tool 2 5 mm driver to the tool holder on the airflow guide 8 Remove the processor from the processor slot a Carefully grasp the sheet metal that encases the processor b Pull the processor straight up and out of the server 9 Protect the processor from damage a Install the protective pin cover on the processor connectors to shield the connector pins b Place the processor in an anti static container Figure 64 Opening and Closing the Processor Cage Removing and Replacing a Processor 173 Figure 65 Processor Cage Open Figure 67 shows the processor ZIF socket location and the alignment holes of an installed processor Power connector on the A Power cable from the system El Processor y processor board 174 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 67 Processor ZIF Socket and Alignment Holes and Posts e 4 B ho n al D Remove before installing processor 4 pi SS0ig dy Alignment hole on processor E Processor slot 1
126. ack knob counterclockwise until the captive screw is free from the system board 5 _ Lift the power supply housing straight up and out of the server NOTE The power supply riser board comes out as part of the power supply housing Figure 69 Removing the Power Supply Housing 178 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 70 Power Supply Housing Removed From the Server Captive screws Guide tabs Replacing the Power Supply Housing To replace the power supply housing l 2 Insert the tabs on the power supply housing into the server guide slots and align the BPS riser board with the connector on the system board Set the power supply housing into place Tighten the three captive screws a Press the black knob down while turning it clockwise until it is fully tightened b While holding the black knob and pressing down press and release the blue button to lower the black knob to the locked position Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Housing 179 Removing and Replacing the Power Supply Riser Board The power supply riser board attaches the power supplies to the system board A WARNING Ensure tha
127. al port telnet SSH or web method The LO 2 MP login prompt appears ON XH 72 Installing the Server 2 Log in using the default the iLO 2 MP user name and password Admin Admin The MP Main Menu screen appears ig TIP For security reasons HP strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the initial login session See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password page 73 The MP Main Menu screen displays the following menu options MP MAIN MENU Console Virtual Front Panel Command Menu Console Logs Show Event Logs ain Menu Help Exit Connection lt THNHAAQADA xFADD se Vo This example shows the MP Main Menu accessed through the local serial port The list of commands displayed on the screen can be different depending on the method of access to the iLO 2 MP When logging in using the local or remote RS 232 serial ports the login prompt might not display if another user is logged in through these ports Use Ctrl B to access the MP Main Menu and the iLO 2 MP MP gt prompt Additional Setup This section provides additional information to help you set up the iLO 2 MP Modifying User Accounts and Default Password The iLO 2 MP comes preconfigured with default factory settings including a default user account and password The two default user accounts at initial login are as follows e All Rights Administrator level user login Admin password Admin e Co
128. an four seconds NOTE This step assumes BMC is running Both front panel system health and external health LEDs are flashing amber A fatal fault has been detected and logged attempting to power on the server system health is off internal health is off external health is off and power is steady amber 1 Examine each power supply LED if not steady green replace power supply see Power Subsystem page 128 2 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for events related to bulk power supplies see Power Subsystem page 128 The preceding problem is fixed when the front panel LEDs are as follows system health is off internal health is off external health is off and power is steady green A warning or critical failure has been detected and logged after server powers on system health is flashing amber internal health is off steady green external health is flashing amber and power is steady green Examine each power supply LED If not steady green replace the power supply see Power Subsystem page 128 The preceding problem is fixed when iLO 2 MP logs are read and the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is off steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 2c Front panel system health LED is flashing red and external health LED is flashing amber A fatal fault has been detected and logged after server powers on
129. ane assembly Removing or installing PCI X PCle cards requires that the server be powered off Depending on which I O backplane was purchased the I O backplane assembly can contain three PCI X slots or a combination of PCI X and PCle slots two PCle slots and one PCLX slot Figure 61 page 164 shows the PCle PCI X and PCI X slot locations Removing a PCI X PCle Card A Observe the following warnings and cautions before removing a PCI X PCle card WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Record the slot location of all PCI X PCle cards as they are removed Depending on the operating system replacing PCI X PCle cards in a different location might require system reconfiguration To remove a PCI X PCle card 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Removing and Replacing a PCI X PCle Card 165 7 8 If rack mounted slide the server c
130. anel State Table in this section 4 Go to the step number of the Basic Low End Troubleshooting Table as specified in the right column of the LED Panel State Table located in the row which corresponds to your front panel LED display state 5 Read the symptom condition information in the left column of the Basic Low End Troubleshooting Table Perform the action s specified in the Action column 7 Ifyou need more details see the appropriate subsection of this chapter where this information is provided in the Action column The action you are directed to perform could be to access and read one or more error logs System Event Log and or Forward Progress Log While we do suggest that all users follow the recommended troubleshooting methodology and use the Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables in the next subsection as a more experienced troubleshooter you can elect to go directly to the subsection of this chapter or section of this manual which corresponds to your own entry point of choice Table 33 table provides the corresponding subsection or location title for these different entry points for example if you would prefer to start by examining the logs you can go directly to the subsection entitled Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 Table 33 Troubleshooting Entry Points Subsection or Location Entry Point Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables page 106 and Troubleshooting Tools
131. ard toward the front of the server until it locks into place 3 Turn the knurled thumb screws clockwise until the board is secured into place 2 Reconnect the five cables into the connectors on the fan display board 1 Replace the fan carrier See Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 160 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Pie ee 168 Removing and Replacing Server Components Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 NOTE When replacing the fan display board you are prompted to copy the primary UUID to the secondary location PRI to SEC Reply y Removing and Replacing System Memory System memory modules or DIMMs are located on the system board A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in da
132. are now in service mode Shell gt sysmode normal You are now in normal mode Option ROM Configuration for Arrays Utility The Option ROM Configuration for Arrays ORCA utility is a ROM based utility for manually configuring an array on a Smart Array controller NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output shown in this section To use ORCA 1 Power on the server POST runs and any array controllers that are in the server are initialized one at a time During each controller initialization process POST halts for several seconds while an ORCA prompt message appears 2 At the ORCA prompt e f you are connected using a headless console press the Esc 8 combination e Otherwise press F8 The ORCA Main Menu appears allowing you to create view or delete a logical drive Figure 91 ORCA Main Menu Creating a Logical Drive Using ORCA To create a logical drive using ORCA 1 Select Create Logical Drive The screen displays a list of all available unconfigured physical drives and the valid RAID options for the system 232 Utilities 2 Use the Arrow keys Spar aor and Tab to navigate around the screen and set up the logical drive including an online spare drive if one is required NOTE You cannot use ORCA to configure one spare drive to be shared among several arrays 3 Press Enter to accept the settings 4 Press F8 to confirm the set
133. aseboard MC 0 0 7507 SYSTEM SECURITY CONFIGURATION Trusted Boot No Supported TPM Not Present Shell gt Example 16 info cpu command This example has processor hyperthreading turned on Shell gt info cpu PROCESSOR MODULE INFORMATION of L3 L4 Family CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor Module CPUs Speed Size Size hex Rev State 0 4 1 4 GHz 6 MB None 20 00 BO Active 1 4 1 4 GHz 6 MB None 20 00 BO Active CPU threads are turned on This example has processor hyperthreading turned off Shell gt info cpu PROCESSOR MODULE INFORMATION of L3 L4 Family CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor Module CPUs Speed Size Size hex Rev State 0 2 1 4 GHz 6 MB None 20 00 BO Active 1 2 1 4 GHz 6 MB None 20 00 BO Active CPU threads are turned off EFI POSSE Commands 227 Example 17 info mem command Shell gt info mem MEMORY INFORMATION DEMM A DIMM Current DIMM B DIMM Current 256MB 256MB Oe wWwnNr oO Active Memory Installed Memory Active Active 256MB Active 256MB Active 1024 MB 1024 MB Example 18 info io command Shell gt info io I O INFORMATIO BOOTABLE DEVICES Order edia Type 1 CDROM Seg Bus Dev Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Primary Master CDROM Vendor Device Slot 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 02 00 20 01 00 20 01 00 20 02 00 20 02 00 40 01 00 60 01 00 60 01 00 80 01 00 80 01 00 co 01 00 EO 01 00 EO 01 00 E
134. at hold the System Insight Display to the bezel 1 and push the System Insight Display through the front of the bezel NOOR wW 156 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 54 Removing the System Insight Display from the Front Bezel Replacing the System Insight Display To replace the System Insight Display l ONST N Insert the System Insight Display into the opening in the front bezel and push the board toward the rear of the server until it snaps into place NOTE The System Insight Display is keyed to fit into the bezel in only one direction Replace the front bezel on the front of the server See Replacing the Front Bezel page 156 Reconnect the System Insight Display power cable to the fan display board Replace the front fan carrier assembly See Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 160 Replace the fans into the fan carrier See Replacing a Server Fan page 149 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Respond YES to prompts regarding copying information onto the new board Removing and Replacing the System Insight Display 157 10 Verify the serial number and model string data information copied onto the new board by doing the following a Boot to EFI b Enter Service mode Shell gt sysmode service Current System Mode ADMIN
135. at you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment Access the EFI System Partition fs X where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot Linux For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the Red Hat Enterprise Linux loader is EFI redhat elilo efi and it should be on the device you are accessing The full path for the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server loader is efi SuSE elilo efi and it should be on the device you are accessing At the EFI Shell environment use the bcfg command to manage the boot options list The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list e bcfg boot dump Displays all items in the boot options list for the server e bcfg boot rm Removes the item number specified by rom the boot options list 100 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System e bcfg boot mv ta b Moves the item number specified by ato the position specified by b in the boot options list e bcfg boot add file efi Description Adds a new boot option to the position in the boot options list specifie
136. ate code 4747 in the second Custom Info field and therefore is not a candidate for the battery clip Removing and Replacing the System or iLO 2 MP Battery 181 Example 1 FRUID example mp001cc4fca06a MP gt cm Use Ctrl B to return to MP main menu mp001cc4fca0d6a MP CM gt df all nc DF all nc FRU Entry 0 FRU NAME System Board 1D 0000 CHASSIS INFO Type Main Server Chassis Part Number AB419 2102A Serial Number CN74821183 BOARD INFO Mfg Date Time 6487672 Manufacturer INVENTEC Product Name 2 Socket System Board S N ME85MP0367 Part Number AB419 60001 Fru File ID 10 Custom Info Custom Info 4747 Custom Info 2 BI Custom Info 0 PRODUCT INFO Manufacturer hp Product Name server rx2660 Part Model AH234A Version S N USE4939DF8 Asset Tag SE FRU File ID gt dl Custom Info 691 MFG and TEST HISTORY Process Step ICT Functional LCD CTO Audit Field Repair Test Info Test Revision 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Test Pass Date 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Test Location 00 00 00 00 00 00 Test Count Tests 00 00 00 00 00 00 Failures 00 00 00 00 00 00 NTF 00 00 00 00 00 00 gt This is the last entry in the selected list gt Command successful Procedures to remove and replace the battery for each version of the battery socket follow To remove the system or iLO 2 MP battery from the socket on system boards with EDC
137. ated on the system board Depending on what options you purchased you have one of the following I O backplane assemblies with the included riser board PCI X riser board Three full length PCI X public slots Combo riser board Two full length PCle public slots and one full length PCI X public slot NOTE Wake on LAN is not enabled on any of the PCI X PCle slots PCI X PCle hot plugging is not supported on the rx2660 server There are no LEDs associated with the PCI X PCle cards 34 Overview 2 Server Specifications This chapter provides the specifications for the HP Integrity rx2660 server For more site preparation information see the HP website and search for Generic Site Preparation Guidelines System Configuration Table 14 Hardware Specifications Component Processors HP Integrity rx2660 One or two Itanium single or dual core processors e 1 6 GHz 6 MB cache single core processor e 1 4 GHz 12 MB cache dual core processor e 1 6 GHz 18 MB cache dual core processor e 1 6 GHz 12 MB cache single core processor e 1 42 GHz 12 MB cache dual core processor e 1 67 GHz 18 MB cache dual core processor Memory Supports up to eight Double Data Rate 2 DDR2 DIMMs mounted on the system board Supported DIMM sizes are as follows e 512 MB e 1GB e 2GB e 4GB e 3GB Minimum memory configuration is 1 GB 2 x 512 MB DIMMs Maximum memory configuration is 64 GB 8 x 8 GB DIMMs Disk drives One
138. ay must have two disks e A hot spare disk cannot be created without at least one IM volume already created e The utility does not allow adding a hot spare disk type different from disk types in the volume e With the AUTO command all drives used are the same type as the first available disk found and the size is limited to the size of the smallest disk CFGGEN Utility Commands This section lists the commands available for the cfggen utility CREATE Command The CREATE command creates IM volumes on the SAS controller Firmware and hardware limitations for this family of cards limit the number of configurations that are possible Syntax cfggen lt controller gt create lt volume type gt lt size gt qsync noprompt Parameters lt volume type gt Volume type for the volume to be created Valid value is IM lt size gt Size of the IM volume in megabytes or MAX for the maximum size available gsync Quick synchronization of the volume created noprompt Eliminates warnings and prompts Operation After a disk is added to an IM volume its storage capacity might or might not be used depending on drive capacity and volume capacity For example if you add a 36 GB disk to a volume that only uses 9 GB of capacity on each disk the remaining 27 GB of capacity on the disk is unusable The disk identified by the first SCSI ID on the command line is assigned as the primary disk when creating an IM volume If the
139. boot HP UX Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to choose the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exitfrom the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFl Boot Manager heading At the EFI Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments you use when booting the device Press Enter to initiate booting using the chosen boot option Exit the server console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them e To exit the server console and return to the LO 2 MP Main Menu press Ctrl B e To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the LO 2 MP Main Menu Booting HP UX EFI Shell From the EFI Shell environment boot HP UX on a device by first accessing the EFI System Partition for example fs0 for the root device then entering HPUX to initiate the loader l Access the EFI Shell environment for the server on which you want to boot HP UX Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter Co to choose the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFl Boot Manager Menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFl Boot Manager heading From the EFl Boot Manager Menu choose EFI Shell to acce
140. calability expanders enable support for thousands of SAS devices Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board 193 The SAS backplane attaches to an interconnect board that functions as a link between the midplane board and the SAS backplane A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or equipment damage A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the SAS Backplane Board To remove the SAS backplane 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 4 Slide the SAS drives and fillers approximately two inches out of the drive bays See Removing a SAS Hard Drive page 152 A CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropr
141. card 10 to 25 W 34 12 Btu h to 85 30 Btu h Physical and Environmental Specifications This section provides the temperature and humidity requirements noise emission and air flow specifications for the server Operating temperature and humidity ranges can vary depending on the installed mass storage devices High humidity levels can cause improper disk operation Low humidity levels can aggravate static electricity problems and cause excessive wear of the disk surface Temperature humidity and sound power levels are provided in Table 18 while minimum maximum and typical configurations are in Table 19 page 38 and Table 20 page 39 Physical and Environmental Specifications 37 38 NOTE meters 3000 feet De rate maximum dry bulb temperature 1 degree 300 meters 1000 feet above 900 Table 18 Environmental Specifications system processing unit with hard disk Parameter Operating temperature Value 5 C to 35 C 41 F to 95 F Storage temperature 40 C to 60 C 40 F to 140 F Over temperature shutdown 38 C 100 F Operating humidity Storage humidity 20 to 80 relative non condensing 90 relative non condensing at 65 C Acoustic Noise Emission ISO 9296 Data Center Server Office Friendly Server Typical configuration disk idle LwAd 6 8 B LwAd 5 9 B Sound Power Level Maximum configuration disk idle LwAd 6 8 B
142. causing more errors than usual Table 50 Memory Subsystem Events That Could Light System Insight Display LEDs Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s DIMMs Type EOh 4000d 26d Detected that an SDRAM SFW The failing DIMM MEM CHIPSPARE DEALLOC RANK is failing on the DIMM rank is deallocated DIMMs Type EOh 174d 26d DIMM type is not SFW MEM_DIMM_TYPE_INCOMPATIBLE compatible with current E EEE ING DIMMs for this platform DIMMs Type EOh 173d 26d Detected a fatal error in SFW DIMM serial presence MEM_DIMM_SPD_FATAL P z POL detect SPD Troubleshooting rx2660 SBA The rx2660 server shares a common I O backplane that supports a total of three PCle PCLX slots The System Bus Adapter SBA logic within the zx2 chip of a rx2660 server uses 16 rope interfaces to support up to eight Lower Bus Adapter LBA chips Each LBA chip interfaces with the SBA in the zx2 chip through one or multiple rope interfaces as follows CPU Memory SBA 127 For the PCI X I O backplane e Two LBA chips use two dual rope 4 ropes total interfaces to support two single 64 bit PCI X slots running 133 MHz e One LBA chip uses one quad rope interface to support one single 64 bit PCI X slot running E 266 MHz For the PCI X PCle backplane e One LBA chip uses one dual rope interface to support one single 64 bit PCI X slot running 133 MHz e Two LBA chips use two quad rope 8 ropes total interface
143. ce Friendly Server Fan Replacing a Server Fan A To replace a server fan CAUTION To prevent server components from overheating replace the fan within 40 seconds Failure to observe this caution causes the server to automatically shut down to prevent an overtemperature condition NOTE The fan unit is keyed to fit into the fan housing in one orientation only The release tab is on the right side of the fan unit when viewed from the front of the server Push the fan unit firmly into the fan housing until it is flush with the top of the server 2 See Figure 45 or Figure 46 depending on the type of fan in your server NOTE It can take up to 10 seconds after installing a fan for the new fan LED to turn off 2 Check the diagnostic LED on the front panel that corresponds to the replaced fan unit e If the fan is functioning normally the LED turns off e If the fan fails the LED is lit amber 3 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 Removing and Replacing a Hot Swappable Power Supply Depending on the server you have the different servers have different power requirements The Data Center server has one or two hot swappable power supplies installed The Office Friendly server has two power supplies installed These power supplies are located at the rear of the server in a removable power supply housing The supported configuration of the Data Center server requires a minimum
144. ce is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server CAUTION Record the slot location of all PCI cards as they are removed Depending on the operating system replacing PCI cards in a different location might require system reconfiguration and might cause boot failure To remove the I O backplane assembly 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 4 Disconnect all internal and external cables attached to the I O cards in the I O backplane assembly Removing and Replacing the O Backplane Assembly 163 5 Loosen the two captive screws See Figure 60 for the screw locations a Press the blue button to release the black knob b Turn the black knob counter clockwise until the captive screw is free from the system board Figure 60 Removing the I O Backplane Assembly 6 Lift the assembly straight up and out of the server Figure 61 I O PCI X and PCle PCI X Backplane Asse
145. ce the TPM Removing and Replacing the Trusted Platform Module 187 1 To insert the TPM a Align the TPM connector pinouts with the pins on the system board socket NOTE The female connector on the TPM has one pinout plugged which aligns with a missing pin on the male connector on the system board b Push the TPM straight down into the socket until it is fully seated See Figure 78 2 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 3 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 4 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 5 To enable the TPM a Access the EFI Shell b Enter info sec to display the server security settings on the screen The TPM is disabled by default c Enter secconfig to display a list of configurable security settings d Enter secconfig tpm on to enable the TPM os Reset the server Boot the operating system See Chapter 4 page 85 8 Restore the former TPM settings to the new TPM See the operating system documentation for more information 9 Back up the TPM security information See the operating system documentation for more information N CAUTION When a TPM is installed and enabled on the server data access is locked if you fail to follow the proper procedures for updating the system or option firmware replacing t
146. ch pa ScRool help bch sr SEArch help bch sea SERvice help bch ser BOot help bch bo HElp help bch he RESE help bch reset MAin help bch ma For more help on one of the commands above at the prompt type help bch lt bchcmd gt Example 4 help configuration command Shell gt help configuration Configuration commands cpuconfig Deconfigure or reconfigure cpus date Display or set date err Display or set error level esiproc Make an ESI call errdump View Clear logs info Display hardware information monarch View or set the monarch processor palproc Make a PAL call salproc Make a SAL call time Display or set time ver Displays version info Type help followed by command name for full documentation on that command Type help a to display a list of all commands 216 Utilities Example 5 help cpuconfig command Shell gt help cpuconfig Deconfigure or reconfigure cpus CPUCONFIG module threads onloff module Specifies which cpu module to configure threads Use to display info or configure threads on off Specifies to configure or deconfigure a cpu module or threads Note 1 Cpu status will not change until next boot 2 Specifying a cpu number without a state will display configuration status Examples To deconfigure CPU 0 fs0 gt cpuconfig 0 off Cpu will To display configuration status of
147. comes the first step in your troubleshooting procedure Where appropriate an action or actions prescribed in the Action column of Table 35 is followed by a reference to the corresponding subsection of this chapter for further information NOTE In the table which follows the Unit Identifier UID locator LED has not been included because it is not used directly for troubleshooting rx2660 servers However indirectly it can provide useful system information When the UID is blue this is an indication that the BMC is working Similarly the INIT Button which is a momentary switch with pinhole access that is used to cause a system INIT or Transfer of Control ToC is not discussed in the following tables either It basically is like a system reset preserving the entire memory image so that you can obtain a crash dump and receive OS error information This button can be used to recover a hung system and to obtain information useful for debugging it is less harsh than a power reset NOTE In Table 34 LED states indicating error conditions are provided in uppercase for example FLASHING AMBER Table 34 Front Panel LED States System Health Internal Health External Health System Power Basic Low End Troubleshooting Table Step Number Off Off Off Off 1 in Table 35 Off Off Off STEADY AMBER 2a in Table 35 FLASHING AMBER Off or steady green FLASHING Steady green 2b 2c in Table 35 OR RED AMBER Off
148. command Windows Shutdown from the Command Line From the Windows command line issue the shut down command to shut down the operating system l Log in to Windows running on the server that you want to shut down For example access the system console and use the Windows SAC interface to start a command prompt from which you can issue Windows commands to shut down the server Check to see whether any users are logged in Use the query user or query session command Issue the shutdown command and the appropriate options to shut down the Windows Server 2003 on the server You have the following options when shutting down Windows e To shut down Windows and reboot shutdown r or choose the Start gt Shut Down action and choose Restart from the pull down menu e To shut down Windows and halt power off server hardware shutdown s or choose the Start gt Shut Down action and choose Shut down from the pull down menu To reboot a halted server you must power on the server using the PC command at the iLO 2 MP Command menu e To abort a shutdown stop a shutdown that has been initiated shutdown a For example shutdown r t 60 c Shut down in one minute This command initiates a Windows system shutdown and reboot after a timeout period of 60 seconds The c option specifies a message that is broadcast to any other users of the server Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows 99 Booting and Shutting Down Linux
149. configure the software options 3 To determine the required connection components and the ports used to connect the server to the console device use Table 26 4 Connect the cables a Connect the DB 9 end of the RS 232 serial port female to female cable to the console RS 232 serial port b Connect the other end of the DB 9 female to female cable to the console device Start the emulation software on the console device Log in to the LO 2 MP See Logging In to the iLO 2 MP page 72 At the MP Main Menu enter CM and press Enter to select command mode At the command mode prompt enter LS and press Enter The screen displays the default LAN configuration values Write down the default values or log the information to a file for future troubleshooting 9 Use the LC command to disable DHCP a From the LC command menu enter D and press Enter b Follow the instructions on the screen to change the DHCP status from Enabled to Disabled c Enter XD R to reset the iLO 2 MP 10 Use the LC command to enter information for the IP address host subnet mask gateway parameters and so on 11 Enter XD R to reset the iLO 2 MP 12 After the iLO 2 MP resets log in to the iLO 2 MP again and enter CM at the MP gt prompt 13 Enter LS to confirm that DHCP is disabled and display a list of updated LAN configuration settings Logging In to the iLO 2 MP To log in to the iLO 2 MP 1 Access the iLO 2 MP using the LAN RS 232 seri
150. configured and tested 5 EFI Shell is launched from shared memory and cache lines are retrieved 128 bytes at a time by MEMC in zx2 6 OS loader is launched using the EFI device driver 6 OS boots and starts its own device drivers 6 OS can use runtime PAL and SAL calls and APCI features these abstraction layers allow platform independence Firmware The system has three sets of firmware installed e System firmware e BMC firmware e LO 2 MP firmware All firmware SFW BMC iLO 2 MP and so on must be from the same release Independent updates are not supported Details about a specific release are available in the associated Release Notes Firmware updates are available from http www hp com under Support and Drivers Identifying and Troubleshooting Firmware Problems Erratic system operation or the fact that the server might not boot successfully to the EFl Boot Manager or to the EFI Shell are symptoms of possible firmware problems Firmware 135 It should be noted that problems due to firmware are relatively rare and you should look for other problem causes first If you are dealing with a firmware problem the probable failure areas are as follows e Unsupported firmware installation e Corrupt firmware installation To troubleshoot firmware problems 1 Verify that all system and BMC firmware components are from the same release use the iLO 2 MPsr command 2 Reinstall all firmware Updates
151. cooooooocccccccooonononcccconananonnnnno 118 EMS High Availability MOTO crio a aan ease Et ti 118 Errors and Reading Error Lodi A RE eel EE 118 Event Log WHI MOIS A A A 118 USING EVeOh LOOS6 ae ce chen a e Being iG E A A E ie 118 ID MP Event LOGS ciosdnastaieheastwbosdupadadgne seal od dandaewinanndanta dad iauiese vonas daeisawinteeelanl aniianese 119 System Event Log SEL RW ci n 119 Supported E A A eas Ace tt 121 System Block BL AAA hibe Mia tst wet Dacine Med aleve Suhie al atlanta 121 System Build Up Troubleshooting Procedure ooooooococccccooooononcccooconnnnnononononnnnnnnnccnconnnnnnnnos 122 Ga Oy Cerne are sl A A A A A TA 123 Troubleshooting rx2660 EU sn E AA AA RAS 124 IPF Processor Load Order ata 124 Processor Module Ben O A EER A 124 Customer Messaging HONG varon nn A oa ree 124 Troubleshooting rx2660 Men E 126 6 Contents Memory DIMM Load Order iicecce cence ie Aa 126 Memory Subsystem DENAVIONS xk dcacit a wedded dea 126 Customer Messaging POC yes sis e ld ei 127 Troubleshooting tx 2000 5 BA ceosenitia o diccniods linen lic lidia elit 127 1T A a dale Mela ele sed i a ie Seles 128 Power Subsystem Behavior ah sc tates tance ct curs tat leh aca sae ietabceih aca berets ra a caih Corts coe A ts 128 Power LED A A A lhe A 5 Ott es i ws 128 Cooling Subsystems pata ake hen ee hen tera ak ah a ee nine ASAS 129 Cooling Subsystem Po a linia a 129 I O Backplane LBAs Ropes PDH PCI X PCle Solid oa 130 I O Subsystem A II de
152. cpus fs0 gt cpuconfig PROCESSOR MODULE INFORMATION be deconfigured on the next boot of L3 L4 Family CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor Module CPUs Speed Size Size hex Rev State 0 2 1 1 GHz 4MB 32MB 1F 01 Bl Active 1 2 1 1 GHz 4MB 32MB 1F 01 Bl Active To display cpu thread status fs0 gt cpuconfig threads cpuconfig Threads are turned off To enable cpu threads fs0 X gt cpuconfig threads on cpuconfig To disable cpu threads fs0 gt cpuconfig threads off cpuconfig Threads will be on after a reset Threads will be off after a reset EFI POSSE Commands 217 Example 6 help ioconfig command Shell gt help ioconfig Deconfigure or reconfigure IO components or settings IOCONFIG fast_init wol on off fast_init Specifies device connection policy setting wol Specifies System Wake On LAN setting onloff Specifies to configure or deconfigure a feature or component Note 1 If fast_init is enabled firmware will connect only the minimum set of devices during boot This feature might cause boot failure disable this feature if failure occurs 2 Any pending Wake On LAN request will not be cleared until reboot if the setting is changed to disabled System will clear pending Wake On LAN requests each time the system reboots if the setting is disabled Examples To display the current settings fs0 gt ioconfig Fast initialization Enabled System Wake On
153. d by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description For example bcfg boot add 1 EFI redhat elilo efi Red Hat Enterprise Linux adds a Red Hat Enterprise Linux item as the first entry in the boot options list likewise bcfg boot add 1 efi SuSE elilo efi SLES 10 adds a SuSE Linux item as the first entry in the boot options list For details see the help bcfg command Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces if you are finished using them Enter Ctrl B to exit the system console and return to the iLO 2 MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter x at the Main Menu Booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Operating System You can boot the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system on HP Integrity servers using either of these methods Choose a Red Hat Enterprise Linux entry from the EFl Boot Manager menu To load the Red Hat Enterprise Linux operating system at the EFI Boot Manager menu choose its entry from the list of boot options Choosing a Linux entry from the boot options list boots the operating system using ELILO EFI loader and the elilo conf file Initiate the ELILO EFTI Linux loader from the EFI Shell un For details see page 101 On a Red Hat Enterprise Linux boot device EFI System Partition the full paths to the loader and configuration files are as follows EFI redhat elilo efi and EFI redhat elilo conf
154. d or write activity Offline no activity predictive failure Online no activity predictive failure Flickering green Flashing amber at 1 Hz Disk activity predictive failure Off Steady amber Offline no activity critical fault Off Steady blue Offline drive selected by locator function Flashing green at 1 Hz Off Drive rebuilding DVD Drive The server has one DVD drive or one DVD RW drive This device has one activity LED Figure 9 Figure 9 DVD LED DVD activity LED 30 Overview Rear Panel Controls Ports and LEDs The server rear panel includes communication ports I O ports AC power connectors and the locator LED and button LEDs located on the rear panel of the server signal the operational status of the following components e iLO 2MP e System LAN e Power supply e PCI X PCle slots Figure 10 Rear Panel Control Port and LED Locations LO 2 MP LAN port LO 2 MP status LEDs Auxiliary serial port VGA port USB ports LO 2 MP reset Power supply 1 and LED Power supply 2 and LED PCI X PCle slots Core LAN ports Smart Array P400 controller slot NENE Console serial port UID button LED uB ENE NOTE The Office Friendly server is shown in Figure 10 page 31 The Data Center server might only have one power supply installed iLO 2 MP The server contains an iLO 2 MP on the system board to enable local and remote management of the server As long as AC power
155. d to help resolve the problem The offline support tools are available either from the EFI partition or from the IPF Offline Diagnostics and Utilities CD IPF systems only Once the problem preventing booting has been resolved the OS should be booted and the online support tools should be used for any further testing If it is not possible to reach EFI from either the main disk or from a CD you must troubleshoot using the visual fault indicators console messages and system error logs that are available 114 Troubleshooting Online Diagnostics Exercisers Online support tools are available which permit centralized error archiving and which provide hardware inventory tools as long as the agents providers that support them are installed on the managed server On HP UX systems the legacy tools within OnlineDiag are supported The online support tools on the HP UX 11 23 and greater operating systems include the Support Tool Manager STM tools and the additional Web Based Enterprise Management WBEM features added by SysFaultMgmt The STM suite of tools includes verifiers diagnostics exercisers information modules and expert tools Verifiers quickly determine whether or not a specific device is operational by performing tasks similar in nature to the way applications use the device No license is required to run the verifiers Diagnostics are tools designed to identify faulty or failed CRUs Exercisers stress devices in order to
156. determine the DIMM slots to populate c Read understand and follow the general guidelines to install memory in the server See Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines page 170 5 Install the DIMM a Align the DIMM with the slot located on the memory board and align the key in the connector with the notch in the DIMM b Firmly and evenly push on each end of the DIMM until it seats into the slot c Ensure the extraction levers are in the fully closed position 6 Verify the DIMM installation by using the one of the following system utilities e iLO 2 MP DF command e EFlinfo mem command 7 Replace the airflow guide See Replacing the Airflow Guide page 145 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 9 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 10 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 TIP If you see abnormal error lights after installing DIMMS try uninstalling and reinstalling the DIMMs to make sure the DIMMS are correctly seated Removing and Replacing a Processor The server uses single or dual core processors A single core processor contains one core while a dual core processor contains two cores that function as separate processors Dual core processors double the processing power of the server while maintaining the physical di
157. device 0x0030 are the IDs for a SCSI interface Of the devices with those IDs this device has two channels Fnc of 00 immediately followed by Fnc of 01 Also this SCSI interface has a non numeric XX slot indicating that it is on the system board From the EFI Shell prompt enter the devt ree command to obtain the controller handle for the SCSI interface A tree of all EFl capable devices installed in the system displays For example Shell gt devtree Device Tree Ctr1 04 Ctr1 06 VenHw SysROM Ctr1 0B Acpi HWP0002 0 Ctr1 15 Usb Open Host Controller Ctr1 16 Usb Open Host Controller Ctr1 17 Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 2 Ctr1 18 PCI IDE ATAPI Controller Ctr1 56 DV 28E C Ctr1 91 FAT File System FAT32 118 MB Ctr1 0C Acpi HWP0002 100 Ctrl LLC SI Logic Ultra320 SCSI Controller Ctr1 1D SI Logic Ultra320 SCSI Controller Ctr1 1E Acpi HWP0002 100 Pc1 210 Ctr1 57 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 Mac OOOE7F7E07FA Ctr1 1F Acpi HWP0002 100 Pc1 2 1 Ctr1 58 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 1 Mac 000E7F7E07FB Ctr1 0D Acpi HWP0002 200 Ctr1 20 Acpi HWP0002 200 Pc1 1 0 Ctr1 0E Acpi HWP0002 300 Ctr1 22 HP 2 Gb Dual Port PCI PCI X Fibre Channel Adapter Port 1 Cctr1 23 HP 2 Gb Dual Port PCI PCI X Fibre Channel Adapter Port 2 Ctr1 0F Acpi HWP0002 400 Ctr1 24 Acpi HWP0002 400 Pc1 110 Ctr1 25 Acpi HWP0002 400 Pci 1 1 Cctr1 10 Acpi HWP0002 600 Ctr1 26 Acpi
158. disk is added to hot spare pool Syntax cfggen lt controller gt hotspare delete lt Encl Bay gt Parameters lt controller gt A SAS controller number between O and 255 delete Specifies that the hot spare is to be deleted omit the delete keyword to specify hot spare creation lt Encl Bay gt Enclosure number and Bay number that identify the disk drive that becomes the hot spare Operation The number of disks in an IM array plus the hot spare cannot exceed three You can create only one hot spare disk Make sure the capacity of the hot spare disk is greater than or equal to the capacity of the smallest disk in the logical drive An easy way to verify this is to use the display command Specifying SCSI Parameters The following SCSI parameters can be configured for the SCSI board e SCSI ID SCSI initiator ID e Maximum data transfer rate SCSI rate e Bus width e Whether the HBA is bootable driver support e Avoid bus resets secondary cluster server NOTE Your output might differ from the output in the following examples depending on your server and its contiguration Using the SCSI Setup Utility To use the SCSI Setup Utility to specify SCSI parameters Specifying SCSI Parameters 235 1 At the EFI Shell prompt enter the info io command to map the parameters for all PCI cards installed in the server A list of all the devices that are installed in the server and managed by EFI drivers displays For examp
159. display board 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Remove the server fans in the fan carrier See Removing a Server Fan page 147 Remove the front fan carrier assembly See Removing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 158 Disconnect the five cables attached to the fan display board 1 See Figure 62 Turn the captive knurled thumb screws counterclockwise until the screws release from the server 2 Shuttle the board toward the rear of the server until the board keyways clear the server guide pins 3 Tilt the board toward the front of the server and lift it out at an angle 4 NOW a 9 Removing and Replacing the Fan Display Board 167 Figure 62 Removing and Replacing the Fan Display Board Ij ees po eee ve Cables connected to the fan display board Keyways on the fan display board Captive thumbscrews Fan display board NOTE Figure 62 page 168 shows the Data Center fan display board The Office Friendly board is nearly identical Replacing the Fan Display Board To replace the fan display board 1 Align the connectors with the openings on the front bezel and place the fan display board onto the guide pins Shuttle the bo
160. dure shows how to configure the iLO 2 MP LAN using the RS 232 serial port IMPORTANT Do not configure duplicate IP addresses on different servers within the same network Duplicate server IP addresses conflict and the servers cannot connect to the network The LC command enables you to configure an IP address DNS name subnet mask and gateway address IMPORTANT Ensure you have a console connection through the RS 232 serial port or a network connection through the LAN to access the iLO 2 MP and use the LC command To assign a static IP address using the LC command Connecting and Setting Up the Console 71 1 Ensure the emulation software device is properly configured The terminal emulation device runs software that interfaces with the server The software emulates console output as it would appear on an ASCII terminal screen and displays it on a console device screen 2 To ensure the emulation software is correctly configured verify the following a Communication settings are configured as follows e 8 none parity e 9600 baud e None receive e None transmit b Terminal type is configured appropriately Supported terminal types are as follows e hpterm e vtl00 e vtl00 e vtutf8 IMPORTANT Do not use hpterm and vt100 terminal types at the same time There are many different emulation software applications Consult the help section of your emulation software application for instructions on how to
161. e 43 page 146 for the Data Center fan locations and cooling zones The power supplies have built in fans and are not controlled by the Baseboard Management Controller BMC Server Subsystems 23 Office Friendly Server Cooling Power Six fans cool the Office Friendly server The server fans have two rotors per fan Four fans cool the eight DIMMs and two processors Two fans cool the hard disk drives and the PCI riser board The fans cool three zones in the server Fans 1 and 2 cool Zone 1 fans 3 and 4 cool Zone 2 and fans 5 and 6 cool Zone 3 In the Office Friendly configuration there is N 1 redundancy in Zone 1 and Zone 3 when one fan rotor fails If a fan rotor fails in Zone 2 the server performs a soft shutdown in 40 seconds and the failed fan unit must be replaced See Figure 44 page 147 for the Office Friendly fan locations and cooling zones The power supplies have built in fans and are not controlled by the BMC Figure 4 shows a block diagram of the power subsystem for the server including voltage labels for each main server subsystem that requires power Figure 4 Power Subsystem Block Diagram ws Fis p ndicbrFenteg Ey gt Volta sensor ED Camertiolte asor e e vottege ted aman Voltage Passed Tin Supply 12 13 BD vote comers 7 ton beter Cena F Voltage Conve rer A aoe ee wit benalFuse Data Center Server Power The Data Center server power sub system is designed to provide high availability with
162. e EFI Shell environment use the bcfg command to manage the boot options list The bcfg command includes the following options for managing the boot options list e bcfg boot dump Display all items in the boot options list for the server e bcfg boot rm Remove the item number specified by from the boot options list e bcfg boot mv a b Move the item number specified by a to the position specified by bin the boot options list e bcfg boot add file efi Description Add a new boot option to the position in the boot options list specified by The new boot option references file efi and is listed with the title specified by Description For example bcfg boot add 1 EFI HPUX HPUX EFI HP UX 11i adds an HP UX 11i item as the first entry in the boot options list See the help bcfg command Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces if you are finished using them Press Ctrl B to exit the server console and return to the iLO 2 MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter X at the Main Menu Standard HP UX Booting To boot HP UX use either of the following procedures Booting HP UX EFI Boot Manager page 89 Booting HP UX EFI Shell page 89 88 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System Booting HP UX EFI Boot Manager From the EFI Boot Manager Menu choose an item from the boot options list to boot HP UX A aed Access the EFl Boot Manager Menu for the server on which you want to
163. e assembly Remove the PCI X cards from the I O backplane assembly a Remove the bulkhead T 15 thumbscrews from the O backplane assembly b Pull the cards up and out of the I O backplane assembly Figure 87 Removing the I O Backplane Assembly Dee tr e pre il Sta A in Slot 1 266 MHz Gate latches for full length cards Slot 2 133 MHz Bulkhead fillers Slot 3 266 MHz Sheet metal enclosure 1 O backplane g 1 O backplane T 15 screws I O backplane assembly guide tabs Bulkhead T 15 thumbscrews Lo Sof E Removing the PCI X I O Backplane Board from the I O Backplane Assembly To remove the I O backplane from the I O backplane assembly 1 Remove the three T 15 screws that attach the PCI X backplane to the I O backplane assembly Figure 87 page 207 shows the locations of the T 15 screws 2 Slide the PCI X backplane down to release it from the posts on the I O backplane assembly and lift it from the I O backplane assembly Upgrading the I O Backplane 207 Figure 88 I O Backplane Post Locations I O backplane posts PCI X I O backplane 3 Place the PCI X I O backplane in a static free bag Installing the PCI X PCle I O Backplane Board Into the O Backplane Assembly To install the O backplane into the I O backplane assembly 1 Align the PCI X PCle I O board keyways with the posts on the I O a ag assembly Figure 89 page 208 shows the locations of the posts on the I O backplane assembly 2
164. e fan display board is a combination board that provides and supports the following functionalities e Fan power for the server fans e Power switch and status LEDs e DVD drive e Front panel USB port e Front panel VGA port The fan display board contains the power switch and the following status LEDs e Power LED e System health LED e Internal health LED e External health LED e Locator UID LED WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server NOTE The fan display board includes a USB connector that supports USB 2 0 480 Mbps and a VGA connector The fan display board is also the secondary location of the UUID for the server Do not remove the system board and fan display board at the same time or the UUID is deleted from the server The procedure for removing the fan display board for the Data Center server is the same for the Office friendly server Removing the Fan Display Board To remove the fan
165. e iLO 2 MP It is visible from the rear of the server The states are as follows Table 59 Manageability Status LED LED State Definition Off iLO 2 MP is not responding Steady Amber Self Test 0 5 Hz Flashing Green Heartbeat 1 Hz Flashing Amber ROM Error I O Subsystem SAS DVD HDD Verifying SAS Disk Drive Operation Each SAS disk drive has an activity LED indicator on the front of the drive NOTE On the HP Integrity rx2660 server only the activity LED is used The status LED is not monitored by the OS Verify that the LED shows the correct activity indication for all disk drives that you installed 1 Turn on power to the server and d isplay monitor 2 During the boot sequence watch the activity LED on each SAS disk drive e Activity LED The LED quickly cycles from amber to green The LED stays steady green until the drive spins up 3 If the activity LED stays illuminated steady green on any SAS disk drives after the drive spins up the drive might not be seated correctly Check installation as follows I O Subsystem SAS DVD HDD 133 a Turn off the server power button and unplug the AC power cords and any cables b Re seat all of the SAS disk drives installed in the server c Reconnect the AC power cords and any cables Restart the server to determine whether the LEDs now become illuminated during the boot If not contact your reseller 4 Use the EFI Shell info io com
166. e when the system is in standby mode system power turned off but AC power is still applied to the system When the internal health LED is illuminated the LED of the corresponding failed component illuminates on the System Insight Display See Chapter 5 Troubleshooting page 104 for more details on the internal health LEDs The following are LED states e Off system is off e Green system health is good e Flashing amber system health is degraded e Flashing red system health is critical External health LED Indicates the status of external serviceable components When the external health LED is illuminated the LED of the corresponding failed component illuminates The following are LED states e Off system is off e Green system health is good e Flashing amber system health is degraded e Flashing red system health is critical Power LED e Off no AC power e Green full power is on e Yellow standby power is on The System Insight Display enables you to monitor a single location for the LEDs that provide failing customer replaceable unit CRU locating mapping information for internal system components These LEDs are steady amber in color only when a failure occurs and are otherwise unlit they are not green the rest of the time The LEDs are visible on the front panel Diagnostic LEDs are provided for each internal CRU in the system including all DIMMs and system fans Overview Figure
167. eBob Dual Disk DMD ere Backplane 4 DIMM CEC a anil 4 DIMM SAS Cables Rope MEMORY CPU D2D Ropes a m Mercury RAID Controller Slot 7 i DES UART USB ATAPI DVD Za Bridge TPM A USB 4 J Slot TPM Graphics pd RN50 2Socket System Board Fan Front Panel DBE FP LED s Bulk Power ne BMC RMP3 FP Switches Riss Midplane Management HW Diagnostic LED s pp 1 A i u n aoe Diagnostic Panel QFDP Bulk Power Power Monitor Supply B Server Subsystems 19 I O Subsystem Figure 2 1 O Subsystem Block Diagram Built in 1 0 The server is configured with either a PCI X or a PCle PCI X I O backplane The PCI X backplane includes three full length public PCI X slots The PCle PCI X backplane has two full length public PCle slots and one full length public PCI X slot Wake on LAN is not supported on any of the PCle PCI X slots The server does not support PCI hot plug The server provides a pair of internal slots that support optional RAID cards for the SAS hard drives e The first slot supports a PCI expansion card that contains an express I O adapter EIOA chip for translating ropes to the PCle bus e The second slot supports the RAID host bus adapter HBA The RAID HBA supports an optional 256 MB mezzanine card and external battery The battery is mounted on top of the plastic CPU airflow guide and is connected to the RAID HBA by a power cable When the RAID
168. ed Off to Platform Loaded of EFI OS OS Loader Initialization Iteratively Loaders Application Program Interface API Specified Value add Implementation eee m annn a The EFI Boot Manager loads EFI applications including operating system OS first stage loader and EFI drivers from an EFl defined file system or image loading service Non volatile RAM NVRAM variables point to the file to be loaded These variables contain application specific data that is passed directly to the EFI application EFI variables provides system firmware with a boot menu that points to all the operating systems even multiple versions of the same operating systems The EFI Boot Manager enables you to control the server booting environment Depending on boot option configuration after the server is powered up the Boot Manager presents you with different ways to bring up the system For example you can boot to the EFI Shell to an operating system located on the network or residing on media in the server or the EFl Boot Maintenance menu 212 Utilities The following options are available in the EFI Boot Manager menu Boot from File Allows you to launch a specific application without adding it as a boot option When you select this option a menu displays devices to choose your boot file from Selecting a disk device then displays subdirectories and executable applications on that device Search the subdirectories to find the correct file to boot f
169. ed using DHCP When ARP Ping is successful DHCP status is disabled Some DHCP server options can cause the apparent issuance of ARP Ping to the iLO 2 MP which will negate the DHCP DDNS method The PC and the server must be on the same physical subnet When a new server is first booted DHCP is automatically available the factory set default but ARP Ping does not start until three minutes after the iLO 2 MP is booted This applies to every subsequent boot of the iLO 2 MP until an IP address is obtained by DHCP or has been assigned using the LC command or ARP Ping succeeds There are two ways to use the ARP Ping utility Connect a PC to the network that is on the same physical subnet as the server and run the ARP Ping commands from the PC Locate an existing server on the network log into it and run the ARP Ping commands from the server Installing the Server Table 28 ARP Ping Commands Command Description arp s This command assigns an IP address to the iLO 2 MP MAC address This ARP table entry maps the MAC address of the iLO 2 MP LAN interface to the static IP address designated for that interface ping This command tests network connections It verifies that the LO 2 MP LAN port is configured with the appropriate IP address The following procedure explains how to use the ARP Ping utility using a PC that is connected to the network that is on the same physical subnet as the server To configure a static IP addr
170. emoving and Replacing a Hot Swappable Server Fan 147 O IMPORTANT Data Center You can have one failed fan per zone The fans speed up to compensate for the failed fan If two fans fail in a given zone you have 30 seconds to replace the failed fan Otherwise the server performs a soft shut down due to an overheat condition Office Friendly You can have one failed fan rotor per zone in Zone 1 or Zone 3 The fans speed up to compensate for the failed fan rotor If you have two rotors fail in Zone 1 or Zone 3 or one rotor fail in Zone 2 you have 30 seconds to replace the failed fan Otherwise the server performs a soft shut down due to an overheat condition 3 When removing fans from a Data Center server insert thumb and forefinger into the openings on the top of the fan and squeeze until the fan releases from the socket 1 See Figure 45 When removing fans from an Office Friendly server use two hands to squeeze the two latches on the server fan 1 See Figure 46 4 Pull the fan straight up and out of the server 2 A CAUTION Be careful when removing fans If you remove them while the server is receiving power keep your fingers away from the fan air intakes The openings are large enough for your fingers to contact moving fan blades The fans are labeled as follows Figure 45 Removing and Replacing a Data Center Server Fan 148 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 46 Removing and Replacing an Offi
171. emperatures server configuration and fan operation or failure Air is drawn through the front of the server and pushed out the rear by the cooling fans There are three cooling zones cooled by the 12 server fans Zone 1 is cooled by fans 1 through 4 zone 2 is cooled by fans 5 through 8 and zone 3 is cooled by fans 9 through 12 Each zone can have one fan failure and still sufficiently cool the server You can display fan status remotely with the iLO 2 MP ps command Within the HP integrity rx2660 server temperature sensors report server temperatures to the BMC which controls fan speed based on this information Table 52 Cooling Subsystem Events That Light System Insight Display LEDs Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s Fans 1 12 Type 02h OAh 07h 01h Fan has either BMC Cleared when fan is COOLING_UNIT_WARNING previously failed or replaced is degrading Fans 1 12 Type 02h OAh 07h 02h Fan has failed and BMC Cleared when fan is COOLING_UNIT_FAILURE no longer meets replaced minimum requirements Cooling Subsystem 129 I O Backplane LBAs Ropes PDH PCI X PCle Slots This subsection provides information on troubleshooting issues with the three public PCI X PCle slots I O Subsystem Behaviors The main role of the I O subsystem is to transfer blocks of data and instruction words between physical shared memory and virtual memory system disks disk array The system boot is the first time b
172. en this switch is toggled The preceding problem is fixed when the BMC heartbeat LED is flashing green and the SEL resumes logging OS is non responsive hung Front panel LEDs indicate that the server power is turned on and it is either booting or running the OS system health is steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green Nothing may be logged for this condition 1 Use a paper clip pencil or pen to press the INIT button on the front panel to start a system initialization 2 Reboot the OS and escalate 3 Obtain the system hardware status dump for root cause analysis 4 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core I O devices see Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 for details The preceding problem is fixed when the root cause has been determined 110 Troubleshooting MCA occurs during server operation the server reboots the OS NOTE Server reboots OS if enabled Front panel LEDs indicate that the server detected a fatal error that it cannot recover from through OS recovery routines system health is flashing red internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Capture the MCA dump with the EFI command errdump mca If the system can boot the OS you can capture binary MCA dump files online 2 Examine the iLO
173. ent see POSSE processor configuration options 50 171 installing 50 176 introduction 21 load order 50 172 removing 172 required service tools 51 172 restrictions 50 172 Processor Abstraction Layer see PAL R Rack Installing Into 62 rack anti tip features 141 extending the server from 141 extension clearance 141 inserting the server into 141 209 rack mount server accessing 141 rackless see tower mount 250 Index rear panel functional overview 31 Remove and Replace Hard Drive Hot Plug 43 PCI X PCle Cards 34 PCI PCI X Cards 56 Power Supply Hot Swap 45 reset button MP 32 S safety information 204 safety information general 40 139 SAL defined 25 SAS features and capobilities 193 technology overview 193 SAS backplane removing 194 replacing 195 SAS 1 0 card removing 188 replacing 191 SCSI setup utility 235 specifying parameters 235 SCSI adapter path 236 security risk with DHCP enabled 74 serial attached SCSI see SAS server installation checklist 40 server backup 205 service tools 139 shut down HP UX 92 Linux 103 Windows 98 from command line 99 static IP address assigning with ARP Ping 70 assigning with LC command 71 storage see mass storage supported operating systems 85 System Abstraction Layer see SAL system battery recording configuration settings before removing 181 197 removing 181 replacing on system boards with EDC lt 4739 183 reset sys
174. erve this warning can result in personal injury or equipment damage Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other components Do not wear clothing subject to static charge buildup such as wool or synthetic materials If installing an internal assembly wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit HP 9300 1155 Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only Do not touch any metal edge connectors or any electrical components on accessory boards Installation Sequence and Checklist Table 21 lists the server installation steps Follow these steps in sequence to complete a successful installation 40 Table 21 Installation Sequence Checklist Step Description Completed 1 Unpack and inspect the server shipping container Inventory the contents using the packing slip 2 Install any additional components shipped with the server 3 Install the server into a rack or pedestal 4 Connect cables to the server a Connect AC input power cable b Connect LAN core I O cable Installing the Server Table 21 Installation Sequence Checklist continued Step Description Completed 5 Connect and set up the console for access 6 Power on the server 7 Access the console 8 Verify components in the server 9 Boot the operating system 10 Verify the server
175. erver Accessing the Host Console With the TUI CO Command This section describes the steps to access the host console using the text user interface TUI To access the host console through the iLO 2 MP 1 Log in using your user account name and password at the login page 2 Atthe iLO 2 MP login MP gt prompt enter the CO command to switch the console terminal from the MP Main Menu to mirrored redirected console mode All mirrored data displays 3 To return to the LO 2 MP command interface enter Ctrl B or Esc and and press Enter Interacting with the iLO 2 MP Using the Web GUI Web browser access is an embedded feature of the LO 2 MP The iLO 2 MP has a separate LAN port from the system LAN port It requires a separate LAN drop IP address and networking information from that of the port used by the operating system 74 Installing the Server Before starting this procedure you must have the following information e P address for the iLO 2 MP LAN e DNS name Obtain the factory set DNS name from the iLO 2 MP Media Access Protocol MAC address on the Network Information Tag The Network Information Tag is on the right side of the server above the rail The DNS name is 14 characters long consisting of the letters mp followed by the 12 characters of the MAC address for example mp0017A499CD77 This address is assigned to the iLO 2 MP hardware The LO 2 MP hardware has a unique MAC address that identifies the hardware on the netwo
176. es Use this option to define the devices that display error messages from the system console This menu is identical to the Console Output Devices menu The server does not support different configurations for Output and Error console When you make changes to either Output or Error console menus you must make the identical change in the other menu When you ance serial devices you must make changes to Output Input and Error menus for proper operation Using the System Configuration Menu The System Configuration menu on servers with the latest version of the EFI firmware supported includes the following options 244 Utilities NOTE To determine the current firmware version issue the following EFI info fw command at the EFI Shell prompt e Security Password Menu Enables you to change the administrator and user passwords e Advanced System Information Menu Displays information about system and component configuration e Set System Date Enables you to modify the system date e Set System Time Enables you to modify the system time e Reset Configuration to Default Enables you restore system settings to their original configuration e Help Displays additional information about the available options e Exit Returns to the EFI startup menu Security Password Menu You can set administrator and user passwords to provide different levels of access to the system firmware Resetting Passwords If you forget your password
177. es and slide the drive into the slot until it seats into the socket on the disk backplane 1 See Figure 50 page 153 for installation procedures 3 Close the drive ejector handle by pushing it down until it clicks into place 2 Figure 50 Replacing a SAS Hard Drive Removing and Replacing a Hot Pluggable SAS Hard Drive 153 4 Observe the following SAS hard drive LEDs to ensure the drive is functional e Drive activity LED e Drive status LED Removing and Replacing the DVD Drive The DVD drive is located in the front of the server A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the DVD Drive To remove the DVD drive 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 Inserta tool such as a flat head screwdriver that fits into the release slot to the left of the DVD drive and then push firmly to eject the drive out of the bay 1
178. es or large dents Normal wear or slight damage to the carton is not considered shipping damage If you find shipping damage to the carton contact your HP customer service representative immediately Unpacking the Server To unpack the server 1 Follow the instructions printed on the outside top flap of the carton to remove the banding and the outer carton from the server pallet 2 Remove all inner accessory cartons and the top foam cushions leaving only the server IMPORTANT Inspect each carton for shipping damage as you unpack the server Checking the Inventory The sales order packing slip lists all the equipment shipped from HP Use this packing slip to verify that all of the equipment has arrived Unpacking and Inspecting the Server 4 NOTE To identify each item by part number refer to the sales order packing slip Returning Damaged Equipment If the equipment is damaged contact your HP customer service representative immediately The service representative initiates appropriate action through the transport carrier or the factory and assists you in returning the equipment Unloading the Server With a Lifter A WARNING Use caution when using a lifter Because of the weight of the HP Integrity rx2660 server you must center the server on the lifter forks before lifting it off the pallet to avoid injury NOTE HP recommends that you follow your local guidelines when lifting equipment To un
179. es be installed A CAUTION When a second power supply is not used Data Center server only the empty power supply slot must remain covered with the supplied metal filler panel Failure to observe this caution can result in damage due to overheating Install the hot swappable power supply in the server before attaching the new power cord Failure to observe this precaution can result in damage to the server NOTE The Office Friendly server can run on only one power supply However two power supplies must be installed to meet the acoustic requirements for an Office Friendly server Replace a failed power supply as soon as possible Removing a Power Supply To remove a power supply 1 Move the cable management arm from the rackslide nearest the power supplies enough to allow access to the power supplies 2 Remove the power cord plug from the power supply receptacle 3 Grasp the power supply handle and push the locking tab down with your thumb to release the power supply from the socket on the power supply riser board 1 4 Supporting the power supply with both hands pull the power supply out of the server 2 150 Removing and Replacing Server Components Replacing a Power Supply To replace a power supply 1 Remove the metal filler panel if necessary 2 Supporting the power supply with both hands slide it into the empty slot until it clicks into place 2 O IMPORTANT Ensure the power supply is flush with the
180. ess using the ARP Ping utility 1 Obtain the iLO 2 MP MAC address To set the IP address using ARP you must know the MAC address of the iLO 2 MP LAN You can find the MAC address of the iLO 2 MP LAN on the label located on the server front panel O IMPORTANT Make sure you obtain the MAC address of the iLO 2 MP LAN and not the MAC address of the server core LAN 2 Verify that an active LAN cable on the local subnet is connected to the iLO 2 MP LAN port on the server 3 Access a PC on the same physical subnet as the server Open a DOS window on the PC 5 Atthe DOS prompt enter arp s to assign the IP address to the iLO MAC address arp s lt lP address you assign to the iLO MAC address gt lt iLO MAC address gt For example arp s 192 0 2 1 00 00 0c 07 ac 00 6 At the DOS prompt enter ping followed by the IP address to verify that the LO 2 MP LAN port is configured with the appropriate IP address The destination address is the IP address that is mapped to the iLO MAC address Perform this task from the PC that has the ARP table entry gt ping lt IP address you assigned to the LO MAC address gt For example ping 192 0 2 1 7 Connect to the iLO 2 MP LAN using this IP address 8 Use web or telnet access to connect to the iLO 2 MP from a host on the local subnet and finish setting up the LAN parameters gateway and subnet Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using the RS 232 Serial Port The following proce
181. essing the console confirm that you are at the EFl Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment At the EFI Shell environment issue the map fs command to list all currently mapped bootable devices The bootable file systems are listed as fs0 fs1 and so on Access the bootable partition fsx where X is the file system number for the device you want to boot OpenVMS For example enter fs2 to access the bootable partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed NOTE The file system number might change each time it is mapped for example when the server boots or when the map r command is issued When accessing the bootable partition for the desired boot device issue the efi vms vms_loader command to initiate the vms_loader efi loader on the device you are accessing fs5 gt efi vms vms_loader efi HP OpenVMS Industry Standard 64 Operating System Version V8 3 Copyright 1976 2006 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P A DECnet I LOADED network base image loaded version 05 13 00 Ao SMP I CPUTRN CPU 02 has joined the active set SMP I CPUTRN CPU 03 has joined the active set SMP I CPUTRN CPU 01 has joined t
182. et button 32 MPS optimization see PCle MPS optimization N N 1 defined 23 N 1 capability 63 Network Information Tag 70 75 O Office Friendly Server fan remove and replace 146 Office Friendly server introduction 18 operating system will boot or will not boot 83 operating systems supported 85 Option ROM Configuration for Arrays see ORCA ORCA 232 OS see operating system P PAL defined 25 paths ACPI 240 PC command 77 78 PCI card see PCI X PCle card PCI X card see PCI X PCle ard PCI X slots 34 PCI X PCle card offline installation 165 166 209 offline removal 163 165 206 PCle MPS optimization 20 21 enabling 21 support 20 PCle MPS optimize ioconfig command 221 249 PCle slots 34 PCle PCI X card installation 58 Pedestal Converting from Rack Mount 62 POSSE defined 26 power 24 see also power supply full state defined 77 introduction 24 off state defined 77 PR command 77 sources 63 standby state defined 77 states 63 77 power button 81 function 27 LED 28 power problems 82 power reset command see PR power subsystem see power power supply LEDs 33 load order 45 150 removing 150 replacing 151 Power Supply Hot Swap 45 Replace 45 powering off the server 78 manually 78 using the iLO 2 MP PC command 78 powering on the server 77 78 manually 77 using the iLO 2 MP PC command 77 PR command 77 Pre OS System Environment see EFI POSSE Pre OS System Startup Environm
183. f the system fans to the processors and the system memory on the system board To install an additional processor or system memory you must remove the airflow guide and optionally the RAID battery To remove the airflow guide from the server 1 Remove the top cover from the server See Removing the Top Cover page 46 2 If the RAID battery is connected to the airflow guide remove it before removing the airflow guide To remove the RAID battery a Pull the RAID battery lock away from the RAID battery 1 b Slide the RAID battery toward the front of the server to disengage it from the airflow guide 2 c Pull straight up on the RAID battery to remove it from the airflow guide Figure 17 Removing the Airflow Guide J 3 Lift up on the fan carrier handle approximately 5 cm 2 in to allow the airflow guide to be lifted out of the server 1 Installing Additional Components 47 4 Lift the airflow guide straight up and out of the server 2 Figure 18 Fan Carrier Handle Installing System Memory The rx2660 server has eight system memory DIMM slots located on the system board A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Memory Installation Conventions 48 Before installing memory read and understand the following memory installation conventions e Supported DIMM sizes and memory configu
184. fault values use the default clear command See default page 223 Processor The server processor subsystem supports one or two single or dual core Itanium processors The processor subsystem consists of the following features e 2x2 chipset front side bus memory and I O controller MIOC e System clock generation and distribution e Circuitry for manageability and fault detection The zx2 MIOC and the processors are located on the system board Each processor connects to the board through a zero insertion force ZIF socket Memory The eight server DIMMs attach directly to the system board The supported DIMMs are industry standard 30 mm 1 18 in high PC2 4200 DIMMs Hot spare and hotplug functionality is not supported The server supports the following DIMM sizes e 512 MB e 1GB e 2GB e 4GB e 8GB The minimum amount of memory supported is 1 GB two x 512 MB DIMMs The maximum amount of memory supported is 64 GB eight x 8 GB DIMMs Figure 3 is a block diagram of the server memory that shows data addresses and controls that flow directly to and from the processors The server has eight memory slots Server Subsystems 21 Figure 3 Memory Block Diagram da 71 0 daf 1 0 ata Strobe dqs dqs dqs dqs Data 5trobe D Address addr 15 0 addr 15 0 Address es0 1 3 0 cs0 1 3 0 od011 3 0 o40 1 3 0 cke0 1 1 0 cke 10 ras ras cas cas we we cell0 E cell1 daf 2 143 dq 72
185. ff an HP UX system use the shutdown h command For details see the shutdown 1M manpage and the following procedure 1 From the HP UX command line issue the shut down command to shut down the HP UX operating system 2 Log in to HP UX running on the system that you want to shut down You should log in to the iLO 2 MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the LO 2 MP enables you to maintain console access to the server after HP UX has shut down 3 Issue the shutdown command with the appropriate command line options The command line options you specify dictate the way in which HP UX shuts down and whether the server is rebooted To choose an HP UX shutdown option for your server use the following list e To shut down HP UX and halt power off the server issue the shutdown h command To reboot a halted server you must power on the server using the PC command at the iLO 2 MP Command menu e To shut down HP UX and reboot the server issue the shutdown r command Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS NOTE Before booting or installing the OpenVMS operating system on the server see the following website for the Server Errata Sheet for OpenVMS on the HP Integrity rx2660 Server http www docs hp com en hw html Once you have reached the Enterprise Servers Workstations and Systems Hardware site click the HP Integrity rx2660 Server link and refer to documenta
186. figuration Meis Alacan 244 Security Password ISI liste 245 Resetting Ras Worst dE AE IN e 245 Advanced System Informations eoiceniasitaiasismcic las tenian did 245 RR a aN ea a asa ct ac uaa ult cu aad an el aad cas 245 SelSyslemiy Daten cede se ea e cua a th a s Ghana day eeatata eat nia 245 Set sete A O A ihe ta a ais 245 Set System Wake On LAN 1 265ici0 ocx ueewiemavens if seeavosbidaniddalecbiacsl dentndyheccimenbisiand st repexavendddere 245 Set System DS een hia di aa tae 245 Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor oooooocccccoooooocnccccconnnnnonncccononononnnnnnnonnononnnccnnnns 245 E EE EIA EE EN 247 Contents 1 About This Document This document provides information installation procedures and server specifications for the HP Integrity rx2660 server Regulatory Model Number RSVLA 0503 It also provides parts information and describes how to remove and replace server components troubleshoot and diagnose server problems The document publication date and part number indicate the document s current edition The publication date changes when a new edition is issued Minor changes may be made without changing the publication date The document part number changes when extensive changes are made Document updates may be issued between editions to correct errors or document product changes To ensure that you receive the updated or new editions you should subscribe to the appropriate product support service See yo
187. four physical CPUs when two processor modules are installed in rx2660 servers Furthermore unlike previous IPF processor modules each physical CPU core contains logic to support two physical threads This results in up to eight physical threads or the equivalent of eight logical CPUs when two dual core processor modules are installed and enabled in rx2660 servers the operating system kernel attaches one or more software processes to each available thread so in multiple processor servers having more threads means all software processes are launched and executed faster IPF Processor Load Order For a minimally loaded server one IPF processor module must be installed in CPU slot O on the system board and its threads must be enabled by user actions Additional processor modules of the same revision are installed in CPU slot 1 for rx2660 servers Processor Module Behaviors All enabled CPUs and their threads almost immediately become functional after system power is applied Each thread is in a race to fetch their instructions from their CPU instruction and data caches to complete early self test and rendezvous Early code fetches come from PDH until memory is configured Then normal execution is fetched from main memory Local MCA events cause the physical CPU core and one or both of its logical CPUs within that IPF processor module to fail while all other physical and their logical CPUs continue operating Double bit data cache errors
188. g the Top Cover page 46 56 Installing the Server 2 Loosen the two captive screws on the I O backplane assembly a b Press the blue button to release the black knob Figure 26 page 57 shows the location of the I O backplane assembly captive screws Turn the black knob counterclockwise until the captive screw is free from the server Figure 26 I O Backplane Assembly Screw Locations Ye ghee Y an 1D press Goes teat bret whe Wenig Linch o a gt AN D e aag ana wed E A Rd pr e tne tr hci g the POR Instollin S y Installing Additional Components 57 3 Lift the assembly straight up and out of the server NOTE Depending on your configuration you have one of the I O backplane assemblies shown in Figure 27 page 58 The top I O backplane assembly is a PCle PCI X backplane assembly and the bottom is a PCI X backplane assembly Figure 27 I O Backplane Assemblies a a LAN Slot 1 top PCle bottom PCI X Guide tabs Slot 2 top PCle bottom PCI X El Gote latches for full length cards Slot 3 PCI X Bulkhead fillers I O backplane riser board top PCle bottom EJ Sheet metal enclosure PCI X Installing a PCle PCI X Card 58 To install a PCle PCI X card 1 Select an empty slot that is appropriate for the card you are installing X shows both a PCI X and PCle PCI X riser boards 2 Remove the PCle PCI X bulkhead filler by unscrewing the blue captive screw using a Torx
189. ge http welcome hp com country us en wwcontact html e In other locations see the Contact HP worldwide in English webpage htto welcome hp com country us en wwcontact html For HP technical support e In the United States for contact options see the Contact HP United States webpage http welcome hp com country us en contact_us html To contact HP by phone o Call 1 800 HP INVENT 1 800 474 6836 This service is available 24 hours a day 7 days a week For continuous quality improvement calls may be recorded or monitored o If you have purchased a Care Pack service upgrade call 1 800 633 3600 For more information about Care Packs refer to the HP website http www hp com hps e In other locations see the Contact HP worldwide in English webpage http welcome hp com country us en wwcontact html Subscription Service HP recommends that you register your product at the Subscriber s Choice for Business website http www hp com country us en contact_us html Documentation Feedback HP welcomes your feedback To make comments and suggestions about product documentation send a message to docsfeedback hp com Include the document title and manufacturing part number All submissions become the property of HP Contacting HP 17 1 Overview The HP Integrity rx2660 server is a versatile high rack density platform that provides the following features Form factor 2U rack or pedestal m
190. ge to the server Removing the I O Fan Carrier Assembly This procedure applies to both the Data Center server and Office Friendly server To remove the I O fan carrier assembly 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 4 Disconnect the I O fan carrier assembly power cable 1 See Figure 58 for the Data Center server or Figure 59 page 162 for the Office Friendly server Remove the fans from the I O fan assembly See Removing a Server Fan page 147 6 Loosen the four T 15 screws that hold the I O fan assembly to the system board See Figure 58 page 162 for the Data Center server or Figure 59 for the Office Friendly server w en Removing and Replacing the I O Fan Carrier Assembly 161 Figure 58 Removing and Replacing the Data Center Server I O Fan Carrier Assembly i l J g _ Pr 3 A E gt de PA a Power cable T 15 screws 4 Figure 59 Removing and Replacing the Office Friendly Server I O Fan Carrier Assembly 4 A oy Power cable T 15 screws 4 7 _ Lift the assembly straight up and out of the server 162 Removing and Replacing Server Components Replacing the I O Fan Carrier Assembly This
191. ght the suspect DIMM CRU LED on the System Insight Display For configuration style errors for example no DIMMs installed in OA and OB follow the HP ProLiant policy of lighting all of the CRU LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel for all of the DIMMs that are missing No diagnostic messages are reported for single byte errors that are corrected in both zx2 caches and DIMMs during corrected platform error CPE events Diagnostic messages are reported for CPE events when thresholds are exceeded for both single byte and double byte errors all fatal memory subsystem errors cause global MCA events PDT logs for all double byte errors are permanent single byte errors are initially logged as transient errors If the server logs 2 single byte errors within 24 hours then upgrade them to permanent in the PDT Table 49 Memory Subsystem Events That Light System Insight Display LEDs Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s DIMMs Type EOh 208d 04d No DIMMs installed in SFW Light all DIMM MEM NO DIMMS INSTALLED rank 0 of cell 0 LEDs in rank 0 of DA cell O DIMMs Type EOh 172d 04d A DIMM hos a serial SFW Either EEPROM is MEM DIMM SPD CHECKSUM presence detect SPD misprogrammed or AS EEPROM with a bad this DIMM is checksum incompatible DIMMs Type EOh 4652d 26d This memory rank is WIN Memory rank is WIN AGT PREDICT MEM FAIL correcting too many Agent about to fail or ee E 7 single bit errors environmental conditions are
192. gt Use the Import command to import the Window boot option file Select gt i Enter IMPORT file path EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot0001 Imported Boot Options from file EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot0001 Press enter to continue NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output shown here Enter Q to quit the NVRBOOT utility and exit the console and LO 2 MP interfaces if you are finished using them Enter Ctrl B to exit the system console and return to the iLO 2 MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter x at the Main Menu Booting the Microsoft Windows Operating System Boot the Windows Server 2003 operating system on an HP Integrity server by using the EFI Boot Manager to choose the appropriate Windows item from the boot options list For information on shutting down the Windows ope rating system see Shutting Down Microsoft Windows page 98 Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows 97 gt From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list to boot Windows using the chosen boot option Access the EFI Boot Manager menu for the server on which you want to boot Windows Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter Co to choose the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EF
193. he active set A A 94 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System SSYSINIT I waiting to form or join an OpenVMS Cluster SVMScluster I LOADSECDB loading the cluster security database EWAO Auto negotiation mode assumed set by console EWAO Mer15704 located in 64 bit 66 mhz PCI X slot EWAO Device type is BCM5704C UTP Rev BO 21000000 EWBO Auto negotiation mode assumed set by console EWBO Mer15704 located in 64 bit 66 mhz PCI X slot EWBO Device type is BCM5704C UTP Rev BO 21000000 PKAO Copyright c 2001 LSI Logic PKM V1 1 01 Chip LSISAS1068 EWAO Link up 1000 mbit full duplex flow control disabled Je oe ole ole Ao Ao Ao o9 NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output shown here 6 Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them 7 Enter Ctrl B to exit the system console and return to the iLO 2 MP Main Menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter x at the iLO 2 MP Main Menu Shutting Down OpenVMS This section describes how to shut down the HP OpenVMS operating system on the server To shut down the OpenVMS operating system 1 Log in to OpenVMS running on the server that you want to shut down Log in to the iLO 2 MP for the server and use the Console menu to access the system console Accessing the console through the iLO 2 MP enables you to maintain console access to the server after HP OpenVMS has shut
194. he management processor In addition HP uses the term management processor to refer to any embedded microprocessor that manages a system Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor 245 Management processor is a descriptive term such as server and iLO is a brand name or label such as Integrity Remote access is the key to maximizing efficiency of administration and troubleshooting for enterprise servers Integrity servers have been designed so all administrative functions that can be performed locally on the machine can also be performed remotely iLO enables remote access to the operating system console control over the server power and hardware reset functionality and works with the server to enable remote network booting through a variety of methods LO 2 refers to an Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor iLO 2 MP with the latest advanced digital video redirection technology This new feature gives you a higher performance graphics console redirection experience than with the previous iLO For information on the iLO 2 MP see the HP Integrity iLO 2 Operations Guide 246 Utilities Index A AC power Data Center server 63 Office Friendly server 63 ac power input 63 ac power inputs AO 63 Al 63 BO 63 B1 63 ACPI defined 25 activity LED 133 adapter path 236 slot number 236 add on memory 22 Advanced Configuration and Power Interface see ACPI autoboot 87 B backup see
195. he system board replacing a hard drive or adjusting the OS application TPM usage For more information on firmware updates and hardware procedures see the HP Trusted Platform Module Best Practices White Paper on the HP website http www hp com support Removing and Replacing the Smart Array P400 Controller and PCle Expansion Board A The rx2660 server has two slots on the system board for the optional Smart Array P400 controller and the PCle expansion board The PCle expansion board enables the Smart Array P400 controller slot WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or equipment damage CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Optional Smart Array P400 Controller and Battery To remove the optional Smart Array P400 controller 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 188 Removing and Replacing Server Components 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extendi
196. henever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server IMPORTANT Before removing the system battery record all boot and LAN configuration settings find the settings using the INFO ALL EFI command You must reset these values after replacing the battery You can also use the non volatile RAM configuration backup NVRAM backup utility to back up and store these values The utility is located at http www hp com go bizsupport com Before removing the iLO 2 MP battery see the HP Integrity iLO 2 Operations Guide for backing up iLO 2 MP configuration settings Two versions of the battery socket have been shipped in rx2660 systems You can tell which one you have by checking the Engineering Date Code EDC value on your system board To determine it your system has an Engineering Date Code EDC earlier than 4739 and thus is a candidate for installing the battery clip run the Display FRU DF command from the iLO 2 MP to obtain the FRUID If the second Custom Info field in the FRUID is earlier than 4739 see example below your system is a candidate for the battery clip The following FRUID example system shows a board with d
197. iate socket on the SAS backplane If the cables are mismatched the server will not function correctly Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel 5 Disconnect the SAS cables from the connectors on the SAS backplane 1 Disconnect the SAS backplane power cable from the connector on the SAS backplane 2 7 Pull the release mechanism toward the front of the server to disengage the SAS backplane from the server 3 8 Lift the SAS backplane off the guide posts on the SAS drive cage 4 Angle the board toward the rear of the server and lift it out of the server es 194 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 84 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Replacing the SAS Backplane To replace the SAS backplane l 2 gt 9 10 Pull the release mechanism toward the front of the server and hold it there to allow the SAS backplane to be installed Align the three keyway slots of the SAS backplane with the guide posts on the disk drive cage and guide the board down until it is flush with the SAS drive cage 4 Let go of the release mechanism to lock the board in place Reconnect the SAS backplane power cable to the connector on the SAS backplane 2 Reconnect the SAS cables into the connectors on the SAS backplane 1 CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the channel cables Match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS backplane If the cab
198. ical specifications and requirements Provides procedures to install the server Provides procedures to boot and shut down the operating system Provides diagnostics and basic troubleshooting methodology Provides instructions and procedures on how to remove and replace server components Provides a list of replaceable parts Provides upgrade procedures Provides information on EFI utilities Typographic Conventions This document uses the following conventions Or Command Computer output A percent sign represents the C shell system prompt A dollar sign represents the system prompt for the Bourne Korn and POSIX shells A number sign represents the superuser prompt A command name or qualified command phrase Text displayed by the computer Ctrl x A key sequence A sequence such as Ctrl x indicates that you must hold down the key labeled Ctrl while you press another key or mouse button ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE The name of an environment variable for example PATH ERROR NAME The name of an error usually returned in the errno variable Key The name of a keyboard key Return and Enter both refer to the same key Term The defined use of an important word or phrase User input Commands and other text that you type Variable The name of a placeholder in a command function or other syntax display that you replace with an actual value The contents are optional in syntax If the
199. ide 1 Ensure the fan carrier handle is raised approximately 5 cm 2 in to allow clearance for the airflow guide replacement Figure 25 page 56 shows the fan carrier handle raised 2 Place the airflow guide on the edge of the fan carrier and set it down into place on the processor cage 1 3 Push the fan carrier handle down until it is flush against the airflow guide 2 Installing Additional Components 55 Figure 25 Replacing the Airflow Guide 4 Ensure the fans have not become disconnected when opening the fan carrier handle by pushing down on all the fans to make sure they are seated properly Installing Additional PCle PCI X Cards The rx2660 server supports PCI X cards and PCI Express PCle cards There are three PCle PCI X slots in the I O backplane located on the system board Depending on your server configuration you have one of the following I O backplane assemblies with the included riser board PCI X riser board Three full length PCI X public slots PCle PCI X riser board Two PCle x8 public slots and one full length PCI X public slot NOTE Wake on LAN is not enabled on any of the PCle PCI X slots PCle PCI X hot plugging is not supported on the rx2660 server Removing the O Backplane from the Server To install an additional PCle PCI X card into the server you must first remove the I O backplane from the system board To remove the I O backplane assembly 1 Remove the top cover See Removin
200. iguration Method Attach a Terminal Satan amaia LO Partmisters Dolo login lo Rania sini poned Adnan Optionally Configure LDAP SSH telnet etc Setup the server Connecting and Setting Up the Console 67 Setup iLO Change default logins Finish Preparation Before you can configure the iLO 2 MP LAN you must perform the following tasks e Determine the physical access method to select and connect cables e Determine the iLO 2 MP LAN configuration method and assign an IP address if necessary Determining the Physical iLO 2 MP Access Method Before you can access the iLO 2 MP you must first determine the correct physical connection method The iLO 2 MP has a separate LAN port from the system LAN port It requires a separate LAN drop IP address and networking information from that of the port used by the operating system See Figure 32 page 64 for rear panel console connection port identification and cable connection information Table 26 lists the appropriate connection method required connection components and connectors to the host console Use Table 26 to determine your physical connection method Table 26 Console Connection Matrix Operating Console Connection Required Connection Components System Method HP UX Local RS 232 serial 1 RS 232 DB 9F to DB 9F modem eliminator cable port Remote modem 2 Console device for example a laptop or ASCII terminal port LAN port 10 100 LAN cable
201. in any physical CPU core causes a Global MCA event that causes all logical and physical CPUs in the server to fail and reboot the operating system Customer Messaging Policy e A diagnostic LED only lights for physical CPU core errors when isolation is to a specific IPF processor module If there is any uncertainty about a specific CPU then the customer is pointed to the SEL for any action and the suspect IPF processor module CRU LED on the System Insight Display is not lighted e For configuration style errors for example when there is no IPF processor module installed in CPU slot O all of the CRU LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel are lighted for all of the IPF processor modules that are missing e No diagnostic messages are reported for single bit errors that are corrected in both instruction and data caches during corrected machine check CMC events to any physical CPU core Diagnostic messages are reported for CMC events when thresholds are exceeded for single bit errors fatal processor errors cause global local MCA events Table 47 Processor Events That Light System Insight Display LEDs 124 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Sample IPMI Events Cause Source Notes LED s Processors Type EOh 39d 04d Processor SFW This event BOOT DECONFIG CPU failed and follows other z deconfigured failed processor s Processors Type EOh 5823d 26d Too many WIN Agent Threshold PEM CACHE ERR PROC cache errors exceeded for 7
202. ing fs0 X gt ioconfig wol on System Wake On LAN Enabled concontig Configures the primary console and turns on other consoles for mirroring from the firmware Syntax conconfig index on off primary Parameters Index Specifies index of console to set as primary on Enables the specified console as a secondary console off Puts console into Not Configured NC state primary Sets the specified console as primary Notes e Primary console setting takes effect after reboot e Pin the status column indicates that the console is the primary e Sin the status column indicates that the console is the secondary e NC in the status column indicates that the console is not configured e f a disabled console is set to primary it is enabled 222 Utilities Example 11 conconfig command To display current primary operating system console Shell gt conconfig CONSOLE CONFIGURATION Index Status Type Device Path 1 NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 2 S Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 P VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 Example 12 conconfig 2 primary command To change primary operating system console Shell gt conconfig 2 primary CONSOLE CONFIGURATION T Index Status Type Device Path d NC Serial Acpi PNP0501 0 2 P Serial Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 3 S VGA Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 4 0 Example 13 conconfig 3 off command To disable a console Shell gt conconfig 3 off CONSOLE CONFIGURATIO
203. ing the initial login session and determine the security access required and what user accounts and privileges are needed Create local accounts or use directory services to control user access See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password page 73 Security Access Settings A CAUTION When DHCP is enabled the system is vulnerable to security risks because anyone can access the iLO 2 MP until you change the default user name and password HP strongly recommends you assign user groups and rights before proceeding Determine the security access required and user accounts and privileges needed The iLO 2 MP provides options to control user access Select one of the following options to prevent unauthorized access to the iLO 2 MP e Change the default user name and password See Modifying User Accounts and Default Password page 73 e Create local accounts You can store up to 19 user names and passwords to manage iLO 2 MP access This is ideal for small environments such as labs and small to medium sized businesses e Use directory services Use the corporate directory to manage iLO 2 MP user access This is ideal for environments with a large number of frequently changing users If you plan to use directory services HP recommends leaving at least one local account enabled as an alternate method of access Accessing the Host Console This section describes the different ways to access the host console of the rx2660 s
204. installing the battery clip run the Display FRU DF command from the iLO 2 MP to obtain the FRUID If the second Custom Info field in the FRUID is earlier than 4739 see Example 1 page 182 your system is a candidate for the battery clip To order the battery clip use part number AB419 3400A Ordering a quantity of 1 will provide two battery clips Removing and Replacing the System or iLO 2 MP Battery 183 To install the battery clip A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources have been disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server The following procedure to install the battery clip applies only to boards with the early version battery socket 1 Remove the top access cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 2 Locate the system battery or the MP battery in the battery socket Figure 73 Battery and Battery Socket sos pata Boose me 1t PCr E EXPANSION BOARD mo be 3 Insert the battery clip over the system battery and the MP battery
205. into the slots on the airflow guide b Slide the battery until it clicks into place 1 See Figure 82 Removing and Replacing the Smart Array P400 Controller and PCle Expansion Board 191 Figure 82 Installing the Battery on the Airflow Guide od J 4 Plug the battery cable into the connector on the SAS core I O RAID board 5 Replace the top cover unless you continue with replacing the PCle expansion board See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 or proceed to Replacing the PCle Expansion Board page 192 6 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack unless you continue with replacing the PCle expansion board See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 or proceed to Replacing the PCle Expansion Board page 192 7 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server unless you continue with replacing the PCle expansion board See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 or Replacing the PCle Expansion Board page 192 Replacing the PCle Expansion Board To replace the PCle expansion board 1 Make sure the board rail clip are in the open position 2 Guide the PCle expansion board into the rails and seat the board into the slot on the system board NOTE The PCle expansion board and slot are keyed to fit only one way 3 Push the board rail clips toward the PCle expansion board to lock the board in place 192 Removing and Replacing Server Components
206. is present the iLO 2 MP is active regardless of whether the front panel power switch is off or on Controls Ports and LEDs 31 32 Figure 11 iLO 2 MP Controls Ports and LEDs o E YONNY Mise SNe TY SS i ll m USB ports iLO 2 MP LAN heartbeat EJ Standby power LED Console serial port LED iLO 2 MP reset button LO 2 MP LAN link speed Bl ilO 2 MP LAN self test UID button LED LED LED iLO 2 MP LAN link status BMC heartbeat LED iLO 2 MP Reset Button The iLO 2 MP reset button enables you to reset the iLO 2 MP and optionally reset the user specific values to factory default values A momentary press causes a soft reset of the LO 2 MP when the button is released A greater than four second press causes a soft reset of the iLO 2 MP upon release it also returns user specific values to factory default values The following are reset to factory default values e Serial terminal baud rate settings e User names and passwords iLO 2 MP Ports Table 6 lists a description of the LO 2 MP ports shown in Figure 11 Table 6 iLO 2 MP Ports Port Description 10 Base T 100 Base T LAN LAN port dedicated for remote access to the iLO 2 MP Auxiliary serial Local serial port Console serial iLO 2 MP Local serial port that provides a console connection to the server USB Two public USB 2 0 ports used primarily to connect to a keyboard and mouse for console input functions Windows and Linux operating systems only V
207. k up and store these values The utility is located on the HP website at http www hp com go bizsupport com For iLO 2 MP configuration settings see the HP Integrity iLO 2 Operations Guide Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Disconnect all external cables from the server rear panel If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover See Removing and Replacing the Top Cover page 142 Remove the fan carrier See Removing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 158 Remove the airflow guide See Removing the Airflow Guide page 143 Remove the memory See Removing System Memory page 169 Remove the processors See Removing a Processor page 172 Remove the power supply housing See Removing the Power Supply Housing page 177 Remove the I O backplane assembly See Removing the I O Backplane Assembly page 163 Disconnect the internal SAS cables attached to the system board if necessary See Figure 85 CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server might not reboot Both the cables and the sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel NOTE
208. l Boot Manager heading At the EFl Boot Manager menu choose an item from the boot options list Each item in the boot options list references a specific boot device and provides a specific set of boot options or arguments to be used when booting the device Press Enter to initiate booting using the chosen boot option Once Windows begins loading wait for the Special Administration Console SAC to become available The SAC interface provides a text based administration tool that is available from the system console For details see the SAC online help enter at the SAC gt prompt Loading Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Starting Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Starting Windows KEK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KEK KKK KK KKK KKK KKKK KKK KK KK KK Computer is booting SAC started and initialized Use the ch command for information about using channels Use the command for general help SAC gt NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output shown here Exit the console and iLO 2 MP interfaces when finished using them Enter Ctrl B to exit the console and return to the iLO 2 MP Main menu To exit the iLO 2 MP enter x at the Main menu Shutting Down Microsoft Windows Shut down the Windows operating system on HP Integrity servers by using the Start menu or the shutdown command 98 CAUTION Do not shut down Windows
209. l gt Installation Troubleshooting This section provides basic server troubleshooting information It is designed to help you diagnose common issues that can occur during server installation Troubleshooting Methodology The server was tested prior to shipping Failures encountered during installation can be due to damage that occurred in transit Re seating connectors can clear problems that result from rough handling If you are installing components or assemblies compatibility problems or incorrect installations can be the cause of the problems If you are installing components or assemblies check that items are correctly installed and that all connectors are fully engaged If the unit does not power on check the power source before proceeding If a problem is encountered during initial operation remove any add in or optional components and retest the server before continuing Verify basic server operation before installing additional cards and configuring software and hardware for the server requirements Troubleshooting is based on observation of server status indications and error messages and by checking system event logs You can observe the LED indicators on the front and rear of the server Error messages are displayed on local and remote consoles System history console event and history logs is available through the iLO 2 MP and is accessed through the console Offline troubleshooting programs are available on the resource
210. l of this SCSI interface note the following information e Bus ti Identifies the bus the device is on This is the same for both channels In this example the bus number is 20 e Dev The ID the device is assigned on the bus This is the same for both channels In this example the SCSI interface is device 01 e Fnc Identifies the channel of the device 00 for channel A 01 for channel B and so on In this example because the SCSI interface has two channels one channel is 00 and the other is 01 e Vendor ID Shows the device vendor ID This is the same for both channels For all SCSI interfaces the ID is 0x1000 e Device ID Shows the device ID This is the same for both channels In this example the SCSI interface the ID is 0x0030 e Slot Identifies the physical card slot in the system where the SCSI interface is installed This is the same for both channels In this example the SCSI interface is on the system board therefore the slot number is xx e Path Identifies the device path In this example the SCSI interface path is Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 0 for channel A and Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 1 for channel B ees the SCSI interface information from this example the combined information that tells you this is a SCSI interface is as follows 00 20 01 00 0x1000 0x0030 xx Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 0 00 20 01 01 0x1000 0x0030 xx Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 1 236 Utilities The vendor 0x1000 and
211. laceable unit e Manufacturing part number e Description e Replacement part number e Exchange part number Parts Only Warranty Service Your HP Limited Warranty may include a parts only warranty service Under the terms of parts only warranty service HP will provide aa parts free of charge For parts only warranty service CSR part replacement is mandatory If you request HP to replace these parts you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service Customer Self Repair HP products are designed with many Customer Replaceable Units CRU parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement If during the diagnosis period HP or HP service providers or service partners identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CRU part HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement There are three categories of CRU parts Yes Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory If you request HP to replace these parts you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service Optional Parts for which customer self repair is optional These parts are also designed for customer self repair If however you require that HP replace them for you there may or may not be additional charges depending on the type of warranty service designated for your product No Some HP parts are not designed for customer self repair To satisfy the customer warranty
212. lane assembly from a PCI X to a PCI X PCle back plane assembly I O Backplane Upgrade Overview This section shows you how to upgrade the I O backplane from a PCI X I O backplane to a PCI X PCle I O backplane Table 69 I O Slots and Speed Comparison Slot Number PCI X I O Backplane PCI X PCle I O Backplane 1 PCI X 266 MHz PCle x8 2 PCI X 133 MHz PCle x8 3 PCI X 266 MHz PCI X 133 MHz O IMPORTANT If you are planning to move the PCI X card in slot 3 of the PCI X backplane to slot 3 of the PCI X PCle backplane be aware of the following Slot 3 of the PCI X backplane runs at 266 MHz slot 3 of the PCI X PCle backplane runs at 133 MHz The card runs at the slower speed if used in slot 3 of the PCI X PCle backplane The hardware path to slot 3 changes from the PCI X backplane to the PCI X PCle backplane You are required to make configuration changes to enable this card in slot 3 of the PCI X PCle backplane If disks are attached to a host bus adapter HBA in slot 3 use the HP UX volume group command set using thevgexport command to export data prior to installing the hardware upgrade On the subsequent server boot import the data using the vgimport command to the drives in their new locations SUSE Linux users should consider using Persistent Device Names before installing the upgrade For more information see the appropriate Operating System documentation Required Service Tools Service of this server req
213. lated to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core O devices see Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 The preceding problem is fixed when EFI menu appears on the system console and system firmware booting completes Ac Cannot find a boot disk or removable media drive Nothing is logged for this condition system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green Examine the boot device to determine if it is plugged into its drive bay properly 2 Examine the drive cabling for any problems 3 Examine the boot path settings 4 Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core O devices see Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 The preceding problem is fixed when all boot devices are found Ad There are RAID channel redundancy failures Nothing is logged for this condition system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green Examine the LED next to each RAID connector and replace the RAID HBA if this LED is either steady amber or steady red it indicates RAID drives are degraded or corrupted respectively Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables 109 Table 35 Basic Low End Troubleshooting continued Step 6 Symptom Condition Canno
214. ld expect at this point this example has two ranks of DIMMs installed Your display might not exactly match the display shown FRU IDs 0152 DIMMOD 0001 Memory 0002 Power Converter 0003 Power Supply 0 0004 Power Supply 1 0005 Diagnostic Panel 0006 Front Panel 0128 DIMMOA 0136 DIMMOB 0144 DIMMOC 0160 DIMM1A 0168 DIMM1B 0176 DIMM1C 0184 DIMM1D 0000 Motherboard If you do not see all of the above CRU IDs then concentrate on the missing CRU ID s You should eventually end up with the following Alert IPMI event for this action as read from the SEL Your display might not exactly match the display shown og Entry 3 Dec 2005 21 50 43 Alert Level 5 Critical Keyword Type 02 257100 2453760 Missing FRU device CPU 0 PIROM Logged by Baseboard Management Controller Sensor Entity Presence 0x2041CB3DB3020040 FF20807115250300 If you do show the Alert level 5 Missing CRU device CPU O PIROM then continue to the next step 6 Insert the CPU board CRU with at least CPU O processor installed When you add the CPU board CRU and turn on system power the cooling fans should turn on and stay on and the DF command output should look something like the following Your display might not exactly match the display shown FRU IDs 0001 Memory 0002 Power Converter 0003 Power Supply 0 0004 Power Supply 1 0005 Diagnostic Panel 0006 Front Panel 0007 Disk Management 0008 Disk backplane 0010 Processor Board 0012 Power Pod 0
215. le I O INFORMATIO BOOTABLE DEVICES Order edia Type Path 1 CDROM Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Primary Master CDROM Entry0 Seg Bus Dev Fnc Vendor Device Slot ID ID Path 00 00 0 00 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 0 00 00 0 01 0x1033 0x0035 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 1 00 00 0 02 0x1033 0x00E0 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 1 2 00 00 02 00 0x1095 0x0649 XX Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 00 20 0 00 0x1000 0x0030 XX Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 0 00 20 01 01 0x1000 0x0030 XX Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 1 00 20 02 00 Ox8086 0x1079 XX Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 0 00 20 02 01 0x8086 0x1079 XX Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 2 1 00 40 0 00 0x1000 0x0021 03 Acpi HWP0002 200 Pci 1 0 00 60 0 00 0x1077 0x2312 02 Acpi HWP0002 300 Pci 1 0 00 60 0 01 0x1077 0x2312 02 Acpi HWP0002 300 Pci 1 1 00 80 0 00 0x1000 0x000F 01 Acpi HWP0002 400 Pci 1 0 00 80 0 01 0x1000 0x000F 01 Acpi HWP0002 400 Pci 1 1 00 co 0 00 0x1000 0x0021 04 Acpi HWP0002 600 Pci 1 0 00 EO 0 00 0x103C 0x1290 XX Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 0 00 EO 01 01 0x103C 0x1048 XX Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 1 1 00 EO 02 00 0x1002 0x5159 XX Acpi HWP0002 700 Pci 2 0 System Wake On LAN Enabled In this example a single SCSI interface is listed For each channel of the SCSI board note certain information For example look at the information for the SCSI interface For each channe
216. le Activated Applied Standby power Yes No Yes No Full power Yes Yes Yes Yes Off No No No No Connecting the Cables 63 CAUTION _ If the server is expected to remain in standby mode for more than 30 minutes AC power should be completely removed from the server You can do this by switching off the circuit breakers which are part of the building installation disconnecting or switching off a power distribution unit or by physically removing all power cords from the server NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO 2 MP PR command the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server Figure 32 Rear Panel Control Port and LED Locations Power supply 1 and LED KB Auxiliary serial port iLO 2 MP LAN port Power supply 2 and LED VGA port iLO 2 MP status LEDs PCI X PCle slots E USB ports LO 2 MP reset Core LAN ports Console serial port UID button LED Smart Array P400 controller slot NOTE The Office Friendly server is shown in Figure 32 page 64 The Data Center server might only have one power supply installed Applying Standby Power to the Server 64 To apply standby power to the server Installing the Server If the server has one power supply installed in slot P1 plug the power cord into that receptacle Plug the other end of the power cord into an appropriate outlet NOTE The LED on the power
217. le the server is running the server fans increase to high speed to assist cooling When the top cover is replaced at the end of the operation the server fans return to normal speed 15 minutes After 15 continuous minutes of having the chassis cover open the BMC issues a soft shutdown It tells the operating system to gracefully shut the operating system down Once the operating system accomplishes this and communicates it to the BMC system power is turned off 30 minutes After 30 continuous minutes of having the chassis cover open the BMC performs a hard power off of the system This occurs because the operating system did not respond to the BMC s earlier request to gracefully shut the operating system down Removing the Top Cover To remove the top cover 1 If rack mounted fully extend the server out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 2 Using the Allen wrench provided on the rear panel of the server unlock the cover release lever if necessary by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees counter clockwise 1 3 Pull up on the cover release lever to disengage the top cover from the server 2 4 Slide the cover toward the rear of the server until the tabs release from the slots in the chassis 3 5 _ Lift the cover off the server 4 Figure 38 Removing the Top Cover Replacing the Top Cover To replace the top cover 1 Ensure the cover release lever is in the open position 2 A
218. les are mismatched the server will not function correctly Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel Push the release mechanism toward the back of the server to secure the SAS backplane to the server 3 Replace the SAS disk drives See Replacing a SAS Hard Drive page 153 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Removing and Replacing the SAS Backplane Board 195 Removing and Replacing the System Board O IMPORTANT If your system board has a TPM installed you must order a new TPM when you order a replacement system board Before replacing the system board you must first back up the current TPM settings See the HP UX operating system documentation for more information The TPM is not a customer installable component If you need to replace a TPM on a replacement system board contact an HP authorized service provider The system board supports the functionality for the following server subsystems and components e System management e Power e Internal SAS mass storage e Processors e Memory e Supplies power to the other server boards o Fan display board o O fan board o 1 O backplane o SAS backplane WARNING Ensure that the
219. lign the tabs of the top cover with the corresponding slots in the server and insert the tabs into the slots 1 3 Slide the cover forward until it is flush with the front of the server 2 142 Removing and Replacing Server Components 4 Push the cover release lever down into the latched position 3 5 Lock the cover release lever if required by turning the cam approximately 90 degrees clockwise 4 6 Replace the allen wrench on the rear panel of the server Figure 39 Replacing the Top Cover Removing and Replacing the Airtlow Guide The airflow guide in the server directs airflow from the system fans to the processors and the system memory on the system board Removing the Airflow Guide To remove the airflow guide from the server 1 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 2 Locate the airflow guide Removing and Replacing the Airflow Guide 143 Figure 40 Airflow Guide Location 2 4 Lift the airflow guide straight up and out of the server 2 Figure 41 Fan Carrier Handle 144 Removing and Replacing Server Components Lift the fan carrier handle up approximately 3 cm 1 5 in 1 See Figure 41 Replacing the Airflow Guide To replace the airflow guide 1 Ensure the fan carrier handle is raised enough to replace the airflow guide 2 Place the airflow guide on the edge of the fan carrier and push it down into place on the processor cage 1 See Figure 42 page 145
220. ller for future use For airflow purposes always place hard drive fillers in slots that do not contain SAS disk drives Installing a SAS Hard Drive Figure 13 page 44 shows how to install a SAS hard drive 1 Insert the hard drive into the slot guides and slide the drive into the slot until it seats into the socket on the disk backplane 1 2 Close the drive extraction handle by pushing it downward until it clicks into place 2 Figure 13 Installing a SAS Hard Drive 44 Installing the Server Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply The Data Center server has at least one hot swappable power supply installed before shipping This power supply is located at the rear of the server You can install a second optional power supply to provide 1 1 capability NOTE If you have an Office Friendly server you have two power supplies already installed You do not need to perform this procedure A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server NOTE The power supply is a hot swappable device It does not require interaction with the operating system before the it is removed from or installed into the server Power Supply Loading Guidelines The supported configuration of the server requires a minimum of one power supply installed in slot P1 The right slot viewed from the rear of the server is slot P1 and the
221. lneeea adepi eal at 231 A O 231 Operation A A ON 231 Option ROM Configuration for Arrays Utility ooooooccccnnnnoocoooccccocononnononononanononcccccnnnnnnnnnnos 232 Creating a Logical Drive Using OCA AS 232 COCEA a vtec Caesarea a AAE RUN 233 Sharing EGC see aso O 233 CEC GEIS PO a SAS 233 Rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare disks oooooooococcccocoooooconnncconannonccnoconanononnno 234 CFGGEN Utility Cominiands s 2ca2 cteteesseeduaulcesteededucnd oenteautdebed gel idambucelacentaaddventeestecendaateceelae 234 AE A A A te Te 234 MM A ii 234 PTAS bd 234 10 Contents BCI OM atures A O ie gd earn 234 E O A Re yy en Ameo 234 Ma os 235 Roli UNA EET EAEE 235 AN 235 HOTSPARE lt Comino A O E ache Alek 235 SIVALS D C EEE O 235 Parameters SA A ac EEE E se meme E E EE RE 235 Operati Om arenaen eea r T E uous gene EE oa wine Sar eases ens ree mage 235 Specifying SCSI Parainelersa fet os ae ccs ce ac occ ie 235 Using the SCSI Setup UM tii 235 Using the Boot Option Maintenance Mena ai vee leas 240 a alg a etc a aie A nae Matta A 240 OE 241 Adda BON a ss Ra 241 A II Catia Beat h lal alee ith 242 Delete Boot PONS uesleciasnisio inline ieinrdd 242 Change O O hight Sd eal LS 242 Mantas BOOINEXE Seti a 243 s f A toBo t TimeOut a AA AR 243 Select Console Contigua E E 243 Select Active Standard Error DeviceS ocoooooocccccooooooonnccconononononnnnonnnnononcncncona nono nnnccnnannnss 244 Using the System Con
222. load the server from the pallet using a lifter if necessary 1 Unpack the server 2 Unroll the bottom corrugated tray corresponding to the side on which the lifter will be placed and slide the server as close to that edge of the pallet as possible 3 Break off any foam packaging that can prevent the lifter from being fully inserted under the server Do not remove the foam packaging from the corners of the server This foam is required to elevate the server and to enable the forks of the litter to be placed under the server Insert the lifter forks under the server Carefully roll the lifter forward until it is fully positioned against the side of the server Slowly raise the server off the pallet until it clears the pallet cushions Carefully roll the lifter and server away from the pallet Do not raise the server any higher than necessary when moving it over to the rack LO Or Installing Additional Components This section describes how to install components into the server that are not factory installed If you have additional components to install be sure to install the additional components before installing the server into your rack or pedestal configuration Most servers are pre configured with all components installed prior to shipping from the HP factory Introduction The rx2660 server contains external components installable without removing the top cover and internal components that are accessed by removing the top cove
223. locks of data and instructions words are transferred into physical shared memory from a local disk DVD or from a remote disk on another server through multiple LAN transfers This process is referred to as Direct Memory Access DMA and is initiated by I O devices located in I O or on Host Bus Adapter HBA I O cards and does not involve any logical CPUs A secondary role of the I O subsystem is to transfer data between the internal registers within each CPU core and the internal control store registers within the zx2 PDH Local Bus Adapters LBA and HBA chips This process is referred to as programmed I O and is initiated by logical CPUs executing external LOAD STORE instructions Both system firmware and OS kernel both use this method to initiate DMA transfers Customer Messaging Policy e Always refer to the SEL for any action from low level I O subsystem faults as there might not be any lighted LEDs on the System Insight Display IPMI events in SEL FPL provide the logical ACPI path of suspect I O subsystem CRU Use Table 55 to determine the physical PCI slot number For configuration style errors for example no iLO 2 MP core I O HBAs installed or working see Supported Configurations subsection for actions Some diagnostic messages are reported for high level I O subsystem errors all fatal O subsystem errors cause global MCAs HP UX provides its own path with the physical rope number of the suspect I O subsystem CRU Use Table
224. lt 4739 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 Locate the system or iLO 2 MP battery mounted vertically on the system board See Figure 72 182 Removing and Replacing Server Components 3 Insert a flat tool under the battery retaining clip and carefully push it away from the battery Lift the battery from the socket Figure 72 System and iLO 2 MP Battery Locations System battery iLO 2 MP battery Replacing the Battery on System Boards with EDC lt 4739 To replace the system or iLO 2 MP battery in the socket 1 Insert the replacement battery into the socket on the system board NOTE The positive terminal of the battery is designated by the sign 2 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 3 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 4 Restore the boot LAN and iLO 2 MP settings using the method you used to back them up 5 Reset the server date and time using the EFl date and time commands Installing the Battery Clip The battery clip installs ONLY on servers that contain system boards with EDC less than 4739 System boards with an EDC of 4739 and later DO NOT require the battery clip and will not work with the battery clip To determine if your system has an Engineering Date Code EDC earlier than 4739 and thus is a candidate for
225. m 20 see also core I O board see also O board assembly block diagram 20 introduction 20 iLO 2 MP LAN LEDs 32 LAN link speed LEDs 32 LAN link status LEDs 32 logging in 72 Main Menu 73 PC command 77 78 status LEDs 33 info command adapter path 236 adapter slot number 236 initial observations interval one 64 interval three 64 interval two 64 installing the battery clip 183 integrated lights out 2 management processor see iLO 2 MP intermittent server problems 83 internal health LED 28 internal health LED definition 112 location 27 IP address LO how LO acquires 68 L LEDs 133 disk drive 29 30 DVD activity 30 external health 28 front control panel 27 28 internal health 28 MP LAN link speed 32 MP LAN link status 32 MP status 33 power button 28 power supply 33 rear panel UID 34 system health 27 System Insight Display 28 UID button 27 load order memory 49 170 processor 50 172 logging in to the iLO 2 MP 72 M management processor see iLO 2 MP see iLO 2 MP mass storage 25 see also SAS introduction 25 mass storage subsystem see mass storage memory add on 22 installation conventions 48 170 installing 49 170 introduction 21 load order 49 170 removing 169 supported DIMM sizes 48 170 midplane board removing 196 replacing 198 MP 72 128 245 see iLO 2 MP see iLO 2 MP see also iLO 2 MP controls ports and LEDs 31 32 functional overview 31 res
226. mage to the server Removing System Memory To remove system memory l 2 pic 2 6 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 If rack mounted slide the server out from the rack until it stops See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover from the server See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Remove the airflow guide See Removing the Airflow Guide page 143 Release the DIMM from the slot a Identify on the system board which DIMM you want to remove See Figure 63 for the slot IDs b Push the appropriate extraction levers found on either side of the DIMM slot outward to the open position Remove the DIMM from the slot Figure 63 Memory Location and Slot IDs 3A w BERE Removing and Replacing System Memory 169 Memory Installation Conventions Before installing memory read and understand the following memory installation conventions e Supported DIMM sizes and memory configurations e DIMM load order e DIMM slot IDs Supported DIMM Sizes System DIMMs seat onto the memory boards The minimum server configuration requires at least one memory pair or group of two DIMMs The following are the supported DIMM sizes for the server e 512 MB e 1GB e 2GB e 4GB Memory Load Order When installing memory use a minimum of one pair of like sized DIMMs You can install additional DIM
227. mand Shell gt pdt PDT Information for PD ast Clear time for PD PDT has not been cleared umber of total entries in PD PDT 100 umber of used entries in PD PDT 0 umber of free entries in PD PDT 50 umber of permanent correctable SBE entries in PD PDT 0 umber of permanent uncorrectable MBE entries in PD PDT 0 Address of first uncorrectable error in PD 0x0000000000000000 Example 23 pdt clear command Shell gt pdt clear Are you sure you want to clear the PDT y N y Shell gt Shell gt pdt PDT Information Last Clear time 10 21 01 5 00p Number of total entries in PDT 50 Number of used entries in PDT 0 Number of free entries in PDT 50 Number of single bit entries in PDT 0 Number of multi bit entries in PDT 0 Address of first multi bit error 0x0000000000000000 sysmode Displays or modifies the system mode Syntax sysmode lt normal admin service gt Parameters lt normal gt sets system mode to normal lt admin gt sets system mode to admin lt service gt sets system mode to servic Operation If specified alone sysmode displays the system mode If a mode is specified as a parameter the system mode changes immediately The system mode is retained on successive boots EFI POSSE Commands 231 Example 24 sysmode command Shell gt sysmode System Mode NORMAL Shell gt sysmode admin You are now in admin mode Shell gt sysmode service You
228. mand to check the SCSI drives System LAN LEDs There are two system LAN LEDs on the rear bulkhead of the HP Integrity rx2660 server These LANs are connected to the system board System LAN LEDs There are two 1 Gb LAN ports on the rear panel of the server They are LAN 1 and LAN 2 Table 60 Gb LAN 1 Connector LEDs LED Speed left Description Yellow the 1000 MHz with Ethernet protocol is enabled Green the 100 MHz with Ethernet protocol is enabled Off no link Link right LED Speed left Green link Table 61 Gb LAN 2 Connector LEDs on the Rear Panel Off No link Description Yellow the 1000 MHz with Ethernet protocol is enabled Green the 100 MHz with Ethernet protocol is enabled Off no link Link right Green link Off No link Booting Table 62 Normal Boot Process LED States Step System Internal External Power System Insight Normal Power Up Through OS Health Health Health Display Boot 1 Off Off Off Off Off No AC power to the system 2 Off Off Off Steady Off System is shut down but AC amber power and standby power is active 3 Off Off Off Steady Off System power rails are on green when power switch is toggled 4 Off Off Steady Steady Off System power rails are on green green BMC drives external health LED 134 Troubleshooting Table 62 Normal Boot Process LED States continued Step System Internal
229. mbly Removed 164 Removing and Replacing Server Components Slot 1 top PCle PCI X board bottom PCI X Guide tabs board El Gate latches for full length cards Slot 2 top PCle PCI X board bottom PCI X Bulkhead fillers board El Sheet metal enclosure Slot 3 PCIX I O backplane riser board top PCle PCI X board bottom PCI X board Replacing the I O Backplane Assembly To replace the I O backplane assembly 1 Transfer any I O cards from the removed I O backplane assembly to the replacement I O backplane assembly 2 Align the tabs with the guide slots in the server and slide the I O backplane assembly into place 3 Tighten the two captive screws See Figure 60 a Press the black knob down while turning it clockwise until it is fully tightened b While holding the black knob and pressing down press and release the blue button to lower the black knob to the locked position gt Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 5 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Connect any external cables to the I O cards in the I O backplane assembly 7 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 eS Removing and Replacing a PCI X PCle Card PCI X PCle cards are located in the I O backplane assembly There are three public slots available in the I O backpl
230. mensions of a single processor Table 65 Supported Processor Configurations Configuration Processor Type Number of Installed Number of Cores Number of Logical Processors Processors Hyperthreading on 1P 1C Single core 1 1 2 1P 2C Dual core 1 2 4 2P 2C Single core 2 2 4 2P 4C Dual core 2 4 8 Removing and Replacing a Processor 171 A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Ensure that processor speeds and cache sizes are identical for all processors Failure to observe this caution causes performance degradation or system failure The easiest way to ensure processor compatibility is to use processors with identical part numbers CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Processor Load Order The server supports up to two processors on the processor board The slots on the processor board are labeled CPU O and CPU 1 In single processor servers you must install the processor in the CPU O slot In dual processor
231. modified by insf rmsf and ioscan when devices are added or removed The only purpose of the ioconfig file to maintain configuration information when the system is not running EFI POSSE Commands 221 Example 10 ioconfig command Shell gt ioconfig Deconfigure or reconfigure IO components or settings IOCONFIG fast_init wol onloff fast_init Specifies device connection policy setting mps_optimie Specifies PCIe optimization setting wol Specifies System Wake On LAN setting onloff Specifies to configure or deconfigure a feature or component Note 1 If fast_init is enabled firmware will connect only the minimum set of devices during boot This feature might cause boot failure disable this feature if failure occurs 2 A reboot is required for PCIe MPS sptimiation changes to take effect 3 Any pending Wake On LAN request will not be cleared until reboot if the setting is changed to disabled System will clear pending Wake On LAN requests each time the system reboots if the setting is disabled Examples To display the current settings fs0 gt ioconfig Fast initialization Enabled MPS optimization Disabled System Wake On LAN Disabled To display the current device connection policy setting fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init Fast initialization Enabled To disable fast initialization fs0 gt ioconfig fast_init off Fast initialization Disabled To enable the System Wake On LAN sett
232. monitors are also available through EMS to monitor disk cluster network and system resources These tools are available from HP at an additional cost Errors and Reading Error Logs Event Log Definitions Often the underlying root cause of an MCA event is captured by system or BMC firmware in both the System Event and Forward Progress Event Logs SEL and FP respectively These errors are easily matched with MCA events by their timestamps For example the loss of a CPU VRM might cause a CPU fault Decoding the MCA error logs would only identify the failed CPU as the most likely faulty CRU Following are some important points to remember about events and event logs Event logs are the equivalent of the old server logs for status or error information output Symbolic names are used in the source code for example MC_CACHE_CHECK The hex code for each event log is 128 bits long with an architected format o Some enumerated fields can be mapped to defined text strings o All can be displayed in hex keyword or text mode Events are created by firmware or OS code and are sent over the PDH bus to the BMC for storage in either or both of the SEL and FP logs HP UX shows an I O path for the BMC The iLO 2 MP can display event logs SEL events are sent over the IPMB between the BMC and the iLO 2 MP Event logs can also be read back over the PDH bus by software for example the IPMI driver or agent for storage on disk Using
233. movable media drive CD DVD drive This option does not support booting from a specific file on a specific CD e Load Files The EFI Shell and the LAN Add a Boot Option Use this option to add items to the EFI boot menu This option displays the file systems that are on your system and lets you browse these file systems for applications or drivers that are executable Executable files end with the efi extension You can also select remote boot LAN options that have been configured on your network The option you have selected is added to the EFI boot menu If you add a new drive to your system you must manually add its boot options list if you want to make it a bootable device When adding a boot option that already exists in the Boot Manager list of boot options you can choose whether to create a new option or modify the existing one If you e To modify an existing option change the boot option name or add boot option arguments to the existing option NOTE If you create a new boot option for an already existing option multiple instances of the same boot option exist For example Add a Boot Option Select a Volume NO VOLUME LABEL Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Primary Master CDROM Removable Media Boot Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 2 0 Ata Secondary Master Load File EFI Shell Built in Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu 24 Load File Acpi HWP0002 0 Pci 3 0 Mac 00306E4C4F1A
234. n board into the server 1 Pinch the board locking guides to expose the slot guides to the system board slot 1 Figure 28 page 59 shows the location of the SAS Smart Array P400 controller and PCle expansion board 2 Guide the PCle expansion board down the rails and push into the slot on the system board 2 Figure 28 SAS Smart Array P400 Controller and PCle Expansion Board Slots A A we IA NETA NOTE The board and slot are keyed so the board only fits one way into the slot 3 Close the board locking guides to lock the PCle expansion board into place on the system board Installing Additional Components 59 Installing the SAS Smart Array P400 Controller and RAID Battery To install the SAS Smart Array P400 controller and the battery into the server 60 l 2 3 Open the blue SAS Smart Array P400 controller board lock on the rear panel of the server SeeFigure 29 page 60 shows the location of the board lock Install the SAS Smart Array P400 controller into the slot on the system board as shown in Figure 29 page 60 Close the board lock over the tab on the SAS Smart Array P400 controller and snap it shut Attach the SAS cables to the SAS Smart Array P400 controller Figure 29 Board Lock RAID battery port on SAS Smart Array SAS cable ports on the the SAS Smart Array P400 controller SAS Smart Array P400 controller controller SAS Smart Array P400 controller board lock Installing the Server
235. n sed 89 Ta A E ee ath cata 89 Booting HP UX in Single User Mod ics cae cee el AA Se see ea tees eke 90 Booting HP UX in LVM Maintenance Mode ccccccceceeseeeeeceeseeseceeeecesceseeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeensaes 91 Shoting Down PUK ts SA RNA EE RERE E e a 92 Booting and Shutting Down HP OpenVMS 36 sete sinacncnsseuetieences atuonescidlaenestadoonenouddeshasteGncsena duce 92 Adding OpenVMS to the Boot Options Usina coo 92 Contents 5 A uea Sane cae cee aie ad a EEEa ee ass et ETEO 93 Booting OpenVMS EFI Boot Mande a 93 Booting HP OpenVMS EFI Sl e dea 94 Shutting Down OpenVMS A 95 Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows vss c cx ei eehs Goce Asi dia 96 Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List 2c conocia 96 Booting the Microsoft Windows Operating System cccccccccccceeseceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesssteeeeeeeenaes 97 Shutting Down Microsoft Wi WS a a A A A A A 98 Windows Shutdown from the Command Line occccooooocccccccononononccconononnnnnncnconnnannnnncnnnona 99 Booting and Shutting Down A ele cid ee eden eee 100 Adding Linux to the Boot Options atra tii 100 Booting the Red Hat Enterprise Linux Operating System ccccccccsessseeceeesesseneeeeeseessnseeeees 101 Booting Red Hat Enterprise Linux from the EFI Shell ccceeeseeeceenteeeceeteeeeeenteeeesenes 101 Booting the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server Operating SysteM ooooooooccccccocoooncncccccononononcccnonons 102 Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise
236. nding Kit P N 9300 1155 e Processor install tool attached to the processor cage airflow guide e 1 4 inch flat blade screwdriver e ACX 15 Torx screwdriver attached to the server rear panel e ACX 10 Torx screwdriver Safety Information Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage when performing removal and replacement procedures Voltages can still be present in the server even when powered down Many assemblies are sensitive to damage from electrostatic discharge ESD Follow the safety conventions listed below to ensure safe handling of components prevent injury and prevent damage to the server e When removing or installing servers components follow the instructions provided in this guide e If installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component when power is applied fans are running replace the server cover immediately to prevent overheating e If installing a hot pluggable component complete the required software intervention prior to removing the component e Ifinstalling an assembly that is neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable disconnect the power cable from the external server power receptacle A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power sou
237. ndly Server There are six interchangeable hot swappable dual rotor server fans in the Office Friendly rx2660 server The Office Friendly fans have two fan rotors per fan Fans 1 through 4 are located in a removable fan carrier directly behind the front bezel Fan units 5 and 6 are located in a removable I O fan carrier between the SAS backplane and the I O card cage The server is set up into three cooling zones Fans 1 and 2 cool Zone 1 Fan 3 and 4 cool Zone 2 Fans 5 and 6 cool Zone 3 Fan redundancy is only supported in Zone 1 and Zone 3 If you lose one fan rotor in either of these zones the rest of the fans in that zone run at maximum speed and the server does not shut down If you lose one fan rotor in Zone 2 the BMC performs a soft shutdown in 40 seconds 146 Removing and Replacing Server Components Figure 44 Office Friendly Server Fan and Cooling Zones Removing a Server Fan A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions might result in damage to the server NOTE A hot swappable device does not require interaction with the operating system before the device is removed from or installed into the server To remove a server fan unit 1 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 2 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 R
238. nformation and procedures for powering on and powering off the server Power States The server has three power states e Standby power e Full power Off Table 29 Server Power States Power States Power Cable Power Activated through the iLO 2 MP Pc Standby DC DC Voltage Plugged Into Command or Front Panel Power Button Voltage Applied Receptacle Activated Applied Standby power Yes No Yes No Full power Yes Yes Yes Yes Off No No No No NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the iLO 2 MP PR command the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server Powering On the Server Power on the server to full power using the following methods if the server is in the standby power state e iLO 2 MP PC command e Power button Powering On the Server Using the LO 2 MP NOTE If the power restore feature is set to Always On through the LO 2 MP PR command the server automatically powers on to the full power state when the power cord is plugged in to the server To power on the server using the iLO 2 MP Plug all power cables into the receptacles on the rear panel of the server Initiate a console session and access the MP Main Menu Enter CM to enable command mode Enter PC to use the remote power control command Enter ON to power on the server and enter YESwhen prompted to confirm the action Start the
239. ng Additional Component it ool teal sup dnaie Yecatank aes cowig toustack bel tuatelonet net eaetens 42 is 3 cae Qez cians une a sa Saten cance sarod ot vey a a a aa a tay hate OA 42 Installing a SAS Hard DS is eee tr betes ne Pr irae to as 43 Removing a SAS Hard Drive Flia syst kode ledge vals ea s 43 Installing a SAS Hard Di ad 44 Installing a Hot Swappable Power Supply cocos 45 Power Supply Loading Guidelines sescestecutesvbd vensdemivonteeutd sehagaubventsseed sand ucstvenbesandasbeccbivens 45 Installing a Power aU ires e o nes eo E 45 Removing the Top COVE dd e 46 Removing the Airflow Ulla a ta a nas 47 Installing Systemi MINS AREA A 48 Memory Install etion Gonventiohssecc ia at 48 Supported DIMM Sizes tensles donee RA IS 48 NO 49 Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines o 49 Installing Memor ae ene meee ete ec PO re ae rr eer sero cn arse ee a DE EE E EEEE 49 Installing a Bil AAA Ee eT Cn eo 50 Processor Load Ot dea 50 Required To a A a REE REAA AE a heheh tls Nie EA alta 51 Replacing the Airflow Guiders cca evcsdacteaemsnestusaydachadanencstd senduanacsatesobedanducndaentdeusaacndesdixeadeons 55 Installing Additional PCle PCI X Gaatcl sisac ste Steet trees o e esa Une Bee 56 Removing the I O Backplane from the Server cccccccesscccceecesesseeeececeeseaeeeeeseeestseeeeeeees 56 Installing a PCle PCI X Card ae ccc ed it ofek a tec nut ee tt tite aU gated FY eld ate anal 58 Replacing the I O Backplane Card Cage c ci2 cc cere
240. ng the I O Backplane Assembly page 163 Select an empty slot that is appropriate for the card you are installing Depending on the type of board purchased this is a PCI X or PCle card Remove the PCI X PCle bulkhead filler if required Insert the replacement card into the card slot a Insert the tab at the base of the card bulkhead into the slot in the server b Align the card connectors with the slots on the I O backplane c Apply firm even pressure to both sides of the card until it fully seats into the slot CAUTION Ensure that you fully seat the card into the slot or the card could fail after power is applied to the slot Close the gate latch to secure the end of the card Replace the slotted T 15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the server use a T 15 driver to turn the screw clockwise until it tightens to the server Install the O backplane assembly into the server See Replacing the I O Backplane Assembly page 165 Connect all internal and external cables to the PCI cards in the O backplane assembly Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 166 Removing and Replacing Server Components Removing and Replacing the Fan Display Board Th
241. ng the Server from the Rack page 141 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 4 Disconnect the internal SAS cables attached to the board See Figure 79 A CAUTION When disconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the cables When reconnecting these cables match each cable with the appropriate socket on the Smart Array P400 controller If the cables are mismatched the server might not reboot Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channels Figure 79 Smart Array P400 Controller Location on System Board 4 m A OS 3 J me A 4 PEVITTETTT RAID battery port on SAS Smart Array SAS Smart Array P400 the SAS Smart Array P400 controller controller board lock P400 controller SAS cable ports on the SAS Smart Array P400 controller 5 Disconnect the battery cable from the Smart Array P400 controller card 6 Grasp the card by the edges and lift it out of the server Removing and Replacing the Smart Array P400 Controller and PCle Expansion Board 189 7 To remove the battery from the top of the airflow guide a Push the battery retaining clip away from the battery 1 as shown in Figure 80 b Slide the battery to disengage the battery posts from the slots on the airflow guide 2 c Lift the battery off of the airflow guide Figure 80 Removing the Battery from the Airflow Guide Removing the PCle Expansion Board To remove the PCle expansion board 1 Powe
242. nit 214 Utilities processor internal memory PIM lt proc gt HPMC LPMC TOC ASIC Display PIM information EFI POSSE Commands This section provides information on the EFI POSSE commands developed for the server EFI and Pre OS System Environment POSSE are similar EFI is an Intel specification whereas POSSE is the HP implementation that aids HP support NOTE Your output might not exactly match the output shown in this section due to the type of server you purchased help Provides information on the EFI Shell commands lt also has an additional feature to aid those familiar with the BCH menus of PA RISC servers to adjust to their equivalent functions in EFI Syntax help b lt category gt help b lt cmd gt help b bch lt bchmenu gt lt bchcmd gt Parameters b Enable page breaking category Category of commands to view help on commands cmd Shell command name on which to provide verbose information bch Display the list of BCH commands and their corresponding EFI bchmenu BCH menu name taken from the top level of the BCH menu bchcmd BCH command on which to display information Operation If help is initiated with no parameters it displays a list of EFI Shell command categories To list all of the commands within a category enter help lt category gt If help is issued with the b option any output longer than one page pauses after each page displays It a shell command name
243. nos 15 A ieenteanbddandaed iesmbeoesdyedtnesbeonleeetiwebdeenmcenneeenl gee E 15 Fl Ly Sear ee eee 7a 16 Before You Contact Pi AA ta 16 HP Contact A an Oe a a a Re ee A oN ee Nn en 16 SUSE NON EL SA TEA E A E E asec Ann 16 Documentation pesaba 55 sed hice tne ia a a re Tone Seen een dea 17 ON E E E AR 18 Server Subsystems acetate tease ace ieee tie a e ae E E O E A S ce areas 18 e AAA II sntr dts ia SE ate ele Ma 18 WO Subs ysteni cncehges 2k cantare waa a tee eck Seek ON Ae ete REE a 20 PEIE MPS ODIMI ZOOM rn id ei nin AAA AS 20 PROCOSS O A ON 21 PATIO A A A A A IR A 21 e oiie cee oe a ene ON etoile De cee tl eo EEO EEE 22 A E 23 Data Center Server AAA A al Se ee a 23 Office Friendly Server Cool erect Bidet ea Lia e ben 24 O 24 Data Center Server POWer 0ciisenstssivextagastadessanementnaandaans ae Eheu ban aaa E EEEo Na E resan Eu n I s ie 24 Office Friendly Server Powe tie a ii ds 25 MOSSOS ida 25 A A E EE A TS 25 User Interact a st E it Sd i aa 26 Event IDs for Errors and E tt iaa 26 Controls Ports and MED A ts tae time etts stross ias 26 Front Panel Controls Ports and LEDS ieee scsuwiicesesueedsnsivesiieuerdoastanavuatiivebdiuabsstivadieesbda lt obentivesntieds 26 System A Oi Anetta iit dues fies tal tvs ee N Cane S tad 28 Storage and Media A 29 SAS Disk Drive LEDS ecclesia A aS th San Be ad lee ENR ate at 29 DVD DEV etc tae a etext nl eet hated ete Set ed oie et A Ps oUt a ee 30 Rear Panel Controls Ports and EDS Ni
244. nsible firmware interface see EFI external health LED 28 external health LED definition 111 location 27 248 Index F fan cooling zones 145 146 fan display board functionality 167 removing 167 replacing 168 fans introduction 23 introduction office friendly 24 N 1 defined 23 removing 147 replacing 149 firmware defined 25 introduction 25 operating system requirements 26 front control panel LEDs 27 28 front display panel see System Insight Display introduction 28 front panel controls 27 functional overview 26 FRU list see customer replaceable units list H handle controller 237 hard disk drive see disk drive hard disk drive modules 133 hard drive removing 152 replacing 44 153 hard drive filler removing 151 replacing 152 hard drive problems occur 83 Hard Drive Hot Plug 43 Replace 44 HDD see disk drive hot plug disk drive see disk drive hot plug hard drive see hard drive hot plug hard drive filler see hard drive filler hot pluggable components listed 140 defined 140 Hot swap disk drive module 133 hot swap fan see fans hot swap power supply see power supply hot swappable components listed 140 defined 140 l I O backplane see I O board assembly I O backplane upgrade overview 204 tools required 204 I O board see I O board assembly I O board assembly removing 156 177 180 replacing 157 179 180 I O card see PCI X PCle card I O cards verifying 209 I O subsyste
245. nsole Rights Operator level user login Oper password Oper NOTE User account and password are case sensitive IMPORTANT For security reasons HP strongly recommends that you modify the default settings during the initial login session Make the following changes using any of the iLO 2 MP user interfaces To modify default account configuration settings 1 Log in as the administrator You must log in as the administrator in order to modify default user configuration settings 2 To modify default passwords a Access the MP Main Menu b Enter CM at the MP gt prompt c Enter UC at the MP CM gt prompt and follow the prompts to modify default passwords 3 To set up user accounts a Access the MP Main Menu b Enter CM at the MP gt prompt c Enter UC at the MP CM gt prompt and follow the prompts to modify user accounts Connecting and Setting Up the Console 73 Setting Up Security For greater security and reliability HP recommends that iLO 2 MP management traffic be on a separate dedicated management network and that only administrators be granted access to that network This not only improves performance by reducing traffic load across the main network it also acts as the first line of defense against security attacks A separate network enables administrators to physically control which workstations are connected to the network HP also strongly recommends that you modify the default settings dur
246. nt Part Exchange Part Customer Self Part Number Number Number Repair e DVD signal cable e SAS power cable e Display fan board to system board power cable e CPU power cable e Intrusion switch and cable n a SAS cable AB419 67013 n a AY Miscellaneous 394028 003 Bezel AB419 67014 n a AY 394037 001 Top cover AB419 67015 n a AY 6070B0176101 Top cover Office Friendly AB419 67022 n a AY 376383 002 SAS disk filler panel 376383 002 n a AY 229567 001 DVD filler panel 229567 001 n a AY n a Airflow guide with hex tool AB419 67016 n a AY AB463 3440A CPU air blocker AB463 3440A n a AY 234556 001 System Battery located on the System board 234556 001 n a BY CR2032 234556 001 iLO MP Battery located on the System 234556 001 n a BY board CR2032 Required for Office Friendly servers and compatible with Data Center servers 2 N new install CY with a system board replacement IMPORTANT The list of part numbers above is current and correct as of November 2007 Part numbers change often Check the http partsurfer hp com website to ensure you have the latest part numbers associated with this server Use the part nomenclature from this list to select the correct part from the HP Partsurfer Customer Replaceable Units List 203 B Upgrades This appendix provides instructions to upgrade the I O backplane and the processor Upgrading the I O Backplane This section details how to upgrade the I O backp
247. ntify the problem or CRU e LEDs The front panel LEDs and LAN LEDs of the server change color and blink to help identify specific problems e The System Event Log SEL provides detailed information about the errors identified by the LEDs For system alerts of levels 3 5 the attention condition on the system LED can be cleared by accessing the logs using the s1 command available in the iLO 2 MP Main Menu To access the iLO 2 MP from the console serial port enter Ctrl B or ESC If the LEDs and SEL do not give you enough information to identify the problem HP also provides diagnostic tools with each operating system see Troubleshooting Tools page 111 for more details NOTE Always check the LO 2 MP system event logs SEL in the case of a blinking yellow or red front panel LED before replacing any hardware The default display mode is Keyword mode To view the error messages more easily change to Text mode Recommended Troubleshooting Methodology The recommended methodology for troubleshooting a server error or fault is as follows 1 Consult the system console for any messages emails and so on pertaining to a server error or fault 2 View the front panel LEDs power external health internal health and system health either locally or remotely through the iLO 2 MP v p command 3 Compare the state of the server LEDs off flashing or steady red green or amber with the LED states listed in the LED P
248. nts and forward progress to the Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor iLO 2 MP through common shared memory The iLO 2 MP interprets and stores event IDs Reviewing these events helps you diagnose and troubleshoot problems with the server Controls Ports and LEDs This chapter provides a basic description of the controls ports and LEDs found on the front panel and rear panel of the server For more information on LED functions and descriptions see Chapter 5 Troubleshooting page 104 Front Panel Controls Ports and LEDs The front panel of the server provides the controls ports and LEDs commonly used when the server is operational Figure 5 Front Panel Controls Ports and LEDs gt eae OM a tr AMERO ee ere err al o BBD 8 System Insight Display LEDs USB port SAS disk drive LEDs DVD LED Server status LEDs El Office Friendly server label VGA port Bl Power button Overview NOTE Figure 5 page 26 shows the Office Friendly server LEDs The LEDs for the Data Center server are the same The only difference is the Data Center server does not have the Office Server label on the bezel Table 3 Front Panel Controls Name Function Power button The power button manually powers the server on and off UID button The Unit ID UID button helps locate a particular server within a rack of servers You can remotely activate this function through various system utilities
249. o the socket No additional pressure is required Damage to the pins can occur if pressure is applied Lock the processor into the socket on the processor board a Remove the processor install tool 2 5 mm driver from the tool holder on the airflow guide b Insert the processor tool into the hole that runs down the side of the heatsink c Rotate the processor tool clockwise 180 degrees to lock the ZIF socket d Refasten the processor install tool 2 5 mm driver to the tool holder on the airflow guide Connect the processor power cable into the connector cable that attaches directly to the system board Installing the Server Figure 24 Processor Power Cable Connectors Processor power System board power Processor cable and connector cable and connector 13 Close the processor cage a Grasp the processor cage handle and rotate the cage closure inward toward the rear of the assembly until it is completely closed b Apply adequate force to push the handle down until it is flush with the cage 14 Replace the airflow guide if you are finished installing additional components See Replacing the Airflow Guide page 55 15 Replace the top cover if you are finished installing additional components See Replacing the Top Cover page 61 Replacing the Airflow Guide Ensure to replace the airflow guide in the server when you are finished installing additional equipment into the server To replace the airflow gu
250. ocessor installation See Figure 67 for the slot locations on the system board Remove the plastic airflow blocker covering the processor slot if necessary Remove the protective dust cover from the processor socket if necessary Ensure the cam on the processor ZIF socket is in the unlocked counterclockwise position See Figure 68 CAUTION The processor zero insertion force ZIF socket is locked and unlocked by turning the processor tool half of a full turn The counterclockwise 180 degree rotation half turn unlocks the socket A clockwise 180 degree rotation locks the socket Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket Remove any protective packaging from the processor NOTE Protective covers are installed to protect connector pins Save the covers for future use Inspect the processor pins and verify the pins are not bent 176 Removing and Replacing Server Components 12 A 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Align the alignment holes on the processor with the alignment posts on the processor cage and carefully lower the processor onto the processor socket See Figure 67 CAUTION Do not press the processor into the socket When properly aligned the processor pins seat into the socket No additional pressure is required Damage to the pins can occur if pressure is applied Lock the processor into the socket on the processor boa
251. om the fault HP UX Fault Management Proactive fault prediction and notification is provided on HP UX by SysFaultMgmt WBEM indication providers as well as by the Event Management System EMS The Event Management Service and WBEM provide frameworks for monitoring and reporting events SysFaultMgmt WBEM indication providers and the EMS Hardware Monitors enable users to monitor the operation of a wide variety of hardware products and alert them immediately if any failure or other unusual event occurs By using hardware event monitoring users can virtually eliminate undetected hardware failures that could interrupt system operation or cause data loss Complete information on installing and using EMS hardware event monitors as well as a list of supported hardware can be found in the EMS Hardware Monitors Users Guide An electronic copy of this book is provided on the HP website http docs hp com hpux diag Troubleshooting Tools 117 WBEM Indication Providers and EMS Hardware Monitors Hardware monitors are available to monitor the following components These monitors are distributed free on the OE media Server fans environment CPU monitor UPS monitor FC hub monitor FC switch monitor Memory monitor Core electronics components Disk drives Ha_disk_array NOTE No SysFaultMgmt WBEM indication provider is currently available for components followed by an asterisk EMS High Availability Monitors High Availability HA
252. om the front of the server Remove the top cover to gain access to and remove everything but the I O backplane and system board CRUs NOTE In the following steps CRU and FRU are used interchangeably Plug in the AC power cord s and the iLO 2 MP and system console should display and you should have the following CRU IDs listed after executing the MP DF command Your display might not exactly match the display shown FRU IDs 02 Power Converter 03 Power Supply 0 04 Power Supply 1 05 Diagnostic Panel 06 Front Panel 00 Motherboard If you do not see all of the above CRU IDs then concentrate on the missing CRU ID S You should eventually end up with the following Alert IPMI event for this action as read from the SEL Your display might not exactly match the display shown Log Entry 4 Dec 2005 00 00 09 Alert Level 5 Critical Keyword Type 02 257100 2453760 Missing FRU device Memory Logged by Baseboard Management Controller Sensor Entity Presence 0x2000000009020050 FFO1807115250300 If you do not get the above Alert Level 5 IPMI event but get another sort of high level alert try replacing the I O backplane Then examine the pins on the midplane board and if necessary replace the midplane board 122 Troubleshooting 5 The next step would be to add one pair of DIMMs Remember to remove the AC power cord s before making this configuration change Here is the output of the MP DF command you shou
253. ompletely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Disconnect all internal and external cables attached to the PCI X PCle cards in the I O backplane assembly Remove the I O backplane assembly See Removing the I O Backplane Assembly page 163 Remove the slotted T 15 screw that attaches the card bulkhead to the server use a T 15 driver to turn the screw counter clockwise until it is free from the server See Figure 60 page 164 NOTE Figure 61 page 164 shows both the PCle PCI X I O backplane and the PCI X backplane Pull the gate latch to release the edge of the PCI X PCle card Grasp the card by the edges and lift it out of the server Installing a PCI X PCle Card Before installing a PCI X PCle card ensure that you install the proper drivers for the PCI X PCle card To install a PCI X PCle card l 2 3 12 13 14 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover from the server See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Disconnect all internal and external cables attached to the PCI X PCle cards in the I O backplane assembly Remove the I O backplane assembly from the server See Removi
254. ompt Access the errdump command from the System Configuration menu info Displays most server information Syntax info b target Parameters target valid targets are all display everything cpu display information on cpus cache display information on cache mem display information on memory io display information on io boot display boot related information chiprev display information on chip revisions fw display firmware version information sys display system information warning display warning and stop boot information 224 Utilities Example 15 info all command Shell gt info all SYSTEM INFORMATION 1 hp server rx2660 AB419 2101A Date Time Jan 1998 00 09 35 19 98 0 anufacturer Product Name Product Number i 01 00 09 35 Serial Number TWT46241EF UUID 30303030 3030 3030 3030 303030303030 System Bus Frequency 200 MHz PROCESSOR MODULE INFORMATIO of L3 L4 Family CPU Logical Cache Cache Model Processor Module CPUs Speed Size Size hex Rev State 0 2 1 4 GHz 6 MB None 20 00 co Active CPU threads are turned off MEMORY INFORMATION DIMM A DIMM B DIMM Current DIMM Current 0 512MB Active 512MB Active 1 512MB Active 512MB Active DZ ja a ae cs 3 sy 2 poo Active Memory 2048 MB Installed Memory 2048 MB I O INFORMATION 1 0 Sas Addr500000E0119F9C1 BOOTABLE DEVICES Order edia Type Path 1 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0
255. on the system board Figure 74 Inserting the Battery Clip j nui io a i Oates E e INS TON BOARD Figure 75 Installed Battery Clip a gt 25 iN f y hy af 184 Removing and Replacing Server Components 4 Replace the top access cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 Removing and Replacing the Battery in the Socket To replace the system or iLO 2 MP battery in the socket 1 Remove the top access cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 2 Remove the power supply housing from the system board Place the power supply housing on an ESD protected surface IMPORTANT Do not remove or replace the battery until the power supply housing has been removed Removal allows unobstructed access to carefully remove and replace the battery Figure 76 Power Supply Housing Removed For Battery Access Em Tanna Removing and Replacing the System or iLO 2 MP Battery 185 3 Ensure the battery is carefully removed This is performed by holding the battery socket stationary with one hand while tilting the battery away from the battery socket using the other hand See Figure 77 A CAUTION Ensure the battery socket is secured and stationary when tilting the battery out of or into the battery socket If the socket is not held firmly the socket solder joint could crack and separate from the board surface rendering your system inoperable 4 Use equal care when installing the new battery
256. onfigured I O Card Type EOh 147d 26d PCI slot standby SFW Either a card IO_SLOT_STANDBY_POWER_ERROR power failed slot problem Re seat card first I O Card Type EOh 131d 26d PCI X hot plug SFW Either a card IO HOT PLUG CTRL FAILED controller failed slot problem EE AS Re seat card first I O Card Type EOh 139d 26d PCI bus walk I O SFW Remove any discovery resources unsupported O IO_PCI_MAPPING_T Y pp OPCI eI exceeded cards Move I O card to an unused PCI slot I O Card Type EOh 148d 26d Found invalid SFW IO_UNKNOWN_PCIXCAP_VAL PCIXCAP value I O Card Type EOh 141d 26d PCIXCAP sampling SFW IO_PCIXCAP_SAMPLE_ERROR error I O Card Type EOh 123d 26d Expected O host SFW IO_CHECK_LBA_MISSING_ERR bridge Lower Bus Adapter is missing I O Card Type EOh 619d 26d Expected I O host SFW IO_CHECK_LBA_DECONFIG_ERR bridge Lower Bus Adapter is deconfigured I O Card Type EOh 133d 26d I O LBA clear error SFW IO_LBA_CLEAR_ERR_FAILED failed I O Card Type EOh 144d 26d I O SBA clear error SFW IO_SBA_CLEAR_ERR_FAILED failed I O Card Type EOh 146d 26d PCI X slot power on SFW IO_SLOT_POWER_ON_ERROR error I O Card Type EOh 145d 26d PCI X slot has incorrect SFW IO_SLOT_POWER_DEFAULT_ERROR default power state I O Card Type EOh 136d 26d I O host bridge SFW IO LBA RESET ERROR Lower Bus Adapter is inaccessible because rope reset failed to complete I O Card Type EOh 130d 26d PCI clock DLL error SFW IO_DLL_ERROR I O Card Type
257. oot is enabled EFI loads the first item in the boot options list after a designated timeout period Configure the aut oboot setting for an HP Integrity server using either the autoboot EFI Shell command or the Set Auto Boot TimeOut menu item from the EFl Boot Configuration Menu For example To disable autoboot from the EFI Shell enter autoboot off To enable autoboot with the default timeout value enter autoboot on To enable autoboot with a timeout of 60 seconds enter autoboot time 60 To set autoboot from HP UX enter setboot To enable autoboot from HP UX enter setboot b on To disable aut oboot enter setboot b off Booting and Shutting Down HP UX This section covers booting and shutting down HP UX on entry class HP Integrity servers To add an HP UX entry to the boot options list see Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List To boot HP UX use the following procedures o Standard HP UX Booting page 88 describes the standard ways to boot HP UX Typically this results in booting HP UX in multi user mode Booting HP UX in Single User Mode page 90 describes how to boot HP UX in single user mode o Booting HP UX in LVM Maintenance Mode page 91 describes how to boot HP UX in Logical Volume Management LVM maintenance mode To shut down the HP UX operating system see Shutting Down HP UX page 92 Booting and Shutting Down HP UX 87 Adding HP UX to the Boot Options List
258. ooting and Shutting Down the Operating System Access the EFI System Partition fsx where X is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot Windows For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The full path for the Microsoft Windows loader is efi microsoft winnt50 ia641dr efi and it should be on the device you are accessing However you must only initiate this loader from the EFl Boot Menu and not from the EFI Shell List the contents of the EFI Microsoft W Windows boot option file 1 list fs0 gt ls EFI Microsoft WINNT50 NNT5 Odirectory to identify the name of the Boot 00nn that you want to import into the system boot options Directory of fs0 EFI Microsoft WINNT50 09 18 03 11 58a lt DIR gt 1 024 09 18 03 11 58a lt DIR gt 1 024 12 18 03 08 16a 354 Boot0001 1 File s 354 bytes 2 Dir s fs0 gt At the EFI Shell environment issue the MSUtil nvrboot efi command to launch the Microsoft Windows boot options utility fs0 gt msutil nvrboot NVRBOOT OS Boot Options Maintenance Tool Version 5 2 3683 1 SUSE SLES 10 2 HP UX Primary Boot 0 0 1 0 0 2 0 3 Windows Server 2003 Datacenter 4 EFI Shell Built in Windows OS boot option D isplay M odify C opy E x port I mport E rase P ush H elp Q uit Select
259. or set processor boot identifier EFI Boot Manager Boot info Display boot related information autoboot BootTimer 0 200 Seconds allowed for boot attempt cpucontig CPUCOMFIG lt cpu gt ON OFF Configure or deconfigure processor iocontig IOCOMFIG IOCONFIG fast_init mps_optimize wol Deconfigure or reconfigure I O on off components or settings boottest FastBoot ON OFF or test RUN SKIP Display or set boot tests execution date Time cn yr mo dy hr mn ss Read or set the date time Time cn yr mo dy hr mn ss Read or set the real time clock INformation info all ALL Display all server information info boot BootlNfo Display boot releated information info cpu CAche Display cache information info chiprev ChipRevisions Display revision number of major VLSI table pdt MP command lt df gt FRU Display FRU information info fw FwrVersion Display firmware version for PDC ICM and complex info io lO Display firmware version for PDC ICM and complex lanaddress LanAddress Display core LAN station address info mem Memory Display memory information info cpu PRocessor Display processor information SERvice errdump clear CLEARPIM Clear zero the contents of PIM mm MemRead lt addr gt lt len gt lt type gt Read memory locations scope of page deallocation pdt page deallocation Display or clear the page deallocation table errdump mca errdump cmc errdump i
260. or the server will not power on It shuts down with an overtemp condition due to multiple fan failures The following error displays for all of the fans og Entry 4 14 Feb 2007 16 52 21 Alert Level 5 Critical Keyword COOLING_UNIT_FAILURE Cooling unit failure Logged by Baseboard Management Controller Sensor Cooling Device Fan 1 Mem Datal transition to Critical from less severe 0x2045D33E45020050 FFFF0207210A0300 To replace the system board 198 Removing and Replacing Server Components E PU oe 10 T 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Insert the new system board with the back of the system board going into the server first Guide the system board onto the guide pins and slide the system board into the keyways NOTE When replacing the system board you are prompted to copy the secondary UUID to the primary location SEC to PRI Reply y Reconnect the cables that attach to the system board 1 See Figure 85 Replace the I O fan carrier See Replacing the I O Fan Carrier Assembly page 163 Reconnect the power cable that attaches to the SAS backplane Replace the Smart Array P400 controller backplane and PCle expansion card if necessary Reconnect the power cable that attaches to the Smart Array P400 controller backplane and the PCle expansion card if necessary Reconnect the internal SAS cables CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables match each cable with the a
261. ors are fully engaged 4 Exercise the appropriate self test features of the console software Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware HP makes every effort to provide you with the most current version of firmware However there can be instances when this is not the case To ensure you have the latest version of the firmware running on the server download the latest version of the firmware from the web and create a CD to install the firmware on the server Downloading the Latest Version of the Firmware To download the latest version of the firmware from the web Go to http www hp com go bizsupport Select download drivers and software Select Itanium based servers from the Server category Select your product from the servers listed Select your operating system Select the firmware package you want to download Download the firmware package and follow the instructions for updating the firmware included in the release notes NOOaARWN gt Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware on the Server To install the latest version of the firmware on the server Initiate a server console session 2 Insert the CD with the copy of the latest version of the firmware 3 Using the EFI Boot Manager menu boot to the drive that contains the CD with the updated firmware 4 Follow the instructions to update the firmware 84 Installing the Server 4 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System
262. ort No No No ARP Ping No Yes No ARP Ping No Yes Yes ARP Ping RS 232 serial port or remote modem port Yes No Yes RS 232 serial port or remote modem port No No Yes RS 232 serial port remote modem port or ARP Ping Yes No No Cannot set up the LAN Reconsider your criteria Once you have determined how you will configure the iLO 2 MP LAN in order to acquire an IP address you must configure the iLO 2 MP LAN using the selected method Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using DHCP and DNS Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP automatically configures all DHCP enabled servers with IP addresses subnet masks and gateway addresses All HP Integrity entry class servers with iLO 2 MP are shipped from the factory with DHCP enabled TIP to the iLO 2 MP HP recommends using the DHCP and Domain Name Server DNS method to simplify access When you use DHCP and DNS you can connect to the iLO 2 MP by entering the default DNS name in your browser rather than an IP address only if the following conditions apply e DHCP must be enabled DHCP is enabled by default e You are using a DHCP server that provides the domain name and the primary DNS server IP address e The primary DNS server accepts dynamic DNS DDNS updates e The primary DNS server IP address has been configured through the DHCP server To configure the LO 2 MP using DHCP and DNS Connecting and Setting Up the Console 69 D w Obtain the factory set DNS name from the iLO
263. oting the SuSE Linux kernel By default the ELILO EFI loader boots the kernel image and options specified by the default item in the elilo conf file To interact with the ELILO EFT loader interrupt the boot process for example enter a space at the ELILO boot prompt To exit the loader use the exit command Shutting Down Linux Use the shut down command to shut down Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server The Red Hat Enterprise Linux and SuSE Linux Enterprise Server shut down command has the following options h Halts power off after shutdown Use the PC command at the iLO 2 MP Command menu to manually power on or power off server hardware as needed r Reboots after shutdown c Cancels an already running shutdown time When to shut down Required You can specify time in any of the following ways e Absolute time in the format hh mm hh is the hour one or two digits and mm is the minute of the hour two digits e Number of minutes to wait in the format m in which m is the number of minutes e now to immediately shut down this is equivalent to using 0 to wait zero minutes For details see the shutdown 8 Linux manpage Also see the Linux manpage for the poweroff command 1 From the command line for Red Hat Enterprise Linux or SuSE Linux Enterprise Server issue the shutdown command to shut down the operating system 2 Log in to Linux running on the server
264. ounted chassis Internal peripherals Serial attached SCSI SAS hard drives and a DVD or DVD RW drive High availability components 1 1 hot swappable power supplies and SAS drives Processors Up to two single or dual core Intel Itanium Memory Up to 64 GB NOTE There are two versions of the HP Integrity rx2660 server included in this guide The Data Center version and the Office Friendly version These two versions are very similar However the Data Center server provides N 1 hot swappable fans The Office Friendly version provides different fans a minimum of two power supplies and can only be configured as a pedestal mounted server When reading fan cooling or power information there is Data Center server information as well as Office Friendly server information throughout this document Server Subsystems This section explains the subsystems included with the HP Integrity rx2660 server Server Block Diagram Figure 1 is a block diagram of the main server subsystems It illustrates the main components of each subsystem and how the subsystems are connected to one another 18 Overview Figure 1 Server Block Diagram Three IO Risers are proposed Gemini A amp B for 1 release C when customer demand gt Gemini A 3xPCLX B 1x PCI X 2x PCI e al Gemini C 3xPCLe Dual Shown at left is the PCI X Reps flavor Hot Plug not offered IO Riser Gbit tera PCI X 66Mhz Mercury Broadcom 5704 RHE 1 8 disks Spong
265. owering Off the Server Manually To manually power off the server 1 Gracefully shut down the operating system For more information see the operating system documentation 2 Press the power button to power off the server A CAUTION The main DC voltage is now removed from the system however AC voltage for standby power is still present in the server 3 Unplug all power cables from the receptacles on the rear panel of the server Verifying Installed Components In the Server This section describes how to verify that the components installed in the server are recognized by the server Use the following procedure to verify that the components you have installed into the server are recognized by the server NOTE The processor cache information in the Processor Module Information below shows the L3 Cache Size per logical CPU Since there are two logical CPUs per processor dual core a reading of 6 MB for the L3 cache means that the cache size is 12 MB 1 Select EFI Boot Option from the EFI Boot Manager menu 2 Wait for the EFI Shell prompt to appear 78 Installing the Server Enter info all from the EFI Shell prompt The following displays Shell gt Live Consol info all SYSTEM INFORMATION Date Time Mar 6 2007 13 00 10 2007103506 13 00 10 Manufacturer hp Product Name server rx2660 Product Number AB419A Serial Number US64293295
266. own press and release the blue button to lower the black knob to the locked position Replacing the Top Cover For instructions on replacing the top cover see Replacing the Top Cover page 142 Installing the Server Into the Rack For instructions on inserting the server back into the rack see Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Installing the Server Into a Pedestal To install the server back into the pedestal 1 Align the posts on the pedestal side piece with the slots in the pedestal and slide the side piece flush with the rest of the pedestal 2 Tighten the thumb screws on the rear of the server pedestal piece to attach it to the server 3 Stand the server up on it s side with the pedestal feet slots on the bottom 4 Install the four pedestal kit feet by pushing them into the slots Powering On the Server For instructions on powering on the server see Powering On the Server page 77 Upgrade Verification Viewing Warnings To view warnings access the EFI Shell and run the info warning command Verifying I O cards To verify the I O cards access the EFI Shell and run the info io command Shell gt info io I O INFORMATION BOOTABLE DEVICES Order Media Type Path Upgrading the I O Backplane 209 1 CDROM Acpi HWP0002 PNPOAO3 0 Pci 2 1 Usb 0 0 CDROM Entry0 HD Part1 ig00000000 2 HARDDRIVE Acpi HWP0002 PNP0A03 400 Pci 2 0 Sas Addr5000C5000034749D Lun0 HD Part1 Sig4E
267. ows slots OA and OB then slots 1A and 1B then 2A and 2B then 3A and 3B Memory Subsystem Behaviors The zx2 chip in the rx2660 server provides increased reliability of DIMMs For example previous low end servers with zx1 chips provided error detection and correction of all memory DIMM single bit errors and error detection of most multi bit errors within a memory DIMM pair or 4 bits per rank this feature is called chip sparing The zx2 chip doubles memory rank error correction from 4 bytes to 8 bytes of a 128 byte cache line during cache line misses initiated by processor cache controllers and by Direct Memory Access DMA operations initiated by I O devices This feature is called double DRAM sparing as 2 of 72 DRAMs in any DIMM pair can fail without any loss of server performance Corrective action DIMM memory expander replacement is required when a threshold is reached for multiple double byte errors from one or more DIMMs in the same rank And when any uncorrectable memory error more than 2 bytes or when no pair of like DIMMs is loaded in rank O of side O All other causes of memory DIMM errors are corrected by zx2 and reported to the Page Deallocation Table PDT diagnostic LED panel 126 Troubleshooting Customer Messaging Policy Only light a diagnostic LED for memory DIMM errors when isolation is to a specific memory DIMM If any uncertainty about a specific DIMM then point customer to the SEL for any action and do not li
268. power button system power LED internal and external health LEDs system health LED locator switch LED and an INIT button The rx2660 server use flashing states for example flashing amber or red on these LEDs to indicate a warning or an error There are a total of three buttons arranged horizontally with the UID button and the power button each having an integrated LED In addition to the two integrated button LEDs there are three health LEDs and an INIT button The health LEDs are arranged sequentially in line with the power button LED and as the system starts up there will be more green the further the system proceeds in the startup process 1 The power LED turns green soon as the system starts to power on 2 The external health indicator turns green as soon as the BMC can light it 3 The internal health indicator turns green as soon as the BOOT_START event is received from system firmware BOOT_START can be determined by LED states on the I O backplane 4 The system health indicator turns green when firmware leaves exit boot services and begins to boot an OS The health LEDs are driven by the BMC the power LED is driven solely by hardware BMC code determines the state of the internal and external health LEDs while the iLO 2 MP code examining incoming events using its event dictionary determines the state of the system health LED External Health LED The front panel external health LED indicates the s
269. ppropriate socket on the SAS core I O card If the cables are mismatched the server might not reboot Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channel NOTE The cables connect directly to the system board for a non RAID configuration and connect to the Smart Array P400 controller for a RAID configuration Replace the TPM See Replacing the TPM page 187 Replace the I O card cage Replacing the O Backplane Assembly page 165 Replace the power supply cage See Replacing the Power Supply Housing page 179 Replace the processors See Installing a Processor page 176 Replace the memory See Installing Memory page 170 Replace the airflow guide See Replacing the Airflow Guide page 145 Replace the fan carrier assembly Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 160 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Reconnect all cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Restore boot LAN and iLO 2 MP settings recorded in step Step 1 of the procedure see Removing the System Board page 196 when prompted by the server Removing and Replacing the System Board 199 A Customer Replaceable Units Information This appendix provides the following information for each field rep
270. procedure applies to both the Data Center server and Office Friendly server To replace the I O fan carrier assembly 1 Align the pins on the system board with the holes in the O fan assembly and put the assembly straight down into the server 2 Attach the assembly to the server chassis by tightening the four T 15 screws See Figure 58 page 162 or Figure 59 depending on your server type 3 Install the fans into the I O fan carrier assembly See Replacing a Server Fan page 149 4 Reconnect the I O fan carrier assembly power cable See Figure 58 page 162 or Figure 59 page 162 5 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 6 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 7 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Removing and Replacing the I O Backplane Assembly The I O backplane assembly consists of the O backplane and a sheet metal enclosure The O backplane contains three full length public 1 0 slots Removing the I O Backplane Assembly A Observe the following warning and cautions before removing the I O backplane assembly WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power sour
271. ption 1 Enter your choice 1 Enter the device name Enter for a list of devices Device Device Error Volume Free Trans Mnt Name Status Count Label Blocks Count Cnt S1SDGA700 NODE1 Mounted 0 remote mount 1 S1SDGA1510 NODE1 Mounted 0 remote mount Al S1SDGA4000 NODE1 Mounted 0 WORK 130695025 1 9 S26SDKB5 NODE1 Mounted O DISK_V83 540949440 333 1 Device Device Error Name Status Count EWAO Online 1 EWBO Online 0 EFI Built in EFI Shell Enter the device name Enter for a list of devices 26SDKB5 Enter the desired position number 1 2 3 of the entry To display the Boot Options list enter and press Return Position 1 10 Enter the value for VMS_FLAGS in the form n n VMS_FLAGS NONE Enter a short description do not include quotation marks Description 26SDKB5 V83 System Disk efiSbcfg 26 dkb5 Boot0008 Option successfully added Enter your choice NOTE Due to the type of server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output shown here For more details see HP OpenVMS Version 8 3 for Integrity Servers Upgrade and Installation Manual Booting OpenVMS To boot OpenVMS on an rx2660 use either of the following procedures e Booting OpenVMS EFI Boot Manager page 93 e Booting HP OpenVMS EFI Shell page 94 Booting OpenVMS EFI Boot Manager To boot OpenVMS from the EFl Boot Manager menu Booting
272. ptom and if the problem is random Verity that the AC power source is stable Re seat all rear panel connectors Re seat all hot swappable fans and power supplies Re seat all main memory DIMMs Re seat all cable harnesses and board connectors DVD Problems DVD problems that occur during installation are usually related to faulty connections If you are experiencing DVD problems PIERO 1 Remove and reinsert the disk 2 Replace the disk 3 Remove and reinstall the DVD drive Check that connectors are fully engaged 4 Replace the DVD drive Hard Drive Problems Hard drive problems that occur during installation are usually due to rough handling The drive might not be correctly seated or could have been damaged in transit If you are experiencing hard drive problems 1 Remove and reinsert the faulty hard drive 2 Swap the hard drive with one from another slot or with a known good spare Installation Troubleshooting 83 3 Remove and reinstall the hard drive backplane Check that connectors are fully engaged 4 Replace the hard drive backplane Console Problems Console problems during installations can be caused by faulty interconnections If you are experiencing monitor keyboard or mouse problems 1 Check the monitor controls Adjust contrast and brightness as required 2 Inspect all power and interconnecting cables Check that all console connectors are fully engaged 3 Check that all iLO 2 MP board connect
273. r The externally accessible components are as follows e SAS hard drives e Power supplies 42 Installing the Server The internal components are as follows e System memory e Processors e PCle PCI X cards A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to removing or installing server hardware unless you are removing or installing a hot swappable or hot pluggable component Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is turned off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to the equipment Installing a SAS Hard Drive There are eight hot pluggable SAS hard drive slots located on the front of the server Slots without SAS hard drives installed have slot fillers installed for cooling purposes Removing a SAS Hard Drive Filler To install a SAS disk drive you must first remove the hard drive filler 1 Squeeze the tabs on the front of the filler to release it from the slot in the drive bay 1 Installing Additional Components 43 2 Pull gently until the filler slides out of the server 2 Figure 12 Removing a Hard Drive Filler L h gt a mg e a A n NOTE SAS hard drives are loaded in order starting with slot 8 going from right to left to slot 1 Save the SAS hard drive fi
274. r Hot Pluggable Components A component is defined as hot pluggable if you can remove it from the server while the server remains operational but software intervention is required prior to removing the component NOTE Hot pluggable components are signified with red touch points The only hot pluggable components are the hard disk drives Cold Swappable Components To remove and replace cold swappable components components that are neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable shut down the operating system and power off the server For complete instructions on shutting down the operating system and powering off the server see Chapter 4 page 85 NOTE Cold swappable components are signified with blue touch points The following are cold swappable components e Front bezel e DVD drive e DIMMs e Single or dual core processors e System battery e ilO MP battery e SAS core I O card e PCle expansion card optional e Smart Array P400 controller optional e I O backplane assembly e Power backplane 140 Removing and Replacing Server Components e Diagnostic board e Fan display board e SAS backplane e System board Accessing a Rack Mounted Server A The server is designed for rack mounting The following procedure explains how to gain access to a server that is mounted in an approved rack For rack installation instructions review the documentation in the universal rack mounting kit included
275. r Assembly oooooooooccccoooooocononocconononononcnononn nono nnnconanononnnccnnnns 161 Replacing the I O Fan Carrier Assia A A AAA AA 163 Removing and Replacing the I O Backplane Assembly ooooooococcccooooooocccconononnononccconanononccccnnnns 163 Removing the I O Backplane Assembly oooooooocccccoooooocnnonccconononononononnnnn ono nonconanononnnccnnnns 163 Replacing the I O Backplane Assembly intuir dias 165 Removing and Replacing a PCI X PCle Ca dee gee ints lien et vaste da 165 Removing E AA A A 165 SA AR AAA RP md Uv enai 166 Removing and Replacing the Fan Display Borra 167 Removing the Fan Display Board siosiocic diia tos 167 Replacing the Fan Display Bot iia ds 168 Removing and Replacing System Memory cccccccoooooonccccoonononononnncononononnnnonconnn nro nnncnnnnnnnnnccinnnns 169 REMOVING System MEM AS e emus 169 Memory Installation Conventions cooooooococccooooooonncnccoonanononcnoononnnnnnonncconononnrnnnncnnnnnnnnno 170 Supported DIMM ld do 170 Memory load Ordetiicssisccccmiventucnnidstiddblacelds uleonddcuteentdstsdgoneseutcenberendnetddsentesteneniaas bdeetce 170 Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines cccooooooooncccccooooonononoconanononcccnconan cnc nnnccnnnnnnos 170 Installing Mn lo ita sake 170 Removing and Replacing a Process aa dr a da 171 Processor load Diderot tacto tias 172 REC WINE VOCS seis ennea ee ea E hg ate I EEEE ES A E EE EEE 172 REMOVING Edo AA Seah aie tte Sie e
276. r from the EFI Shell prompt by entering the full path for the ELILO EFI loader By default the ELILO EF1 loader boots Linux using the kernel image and parameters specified by the default entry in the elilo conf file on the EFI System Partition for the boot device To interact with the ELILO EF1 loader interrupt the boot process for example enter a space at the 1 ELILO boot prompt To exit the ELILO EFI loader use the exit command Booting SuSE Linux Enterprise Server from the EFI Shell To boot SuSE Linux Enterprise Server 10 from the EFI Shell I Access the EFI Shell From the system console choose the EFI Shell entry from the EFI Boot Manager menu to access the shell Access the EFI System Partition for the SuSE Linux Enterprise Server boot device Use the map EFI Shell command to list the file systems fs0 s1 and so on that are known and mapped To choose a file system to use enter its mapped name followed by a colon For example to operate with the boot device that is mapped as fs3 enter fs3 at the EFI Shell prompt Enter ELILO at the EFI Shell command prompt to launch the ELILO EFI loader If needed you can specify the loader path by entering efi SuSE elilo at the EFI Shell command prompt 102 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System 4 Allow the ELILO EF1 loader to proceed with bo
277. r off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 3 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 4 Pinch the board rail clips to the sides 1 See Figure 81 page 191 190 Removing and Replacing Server Components 5 Pull the PCle expansion board straight up and out of the server 2 Figure 81 Removing the PCle Expansion Board Cn oer aa j 4 a ET Replacing the Smart Array P400 Controller Board To replace the Smart Array P400 controller board 1 Insert the SAS core I O Smart Array P400 controller board into the dedicated slot a Align the card connector with the slot on the system board b Apply firm even pressure to both sides of the card until it fully seats into the slot c Close the SAS core I O Smart Array P400 controller board lock See Figure 79 A CAUTION When reconnecting the SAS cables note the labeling on the channel cables Match each cable with the appropriate socket on the SAS core I O board If the cables are mismatched the server will not reboot Both cables and sockets are clearly marked with the correct channels 2 Reconnect the internal SAS cables to the SAS core I O Smart Array P400 controller board 3 To install the battery onto the airflow guide a Insert the posts on the battery
278. r off the system a less than four second press on the power button has no effect To ensure that the system powers on in a deterministic fashion the power button must be masked for four seconds after powering off Table 51 Power LED States Definition Flash Rate LED Color No AC power to the system LED Off System power is turned on Steady Green System is shut down but AC and housekeeping standby power are Steady Amber active For high availability and safety reasons this LED runs off the power rails rather than under firmware control Cooling Subsystem The three fan cooling zones located within the rx2660 server provide N 1 redundancy for the server using three identical dual fan assembly CRUs In turn each dual fan assembly CRU provides additional N 1 redundancy for the fan cooling zone it controls Each dual fan assembly CRU is identified by the server as fans 1 through 12 both for logging purposes and for fault identification on the diagnostic LED panel External cooling fan CRU failures are identified visually by a single green LED on the dual fan assembly CRU that is turned on when one or both of the fans fail logged as an IPMI event by fan sensor logic and identified as a fan assembly CRU failure by the BMC turning on the appropriate LEDs on the System Insight Display panel Cooling Subsystem Behavior The BMC chip located on the system board CRU controls fan speed on ambient air temperatures chip t
279. r state of the server See Figure 10 page 31 for the LED location The server has three power states standby power full power and off To achieve the standby power state plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle at the rear of the server To achieve full power plug the power cord into the appropriate receptacle and either push the power button or enter the iLO 2 MP PC command In the off state power cords are not connected to a power source For more information on power states see Power States page 77 Controls Ports and LEDs 33 Table 12 Power Supply LED States Power Supply Condition Power Supply LED No AC power Off AC power standby power on Off Full power on normal operation Steady green Power supply failure Off Rear Panel UID LED and Button The UID button is used to help locate a particular server in a rack of servers See Figure 10 page 31 for the UID button location You can remotely activate this function through various system utilities Table 13 Rear Panel UID LED Name States UID LED e Off UID button is not activated e Blue UID button is activated There is an additional UID LED and button on the front control panel of the server Both the front and rear UID LEDs illuminate when you activate the front or rear UID button PCI X PCle Card Slots The server has three public PCI X PCle slots on the I O backplane assembly The I O backplane assembly is loc
280. rations e DIMM load order e DIMM slot IDs Supported DIMM Sizes System DIMMs seat onto the memory boards The minimum server configuration requires at least one memory pair group of two DIMMs The supported DIMM sizes for the server are as follows e 512 MB e 1GB e 2GB e 4GB e 8GB Installing the Server Memory Pairs When installing memory use a minimum of one pair of like sized DIMMs You can install additional DIMMs later Install DIMMs into the appropriate slots on the system board each slot has a unique ID Figure 19 Memory Location and DIMM Slot IDs 1A w w BERE A CAUTION Failure to observe the following cautions results in system degradation or failure e Do not mix DIMM sizes or types within a pair e Load DIMM pairs in order of size from largest to smallest For example if you have a pair of 4 GB DIMMs and a pair of 1 GB DIMMs install the pair of 4 GB DIMMs first Table 22 Memory Load Order Pair Number Memory Slots OA OB 2 1A 1B 3 2A 2B 4 3A 3B Memory Loading Rules and Guidelines Use the following rules and guidelines when installing memory e Install DIMMs in pairs e Ensure that DIMMs within a pair are identical e Install DIMM pairs in order of size from largest to smallest e Install DIMM pairs in the specified order shown in Table 22 Installing Memory To install memory 1 Remove the top cover from the server See Removing the Top Cover page
281. rce is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is turned off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment e Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other hardware compoonents e Do not wear clothing subject to the buildup of static electricity such as wool or synthetic materials e f installing an internal assembly wear an antistatic wrist strap and use a grounding mat such as those included in the Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit HP 9300 1155 e Handle accessory boards and components by the edges only Do not touch any metal edge connectors or any electrical components on the accessory boards Service Tools Required 139 Server Component Classification The server components are classified into three major categories e Hot swappable e Hot pluggable e Cold swappable The following sections provide a brief explanation of each category and the classifications for the server components Hot Swappable Components A component is defined as hot swappable if you can remove it from the server while the server remains operational and requires no software intervention prior to removing the component NOTE Hot swappable components are signified with red touch points The following are hot swappable components e Fanunit e Power supply power supplies are only hot swappable one at a time e Disk drive fille
282. rd See Figure 53 Remove the T 10 bezel screw next to the System Insight Display on the inside of the server See Figure 53 Figure 53 Bezel Screw Location Grasp the bottom of the bezel and pull gently until it is free from the server Rotate the bezel slightly upward and lift it off the server chassis While removing the bezel make sure to guide the power connector on the System Insight Display through the hole in the server chassis Removing and Replacing the Front Bezel 155 System Insight Display T 10 bezel screw location power cable disconnected from fan display board Replacing the Front Bezel To replace the front bezel 1 Guide the power connector on the System Insight Display through the hole in the server chassis See Figure 53 2 Align the bezel slots with the tabs on the server and rotate the bezel downward and gently push it into place so it is flush with the front server wall Replace the screws that attaches the bezel to the server Connect the System Insight Display power cable to the fan display board Replace the fan carrier into the server See Replacing the Fan Carrier Assembly page 160 Replace the system fans See Replacing a Server Fan page 149 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See
283. rd See Figure 67 a Unfasten the processor install tool 2 5 mm driver from the tool holder on the airflow guide Insert the processor tool into the hole on the side of the heatsink c Rotate the processor tool clockwise 180 degrees A CAUTION The processor zero insertion force ZIF socket is locked and unlocked by turning the processor tool half of a full turn The counter clockwise 180 degree rotation half turn unlocks the socket A clockwise 180 degree rotation locks the socket Attempting to turn the locking mechanism more than 180 degrees can severely damage the socket d Fasten the processor install tool 2 5 mm driver to the tool holder on the airflow guide Connect the processor power cable into the connector cable that attaches directly to the processor board See Figure 66 Close the processor cage See Figure 65 a Grasp the processor cage handle and rotate the cage closure inward toward the rear of the assembly until it is completely closed b Apply adequate force to push the handle down until it is flush with the cage Replace the airflow guide See Replacing the Airflow Guide page 145 Replace the top cover Replacing the Top Cover page 142 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Verify processor repl
284. re tite haa atte icecl 130 Customer Messaging Policy vs 5 ASA AO 130 Manage menita DO nas da th aecida ss lacniGuie enue tas sia ace osesdvecs savers ee sees 132 iLO 2 MP LAN LED on the Rear de 132 POZA Status VED Secs cata e i a e a a E a A A 132 Manageability Reset Button on System Board Bulkhead ooooooocoococccccccoooooocncococonannnnnnoo 133 Manageability Status LED ti vcn ecsete 0 sccinenlesaui desl eesinvolecsnidsbouckemeahldanuenizebivestedeneedhivecedoumedens 133 I O Subsystem SAS7 A iias a EE ARA A 133 Verifying SAS Disk Drive Open rara 133 System A A cet meat O ea te ha ens tava N 134 System LAN TED Sx couscous tars cues alah NN REIS 134 DOMO merra lO RN Ns 134 A O E O EE 135 Identifying and Troubleshooting Firmware Problems ooooooccccccooooooccccccconannnnnccccconnnnnnnno 135 Teo fo ane SS en e se Oe afer ey er nee eee AO ae Pe ee ere eee 136 Server Interface System Console 5 lt icideessccsdseetadesdeccesnsdead duieedenssonsauentatusdenseonsecavieigudediadeatiers 136 a A A A a ats a ee Aer 136 Environment lada NANA A A 136 Reporting Your Problems to Pr clan aateectneh clair at Gltaial eae cee lus abet 137 O li e SUDO Mee stecextodeeaetecositeni and sdb ines A aS Tia esasen ei 137 Phone SUD DON asiria Sn tase net a Sar A 137 Information to Collect Before you Contact Support ea 137 6 Removing and Replacing Server ComponentS ooooooooconccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonoss 139 Service Tools o UL gt A
285. respond to a Ctrl B enter key sequence and the terminal is running 9600 baud 8 data bits is ONLINE and so on then it is possible that the LO 2 MP is not operational functional See Management Subsystem page 132 for the following LED locations e The iLO 2 MP heartbeat LED e The BMC heartbeat LED Replace system board CRU if both heartbeat LEDs are not flashing green suspect bulk power supplies or I O backplane CRU if both heartbeat LEDs are off LAN connections See I O Subsystem SAS DVD HDD page 133 for iLO 2 MP LAN LED states Environment Ambient intake air temperature is often different from ambient room temperature you should measure the operating temperature and humidity directly in front of the cabinet cooling air intakes rather than measure only ambient room conditions 136 Troubleshooting Within the server temperature sensors report server temperature to the BMC The BMC controls fan speed based on this information Temperature sensors are found on e Display panel where a thermal sensor detects the ambient room temperature This sensor reading is the main parameter used to regulate fan speed under normal conditions Table 63 provides environmental specifications for the rx2660 servers Table 63 rx2660 Environmental Specifications Parameter Operating Range Recommended Maximum Rate of Non Operating Operating Range Change Range Temperature 5 35 degrees C up to 20 25 degrees C up
286. rk O IMPORTANT Make sure you use the MAC address to the iLO 2 MP LAN and not the MAC address to the server core LAN To interact with the iLO 2 MP through the web GUI 1 Open a web browser and enter the DNS name or the IP address for the LO 2 MP 2 Log in using your user account name and password at the web login page Figure 34 Figure 34 Web Login Page Integrated Lights Out 2 Advanced HP Integrity Tha is a private Prien Do net aermpt te login arlass pos ane an avorzed sper Any seonzed er ensetoortred soc ane une may de mandant and can coat celina se h prerecudon veder applicable Law O Coppo Hewett P assed Company 1000 2008 AN Rights Reserved 3 Click Sign In The Status Summary page Figure 35 appears after login Accessing the Host Console 75 Figure 35 Status Summary Page O bib ain Lights Out 2 Advanced E Remote Console virtual Devices Administration Hop Status Summary Status Summary Server Status PEET General Active Users System Power O on Latest System Event Log Entry Boot completed 03 Nov 2007 11 41 57 Firmware Revisions iLO MP E 03 10 BMC 02 26 EFI 01 10 System Firmware 01 10 iLO IP Address 15 000 00 00 Date amp Time 11 03 2007 14 23 48 Locator LED O Wu 4 Select the web interface functions by clicking the Function tabs at the top of the page Each function lists options in the Navigation Bar on the left side of the page 5 Click an option link to displa
287. rom If you choose a LAN device to boot from you can boot the file from a remote server The remote server must be set up ahead of time to recognize boot p requests from your server You can also launch a specific application without adding it as a boot option In this case the EFI Boot Manager searches the root directories and the EF1 the EFI system partitions present in the system for the specified EFI application TOOLS directories of all of e Add Boot Entry Adds a boot entry to the EFI Boot Manager This works similarly to Boot from File but adds the file to the boot menu as a new entry instead of just booting the file once You must specify a name for the boot entry to be added and you can add ASCII or UNICODE arguments to the application being launched e Remove Boot Entry Deletes a specific boot option on Boot Order Controls the relative order in which the EFI Boot Manager attempts to issue help menu oot options For help on the control key sequences you need for this option see the e Manage BootNext Setting Selects a boot option to use only once the next boot operation e Set Automatic Boot Timeout Defines the value in seconds before the system automatically boots without user intervention Set this value to zero to disable the timeout feature e Exit Returns control to the EFI Boot Manager menu This displays the active boot devices including a possible integrated shell if the implementation is
288. s PCI Dev and PCI Func values on this screen to the Bus Dev andFnc values from the info io command CAUTION Do not select the lt Global Properties gt option on the main menu TIP To move the cursor in the EFI SCSI Setup Utility use the following keys e Arrow keys T lt gt e Alternate keys H left J down K up L right home O end The Adapter Properties screen for this channel of the SCSI interface appears 10 11 12 13 14 15 Be sure the utility is running for the channel of the SCSI interface by comparing the values shown for PCI Bus PCI Device and PCI Function tothe Bus Dev andFnc values from the info io command CAUTION Do not change the value for any of these fields on the Adapter Properties screen e Auto Termination e SCSI Parity SCSI Bus Scan Order Spinup Delay Secs Changing any of these fields can cause unpredictable results CAUTION Do not change the value for any of these fields on the Device Properties screen Scan Id Scan LUNs gt 0 e Disconnect e SCSI Timeout o Queue Tags eo Format e Verify Changing any of these fields can cause unpredictable results Display the SCSI parameters listed below for the channel of the SCSI interface and change the parameters if necessary or restore its SCSI parameters to their default values e SCSIID e Maximum data tran
289. s for customer use to support two PCI express x8 slots Power Subsystem The two power supply CRUs for the rx2660 server provides N 1 redundancy for the server Each power supply CRU is identified by the server as 1 and 2 for logging purposes There are corresponding LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel for the power supplies Power supply CRU failures are identified visually by a single green LED that is turned off when one or both of the power supplies fail logged as an IPMI event by voltage sensor logic and identified as a power supply CRU failure by the BMC turning on the appropriate LEDs on the front LED panel Power Subsystem Behavior For rx2660 servers each bulk power supply CRU provides 900 watts of DC power from a nominal 120 VAC 50 60 Hz and 1000 watts from a nominal 240 VAC 50 60 Hz The BMC chip located on the system board controls the flow of 12 VDC power to the server CRUs You can control and display power supply status remotely with the iLO MP pc and ps commands respectively Typical power on sequence of the server is as follows e Power LED on front panel glows steady amber when one or two bulk power supplies are plugged into nominal AC voltage and the 3 3 VDC housekeeping voltage comes on and stays on whenever AC power is present e The BMC iLO 2 MP Flash memory and server intrusion circuits are reset after the 3 3 VDC housekeeping voltage stabilizes e The BMC monitors the power button on the front panel
290. s pressing the power button has no effect If the server is off and power is connected to server power supplies the front panel power LED blinks at a 1 Hz rate In this state standby power is available to server circuits but main power is off Table 32 describes what happens when the server is off and you press the power button Table 32 Server Power Button Functions When Server is Off fin ion SSS Server Does Not Power On The server power button on the front panel operates differently depending on how long the button is held and on what the system is doing when the button is pressed You must be aware of its uses to properly troubleshoot the system NOTE If the server is off and power is not connected to server power supplies pressing the power button has no effect Power problems during installation are usually related to the installation process If the server does not power on check the LED indicators on the power supply rear panels and follow these steps e Ifthe AC power LED on the power supply on the rear panel of the server is lit power is available to the server e If the AC power LED is not lit the server is either in standby power mode or there is a problem Re seat the power supply If the problem persists remove and re seat the board within the server If the problem persists replace the power supply or the power supply interface board e If the console shows that the server is powered on bu
291. s reset them by running using the iLO 2 MP lt Ctr1 N gt rscommand This command resets the iLO 2 MP and resets the password NOTE You can only run this command when directly connected to the server Advanced System Information The Advanced System Information menu displays information about server and component configuration Set System Time Set System Time lets you modify the server time Set System Date Set System Date lets you modify the server date Set User Interface Set User Interface lets the user change the legacy boot manager user interface Set System Wake On LAN Set System Wake On LAN lets the user enable disable the server Wake On_LAN settings Set System Defaults Set System Defaults lets you select server default settings Integrated Lights Out 2 Management Processor The Integrated Lights Out Management Processor iLO MP for entry level Integrity servers is an autonomous management subsystem embedded directly on the server It is the foundation of the server High Availability HA embedded server and fault management It also provides system administrators secure remote management capabilities regardless of server status or location The LO 2 MP is available whenever the system is connected to a power source even if the server main power switch is in the off position HP has used several different names over the years to describe the management functionality embedded in their servers including t
292. s to NVRAM Help Exit VenHw D65A6B8C 71E5 4DF0 A909 F0D2992B5AA9 Boot0000 For example Manage BootNext Setting Use this option to run the selected boot option immediately upon entering the main Boot Manager menu This option is useful for booting an option that only needs to be booted once without changing any other setting in the main Boot Manager menu This is a one time operation and does not change the permanent system boot settings This option displays the file systems that are on your system and lets you browse these file systems for applications or drivers that are executable Executable files end with the efi extension You can also select remote boot LAN options that have been configured on your network To restore the default BootNext setting select Reset BootNext Setting For example Manage BootNext setting Select an Operation EFI Shell Built in Current OS Reset BootNext Setting Save Settings to NVRAM Help Exit VenHw D65A6B8C 71E5 4DF0 A909 F0D2992B5AA9 Boot0000 Set AutoBoot TimeOut Use this option to set the amount of time the system pauses before attempting to launch the first item in the Boot Options list For example Set Auto Boot Timeout Select an Option Set Timeout Value Delete Disable Timeout Help Exit Interrupting the timeout during the countdown stops the Boot Manager from loading any boot options automatically If there is no countdown set you must selec
293. server These components require the user to open the system in order to be serviced This LED maintains its state when the system is in standby mode system power turned off but AC power still applied to the system On larger Integrity servers that have a diagnostic LED board this LED tells the service person to view that board for more information about the server failure If the internal health LED is green there is no fault information displayed on the diagnostic LED board and no fault information displayed through LEDs that are inside the server The amber indicators on this LED must correspond to internal health conditions that light other LEDs in the box indicating which component must be serviced to correct the fault For example the diagnostic LED board has a fault indicator lit when this LED is in the amber condition Failures that cause the internal health LED to light do not cause the external health LED to light Table 39 Internal Health LED States Definition Flash Rate LED Color Health good on all internal CRUs and system off LED off Health good on all internal CRUs and system firmware has Steady Green passed BOOT_START An internally accessible CRU failed system is on or in standby Flash 1 Hz Amber mode Check the System Insight Display or internal system LEDs The internal health LED clears once all of the LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel have been cleared For details on how each LED in the
294. server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output Supported Configurations This subsection provides a system build up procedure System Block D The following is a system block diagram showing the major server functional components and iagram their interconnections There are two types of CRUs in the rx2660 server 1 externally accessible CRUs eCRUs 2 internally accessible CRUs iCRUs In the following two lists asterisks identify those CRUs identifiable by System Insight Display LEDs when they are faulty or have failed Supported Configurations The following is a list of all eCRUs in the rx2660 server see Appendix A page 200 for CRU part numbers Power supply 1 and 2 Console device Power cords SAS DVD and 2 5 HDDs The following is a list of all the iCRUs in the rx2660 server System board 1 O board assembly SAS disk board CPUs DIMMs Diagnostic LED board Cooling Fans 1 12 for Data Center 1 6 for Office Friendly NOTE Items preceded by an asterisk in the lists above have associated diagnostic LEDs which indicate device fault or failure System Build Up Troubleshooting Procedure Use this procedure only when the system powers on and remain powered on but does not enter into or pass POST or does not boot to the EFI menu l 2 3 Remove the AC power cord from each power supply and extend the server if racked Remove all of the SAS disk drives fr
295. sfer rate e Bus width e Whether the SCSI interface is bootable driver support e Avoid bus resets secondary cluster server e Restore Defaults Use the arrow keys to navigate to the appropriate SCSI parameter Use the plus and minus keys to scroll through the values until the value you want appears Press Esc to exit the Adapter Properties screen Move the cursor to the action cancel save or discard you want to take and press Enter Select one of the following options e Cancel the exit to stay on the Adapter Properties screen for the channel of the SCSI interface e Save the changes you made then exit the screen e Discard the changes you made then exit the screen If you select cancel you remain in the Adapter Properties screen for the channel of the SCSI interface You can still change the channel s parameters If you select save or discard you go to the EFI SCSI Setup Utility main menu CAUTION Do not select the lt Global Properties gt option on the main menu Press Esc to exit the main menu and the EFI SCSI Setup Utility Select the option for exiting the utility When you are prompted press Enter to stop the SCSI interface you are now at the EFI Shell prompt Specifying SCSI Parameters 239 Using Paths 16 At the EFI Shell prompt enter the reset command The system starts to reboot This is required to cause the new SCSI setting the Boot Option Maintenance Menu This menu allows
296. so constructed For more information see Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu page 240 EFl Commands Table 71 lists EFl commands for HP Integrity servers The equivalent BCH commands found in PA RISC based servers are also listed Table 71 EFI Commands EFI Shell Command BCH Command BCH Command Parameters PA RISC Definition Equivalent PA RISC These commands are found in all other menus info boot Boot PRI HAA ALT lt path gt Boot from specified path help lt command gt HElp lt menu gt lt command gt Display help for specified command or menu reset RESET Reset the server to allow reconfiguration of complex exit at EFI Shell MAin Return to the main menu MAin EFI Boot Manager PAth PRI HAA ALT CON KEY lt path gt Display or modify a path change boot order bcfg SEArch ALL Search for boot devices bcfg SEArch Display IPL lt path gt Search for boot devices many commands ScRoll ON OFF Display or change scrolling offer a b parameter capability to cause 25 line breaks EFI Commands 213 Table 71 EFl Commands continued EFI Shell Command BCH Command BCH Command Parameters PA RISC Definition Equivalent PA RISC COnfiguration autoboot AUto BOot SEarch STart ON OFF Display or set the auto start flag info boot BootlD lt processor gt lt bootid gt Display
297. sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the TPM To remove the TPM 1 Back up the current TPM settings See the HP UX operating system documentation for more information 2 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 3 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 5 Grasp the TPM by the edges and lift it out of the socket on the system board Figure 78 shows the location of the TPM on the system board gt A CAUTION Ifthe TPM has failed destroy the TPM after removing it from the server Follow local regulations to securely destroy the TPM If you use this procedure as part of a system board swap transfer the TPM from the failed system board to the new system board Figure 78 TPM Location on System Board Replacing the TPM To repla
298. ss the EFI Shell environment At the EFI Shell environment issue the map command to list all currently mapped bootable devices The bootable file systems of interest typically are listed as s0 fs1 and so on Access the EFI System Partition fsx where x is the file system number for the device from which you want to boot HP UX For example enter s2 to access the EFI System Partition for the bootable file system number 2 The EFI Shell prompt changes to reflect the file system currently accessed The file system number might change each time it is mapped for example when the server boots or when the map r command is issued When accessing the EFI System Partition for the desired boot device issue the HPUX command to initiate the HPUX EFI loader on the device you are accessing The full path for the loader is EFI HPUX HPUX EFI When initiated the loader references the EFI HPUX AUTO file and proceeds to boot HP UX using the default boot behavior specified in the AUTO file You have 10 seconds to interrupt the automatic booting of the default boot behavior Pressing any key during this 10 second period stops the HP UX boot process and enables you to interact with the HPUX EFI loader To exit the loader the HPUX gt prompt enter exit this returns you to the EFI Shell To boot the HP UX operating system do not type anything during the 10 second period given for stopping at the HPUX
299. st Run this test cpucontfig Displays the configured or deconfigured state of processors in the system and enables you to configure or reconfigure processors Syntax cpuconfig lt cpu gt lt on off gt Parameters lt cpu gt specify a processor lt on off gt state to set the processor to Operation Issuing cpuconfig with no parameters displays the config decontig status of all processors To reconfigure CPUs specify a CPU number and a state on or off If a valid state is entered and is different from the current state of a CPU its status changes on the next boot 220 Utilities NOTE The last remaining configured CPU in a server cannot be deconfigured Example 9 cpuconfig command Shell gt cpuconfig PROCESSOR INFORMATION Proc Arch Processor CPU Speed Rev Model Family Rev State 0 1 6Ghz Bl 0 3d 0 Sched Deconf 1 1 6Ghz Bl 0 31 0 Active iocontig Use this command to deconfigure or reconfigure O components or settings Syntax ioconfig lt fast_init mps_optimize wol gt lt on off gt Parameters lt fast_init gt specify device connection policy setting lt mps_optimize gt specify PCIe MPS optimization setting lt wol gt specify system wake on lan setting lt on off gt specify to configure or deconfigure a feature or component Operation The ioconfig file is used to retain information on the server I O configuration across reboots The ioconfig file is created by insf at install time and is
300. system health is flashing red internal health is off steady green external health is flashing amber and power is steady green Examine each power supply LED If not steady green replace the power supply see Power Subsystem page 128 The preceding problem is fixed when iLO 2 MP logs are read and the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is Basic and Advanced Troubleshooting Tables 107 Table 35 Basic Low End Troubleshooting continued Step Condition Action off steady green external health is steady green power is steady green 3a 3b Both front panel system health LED and internal health LED are flashing amber Front panel system health LED is flashing red and internal health LED is flashing amber A warning or critical failure has been detected and logged while booting or running system firmware system health is flashing amber internal health is flashing amber external health is steady green and power is steady green Check the diagnostic LED panel to identify failed or faulty internal CRU see Troubleshooting Tools page 111 The preceding problem is fixed when a redundant internal CRU is replaced iLO 2 MP logs are read and the front panel LED states are as follows system health is off internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green A fatal fault has been detected and logged while
301. system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server NOTE The system board is the primary location of the UUID The fan display board is the secondary location of the UUID Do not remove these components at the same time or the UUID is deleted When replacing the system board you are prompted to copy the secondary UUID to the primary location SEC to PRI Reply y Removing the System Board To remove the system board 196 Removing and Replacing Server Components ON XH 30 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Save your system configuration and iLO 2 MP configuration settings IMPORTANT Before removing the system board record all boot configuration settings find the settings using the INFO ALL EFl command You must reset these values after replacing the battery Use the LS EFI command to gather the LAN configuration information You can also use the non volatile RAM configuration backup NVRAM backup utility to bac
302. t boot options manually e To set the auto boot timeout value in seconds select Set Timeout Value and enter the desired value e To disable the timeout function select Delete Disable Timeout NOTE When this option is selected the server does not automatically boot The server stops at the EFI boot menu and waits for user input Select Console Configuration Use this option to define the devices that are used to provide input and output to the system console This list includes the VGA monitor and a serial port for directing input and output to a terminal emulation package Using the Boot Option Maintenance Menu 243 NOTE If you install a modem in your server make sure you disable the modem serial port in both the Active Console Input and Active Console Output device lists NOTE Some operating systems support multiple consoles such as a simultaneous serial and VGA output See your OS documentation to determine how many consoles are supported with your server Multiple consoles are not supported for HP UX or Windows use the Smart Setup CD to switch between COM A and the iLO 2 MP on Windows systems Figure 92 Console Configuration EFI Sh Console Configuration l In erial Acpi H PO002 PNPOAO3 0 Pei 1 2 Ve100 9600 iLi S VG Acpi HVPO002 PNPOA03 0 Pci 3 0 l Co Adi Col eee Sy AutoBo Console Help Console Status Sel BootNe lt ENTER gt to enable disable
303. t read System Event Log from the system console Step Condition Action The preceding problem is fixed when all of these LEDs remain off after next power on 5 Cannot see OS prompt on system console Front panel LEDs indicate that the server power is turned on and that the server is either booting or running the OS Nothing may be logged for this condition system health is steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green power is steady green Examine the iLO 2 MP logs for entries related to processors processor power modules PPMs shared memory and core O devices see Errors and Reading Error Logs page 118 NOTE Be sure to check the console settings from the Boot Manager for your OS The preceding problem is fixed when OS prompt appears on the system console Table 36 Advanced Low End Troubleshooting Action System event logging has stopped and a BMC malfunction is assumed system health is steady green internal health is steady green external health is steady green and power is steady green 1 Examine console messages for any EFI errors or warnings about BMC operation or communications 2 Examine the BMC heartbeat LED if it is not flashing green then replace the system board CRU see Management Subsystem page 132 3 Test the operation of the BMC by toggling the UID locator switch LED on the front panel the blue LED is turned on off by the BMC wh
304. t server LEDs indicate that power is off remove and re seat connectors on the LED status board If the problem persists replace the LED status board If the console shows that the server is not powered on server is off remove and re seat connectors on the system board If the problem persists replace the power supply interface board or the system board 82 Installing the Server EFI Menu is Not Available If you cannot access the EFI from either the main disk partition or the CD use the following tools to help solve the problem e Front panel LEDs e iLO 2 MP o Console messages o System event logs SEL Operating System Does Not Boot If the operating system does not boot but you are able to reach the EFI from either the main disk partition or the CD use the following tools to help solve the problem e Using the EFI Shell check the system logs and analyze any error messages e Offline Diagnostic Environment ODE Operating System Boots with Problems If the operating system is running and you are experiencing problems use the following tools to help solve the problem e LEDs e Error Messages and event logs Intermittent Server Problems You can usually trace intermittent problems that occur during installation to power source problems a loose connector or some other hardware problem If you are experiencing intermittent problems 1 Check iLO 2 MP logs and analyze the problem Determine if there is more than one sym
305. t the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Removing the Power Supply Riser Board To remove the power supply riser board 1 Power off the server and disconnect the power cables See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 2 Remove the power supplies from the server See Removing a Power Supply page 150 3 If rack mounted slide the server completely out from the rack See Extending the Server from the Rack page 141 4 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 5 Turn the two knurled thumb screws shown in Figure 71 page 180 counter clockwise until the screws are free from the system board 6 Lift the power supply riser board straight up to disengage it from the slot on the system board and out of the server Figure 71 Power Supply Riser Board Replacing the Power Supply Riser Board To replace the power supply riser board 1 Align the power supply riser board connector with
306. taining the physical dimensions of a single processor The server holds one or two single or dual core processors that provide the following configuration options e 1P 1C One processor one core e 1P 2C One processor two cores e 2P 2C Two processors two cores e 2P 4C Two processors four cores The server has one processor installed in slot Module O before shipping Install the additional processor in slot Module 1 A CAUTION Intel Itanium Dual Core Intel Itanium 2 processors 9150M cannot be intermixed with similar Dual Core Intel Itanium 2 processors 9000 series Processor speed and cache size must be identical for all processors in a system To ensure compatibility whether upgrading replacing or adding an additional processor use processors with identical part numbers Failure to observe this caution results in performance degradation or system failure To ensure compatibility use processors with identical part numbers CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Processor Load Order The server holds up to two single or dual core processors on the processor board The slots on the processor board are labeled Module O and Module 1 If the server has only one processor it is installed in slot Module O Install the second processor in slot Module 1 50 Installing the Server Table 23 rx266
307. tatus of the components that are externally serviceable Whenever the external health LED is lit the corresponding CRU should be lit for the failed component Failures that cause the external health LED to light do not cause the internal health LED to light These two LEDs cover failures of different components Troubleshooting Tools 111 Table 37 External Health LED States Definition Flash Rate LED Color Health good on all external CRUs and system power is off LED Off Off System power is on externally serviceable components Steady Green usually accessible from front or back such as fans and power supplies are okay An externally accessible CRU failed system is on or in Flash 1 Hz Amber standby mode Usually this is a power supply or fan failure Check front back LEDs for failed component Amber supersedes green This LED is cleared when all failed externally accessible entities are repaired and report that they are good or on any AC standby power cycle The iLO 2 MP displays the following strings in its Virtual Front Panel for the three states of this LED Table 38 VFP External Health Description Off lt none gt External parts including fans and power supplies okay On green Flashing amber A redundant externally accessible CRU failed check front back LEDs Internal Health LED The front panel internal health LED indicates the status of the components internal to the system
308. tem settings after replacing 183 system block diagram 18 system board ports described 32 system configuration menu 244 system fans see fans system health LED 27 System Insight Display introduction 28 LEDs 28 system LAN link speed LEDs 33 link status LEDs 33 ports 33 T top cover see cover top tower mount server accessing 141 troubleshooting console problems occur 84 DVD problems occur 83 hard drive problems occur 83 methodology 81 operating system 83 U UID button function 27 LED 27 Unpacking Inspecting for Damage 41 UUID on fan display board 167 V VGA console session 76 viewing warnings 209 W wake on LAN 34 web interface interacting with 74 weight server 36 251
309. test mem_init Run this test mem_test Run this test LAN Address Information LAN Address Path Mac 001635C6214E Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 2 0 Mac 001635C6214 Mac 001635C6214D Acpi HWP0002 PNPOA03 200 Pci 2 1 Mac 001635C6214 0 m FIRMWARE INFORMATION System Firmware A Revision 62 01 4623 PAL A 7 31 7 46 PAL B 7 46 EFI Spec 1 10 EFI Intel Drop 14 62 EFI Build 5 56 SAL Spec 3 20 SAL_A 2 00 SAL_B 62 01 POSSE 0 20 ACPI 7 00 SMBIOS 2 3 2a System Firmware B Revision 62 05 4628 BMC Revision 75 07 IPMI 1 00 Management Processor Revision F 01 40 Updatable EFI Drivers Floating Point Software Assistance Handler 00000118 Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Driver 0007000A SCSI Bus Driver 00000021 SCSI Tape Driver 00000020 Usb Ohci Driver 00000034 USB Bus Driver 00000014 USB Bot Mass Storage Driver 00000014 Generic USB Mass Storage Driver 00000015 Indicates active system firmware image WARNING AND STOP BOOT INFORMATION Warning 55 Invalid or inaccessible system ID s CHIP REVISION INFORMATION Chip Logical Device Chip Type ID ID Revision Memory Controller 0 4032 0020 Root Bridge 0 4030 0020 226 Utilities Host Bridge 0000 122e 0032 Host Bridge 0002 122e 0032 Host Bridge 0003 12ee 0011 Host Bridge 0006 12ee 0011 Host Bridge 0007 12ee 0011 Other Bridge 0 0 0030 Other Bridge 0 0 000d B
310. th instructions Low to moderate technical skills required available in the service guide 200 Customer Replaceable Units Information Table 67 Customer Self Repair Information continued part Code Level Description Comments CY Optional Level C with instructions High technical skills required available in the service guide N No Not a customer replaceable Some HP parts are not designed for customer self repair In order to satisfy the customer warranty HP requires that an authorized service provider install or replace the part Customer Replaceable Units List Table 68 lists the customer replaceable units CRUs of the HP Integrity rx2660 server O IMPORTANT The list of part numbers is current and correct as of the publication of the document Part numbers change often Check the HP Partsurfer website http partsurter hp com to ensure you have the latest part numbers associated with this server Table 68 HP Integrity rx2660 CRU List Manufacturing Description Replacement Part Exchange Part Customer Self Part Number Number Number Repair Processors AD252 2100D CPU module 1 4 GHz 12 MB dual core AD252 2100D AD252 6900A BY AD252AX AH237 2100A CPU module 1 4 GHz 12 MB dual core AH237 2100A AH237 6900A BY AH237AX AD249 2103D CPU module 1 6 GHz 6 MB single core AD249 2103D AD249 6900A BY AD249AX A
311. ther options include o ARP Ping o Local RS 232 serial port o Remote modem port Setup Checklist Use the checklist in Table 25 to assist with the Integrity iLO 2 MP setup process Table 25 Setup Checklist Step Action X Standard Setup 1 Preparation 1 Determine an access method to select and connect the cables 2 Determine a LAN configuration method and assign an IP address if necessary Connecting and Setting Up the Console 65 Table 25 Setup Checklist continued N Step Configure the iLO 2 MP LAN Action Choose one of the three methods to configure the LAN for iLO 2 MP access e DHCP with DNS e ARP Ping e RS 232 serial port Log on to the iLO 2 MP Log in to the iLO 2 MP from a supported web browser or command line using the default user name and password Change default user name and password Change the default user name and password on the administrator account to your predefined selections 5 Set up user accounts Set up the user accounts if you are using the local accounts feature 6 Set up security access Set up the security access settings Advanced Setup 1 Activate Advanced Pack Features Setup Flowchart 66 Activate advanced features by entering a license key Use this flowchart as a guide to assist in the iLO 2 MP setup process Installing the Server Figure 33 iLO 2 MP Setup Flowchart Determine LAN Conf
312. ties This appendix describes the utilities that are part of the server These include the EFl Boot Manager and EFI POSSE Extensible Firmware Interface Boot Manager Extensible Firmware Interface EFI is an OS and platform independent boot and pre boot interface EFI resides between the OS and platform firmware This allows the OS to boot without having details about the underlying hardware and firmware EFI supports boot devices uses a flat memory model and hides platform and firmware details from the OS NOTE EFI and Pre OS System Environment POSSE are similar EFI is an Intel specification whereas POSSE is the HP implementation that aids HP support EFI consolidates boot utilities similar to those found in PA RISC based servers such as the Boot Console Handler BCH and platform firmware into a single platform firmware EFl enables the selection of any EFI OS loader from any boot medium that is supported by EFI boot services An EFI OS loader supports multiple options on the user interface EFI supports booting from media that contain an EFI OS loader or an EFl defined system partition An EFl defined system partition is required by EFI to boot from a block device Figure 90 EFI Boot Sequence EFI EFI OS Loader Application Bootcode EFI API Platform ss EFI Image OS Loader Load Load Boot Services Terminate Standard Drivers and Boot from Operation Firmware Application OrderedLlist Hand
313. tings and save the new configuration After several seconds the Configuration Saved screen appears 5 Press Enter to continue You can now create another logical drive by repeating the previous steps NOTE Newly created logical drives are invisible to the operating system To make the new logical drives available for data storage format them using the instructions given in the operating system documentation CFGGEN Utility The cfggen utility is a command line utility that runs in the Linux EFI and Windows Pre Installation WinPE environments It is a minimally interactive program that you run from a command line prompt or a shell script The results from invoking this utility are communicated through the program status value that is returned when the program exits Use the cfggen utility to create IM storage configurations on SAS controllers Some cfggen commands work only with SAS adapters in the EFl environment Starting CFGGEN The cfggen utility is located on the HP IPF Offline Diagnostic and Utilities CD To use cfggen 1 Insert the CD into the drive 2 Boot the server to the EFI Shell prompt 3 From the EFI Shell prompt change to the CD drive shell gt fs0 Enter fs0 gt 4 Change to the directory that contains cfggen efi fs0 gt cd EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK Enter fs0 EFI HP TOOLS NETWORK gt 5 From this directory use cfggen CFGGEN Operation The cfggen command is not case sensi
314. tion Trovbleshaoia ad ld aed 81 ele ahaa rd lead Cana daleaata ceca sia ges ea 81 Troubleshooting Using the Server Power BUtton cc ccccccceeeeseneeeeeeeeesneaeeeeceseeseneeeeeeesetteaeeees 81 Server Does Not Power Oniisiuexecsiecaiventvestecsv ec caiwantasisitesmvestwaceeuercdsesivecs Sissentnhisagigade sod 82 BElMenuiis Not Available id Te aes 83 Operating System Does obra 83 Operating System Boots with Problems sosa 83 Intermittent Server Proa id 83 DVD Prol A A a a 83 Hard Drive Problems noria ita stead 83 Console Proa oia 84 Downloading and Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware oooooocccnoococccooocnccnononcconanonon no 84 Downloading the Latest Version of the Firmware ccooooooooccccoooooncncccccnonnnononccnononannnccnnnnns 84 Installing the Latest Version of the Firmware on the Server ccccsssececeeeseeeeeenseecessteeeeenens 84 4 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating SysteM ccccccicoccooonccncccnnncn ns 85 Operating Systems Supported on HP Integrity ServerS coooooooccoccccooooooonnccccoonno non nnncononnnnnnnninnnns 85 Configuring System Boot Onptionscecsszetcsxselubecentaestasuetutnnaesid ed oline demtadesvenvebeslceed 85 Booting and Shutting Down AP UX ccoo eco ados naaa add 87 Adding HP UX to the Boot Options AAA case uass tot icess carteags loa kare soos Reis 88 ra O sleet td atianie 88 Booting HP UX EFI Boot Manager uscar rodas san itonndoantnetanguheanhonas doadexgubaseod ea
315. tion specific to OpenVMS This section has procedures for booting and shutting down HP OpenVMS on the HP Integrity rx2660 server and procedures for adding OpenVMS to the boot options list e Toadd an OpenVMS entry to the boot options list see Adding OpenVMS to the Boot Options List page 92 e To boot HP OpenVMS on an entry class HP Integrity server see Booting OpenVMS page 93 e To shut down HP OpenVMS see Shutting Down OpenVMS page 95 Adding OpenVMS to the Boot Options List On the rx2660 server you can manage boot options using the command procedure SYSSMANAGER BOOT_OPTIONS COM This procedure offers you the following options S sysSmanager boot_options com OpenVMS 164 Boot Manager Boot Options List Management Utility 1 ADD an entry to the Boot Options list 92 Booting and Shutting Down the Operating System DISPLAY the Boot Options list REMOVE an entry from the Boot Options list MOVE the position of an entry in the Boot Options list VALIDATE boot options and fix them as necessary Modify Boot Options TIMEOUT setting Ou BB WN B Set to operate on the Boot Device Options list D Set to operate on the Dump Device Options list G Set to operate on the Debug Device Options list E EXIT from Boot Manager utility You can also enter Ctrl Y at any time to abort this utility Enter your choice To ADD an entry to the Boot Options list select o
316. tive You can enter cfggen commands and parameters in uppercase lowercase or a mixture of the two Use the following conventions in command descriptions The cfggen command uses a command line interface Syntax efggen lt controller gt lt command gt lt parameters gt Use the following conventions in command descriptions e Text in italics must be entered exactly as shown on the command line e Text surrounded by lt gt must be replaced with a required parameter e Text surrounded by can be replaced by an optional parameter e Parameters surrounded by must be entered one or more times as appropriate for the issued command e Command line definition characters lt gt and cannot be entered on the command line CFGGEN Utility 233 The program name controller number command and parameters fields must be separated by the ASCII space character The format of the parameters is command specific The program return value is returned to the user when the program exits A value of 0 is returned if the command is successful Otherwise a value of 1 is returned Rules for creating IM volumes and hot spare disks When creating IM volumes and hot spare disks the following rules apply e All disks that are part of an IM volume or a hot spare for an IM volume must be on the same SAS controller e IM volumes are supported e Only two IM volumes plus a global hot spare per controller can be created e An IM arr
317. tive limit 0 current interactive value 1 TDOWN I SHUTNET the DECnet network will now be shut down oe NOTE HP OpenVMS 164 currently does not support the POWER_OFF shutdown option Due to the type of server you purchased your output might not exactly match the output shown here Booting and Shutting Down Microsoft Windows This section describes how to boot and shut down Microsoft Windows on entry class HP Integrity servers and how to add Windows entries to the system boot options list Adding Microsoft Windows to the Boot Options List 96 To add a Microsoft Windows entry to the system boot options list you must do so from EFI by using the MSUt il nvrboot efi utility to import boot options from the EFI Microsoft WINNT50 Boot00 file on the device from which Windows is loaded This procedure adds the Microsoft Windows item to the boot options list NOTE On HP Integrity servers the operating system installer automatically adds an entry to the boot options list 1 Access the EFI Shell environment Log in to the iLO 2 MP and enter CO to access the system console When accessing the console confirm that you are at the EFI Boot Manager menu the main EFI menu If you are at another EFI menu choose Exit from the submenus until you return to the screen with the EFI Boot Manager heading From the EFI Boot Manager menu choose EFI Shell to access the EFI Shell environment B
318. to 10 degrees C hr with 40 degrees to 70 5000 feet 5000 feet tape 20 degrees C hr degrees C without tape Relative 15 80 at 35 degrees C 40 60 at 35 degrees 30 per hour Humidity non condensing C non condensing non condensing Reporting Your Problems to HP HP customer care will help you solve server problems and if necessary initiate appropriate service procedures Support is available on the web and by phone For information on contacting the HP IT Resource Center ITRC near you go to http www itrc hp comhttp www itrc hp com Online Support To contact HP Customer Support online see the Worldwide Limited Warranty and Technical Support Guide or visit us at http www hp com go bizsupport On our web page enter the server model number rx2660 and search the field The following information is available on this website e Software and firmware updates e The latest drivers and utilities e Additional documentation Phone Support To contact HP customer support by phone go to the HP IT Resource Center ITRC near you at http www itrc hp com Local phone numbers are listed in your native language for help Information to Collect Before you Contact Support NOTE Itis highly recommended that you keep detailed records of any changes to your system and of how system behavior has changed over time or as a result of changes made to your system Before you contact HP support you should
319. to eight hot pluggable SAS hard drives PCI slots For the PCI X I O backplane assembly e One PCI X slot 133 MHz e Two PCI X slots 266 MHz For the PCle PCI X I O backplane assembly e One PCI X slot 133 MHz e Two PCle slots PCle x8 SAS core I O Eight port SAS core I O card or eight port SAS core I O card with RAID expansion card LAN core I O Two GigE LAN ports Management core I O Two serial ports two USB 2 0 ports one 10 Base T 100 Base T LAN port and one optional VGA port Optical device One DVD R or DVD RW Power supply The Data Center server has one 900 watt 120 VAC or 1000 watt 240 VAC power supply 1 1 redundancy with second power supply The Office Friendly configuration includes two power supplies System Configuration 35 Dimensions and Weight Table 15 Rack or Pedestal Mounted Server Dimensions Dimensions and Weight Value Data Center Server Dimensions e Depth e 67 3 cm 26 5 in e Width e 48 3 cm 19 in e Height e 8 6 cm 3 4 in Data Center Server Weight Minimum configuration 21 kg 46 lb Maximum configuration 28 kg 61 Ib Rack unit 2U Office Friendly Server Dimensions e Depth e 69 0 cm 27 18 in e Width e 27 6 cm 10 88 in w feet 12 7 cm 5 in w o feet e Height e 50 8 cm 20 in Office Friendly Server Weight Minimum configuration 30 kg 66 lb Maximum configuration 37 kg 81
320. to turn off the LED Pressing the front panel Switch LED or entering the iLO 2 MP and LOC commands lights the rear panel LED and vice versa e Off Off e Blue Not flashing Identification Troubleshooting Tools 113 System Insight Display LEDs The System Insight Display improves serviceability by enabling you to look in a single location for the LEDs that provide failing CRU locating mapping information These amber LEDs are only lit when a failure occurs otherwise they are off The System Insight Display is located on the front panel of the server A diagnostic LED exists for each CRU in the system including all DIMMs LED definitions are shown in Table 43 Table 43 System Insight Display LED States Field Replaceable Unit Health LEDs In addition to the front panel diagnostic LEDs CRUs provide additional diagnostic capability through LEDs whose order or layout is product dependent NOTE If multiple error conditions occur all applicable CRU lights are activated In such a case the most critical error determines the front panel color Diagnostics A suite of offline and online support tools are available to enable manufacturing field support personnel and the customer to troubleshoot system problems In general if the operating system OS is already running it is not desirable to shut it down and the online support tools should be used If the OS cannot be booted then the offline support tools should be use
321. ts on the server and slide the assembly into the server See Figure 55 160 Removing and Replacing Server Components 2 Rotate the fan carrier assembly handle downward approximately 90 degrees until it closes flush against the airflow guide 3 Install the fans in to the fan carrier See Replacing a Server Fan page 149 4 Replace the top cover See Replacing the Top Cover page 142 5 If rack mounted slide the server completely into the rack See Inserting the Server into the Rack page 141 6 Reconnect the power cables and power on the server See Powering On and Powering Off the Server page 77 Removing and Replacing the I O Fan Carrier Assembly The server contains an I O fan carrier assembly located behind the SAS backplane that houses four of the 12 server fans in the Data Center server or two of the six fans if you have an Office Friendly Server A WARNING Ensure that the system is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to performing this procedure Voltages are present at various locations in the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is in the off position Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in dama
322. uires one or more of the following tools Electrically Conductive Field Service Grounding Kit ACX 15 Torx screwdriver Safety Information Use care to prevent injury and equipment damage removing and replacing server components Voltages can be present within the server Many assemblies are sensitive to damage by electrostatic discharge ESD 204 Upgrades Follow the safety conventions listed below to ensure safe handling of components to prevent injury and to prevent damage to the server A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server e When removing or installing any server component follow the instructions provided in this guide e Ifinstalling an assembly that is neither hot swappable nor hot pluggable disconnect the power cable from the external server power receptacle A WARNING Ensure that the server is powered off and all power sources are disconnected from the server prior to removing or installing server hardware Voltages are present at various locations within the server whenever an AC power source is connected These voltages are present even when the main power switch is turned off Failure to observe this warning can result in personal injury or damage to equipment e Do not wear loose clothing that can snag or catch on the server or on other items e Do not wear clothing subject to static charge
323. ur HP sales representative for details The latest version of this document can be found online at http www hp com go Integrity Servers docs Intended Audience This document is intended to provide technical product and support information for authorized service providers customer system administrators and HP support personnel New and Changed Information in This Edition This document has been updated with the following e Updated power supply LED information e Corrected minor syntax content Publishing History Table 1 Publishing History Details Document Operating Systems Supported Supported Product Versions Publication Date Manufacturing Part Number AB419 9002A e HP UX rx2660 December 2006 e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002B e HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office May 2007 Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002C e HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office November 2007 a Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002C_ed4 HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office August 2008 a Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002C_ed5 le HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office May 2009 a Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002C_ed6 le HP UX rx2660 Data Center and rx2660 Office October 2009 f Friendly e Microsoft Windows e Linux e OpenVMS AB419 9002C_ed7 e HP UX rx26
324. uration use one of the following procedures e Accessing a Rack Mounted Server page 141 e Accessing a Pedestal Mounted Server page 141 2 Remove the top cover See Removing the Top Cover page 142 Upgrading the I O Backplane 205 Removing the I O Backplane Assembly From the Server Observe the following warning and cautions before removing the O backplane assembly A CAUTION Observe all ESD safety precautions before attempting this procedure Failure to follow ESD safety precautions can result in damage to the server Record the slot location of all PCI cards as they are removed The only compatible slot across the two I O backplanes is the PCI X 133 MHz slot If you have more than one PCI X card in your rx2660 server it needs to be upgraded to a PCle card If you use a 266 MHz card in a 133 MHz slot the card runs at the lower speed To remove the I O backplane assembly l 2 206 Upgrades Disconnect any cables attached to the I O cards in the I O backplane assembly Loosen the two captive screws that hold the I O backplane assembly to the system board See Figure 86 for the screw locations a Press the blue button to release the black knob b Turn the black knob counterclockwise until the captive screw is free from the system board Figure 86 I O Backplane Assembly Screw Locations Lift the assembly straight up and out of the server Figure 87 page 207 shows the PCI X I O backplan
325. with your server WARNING Ensure that all anti tip features front and rear anti tip feet installed adequate ballast properly placed and so on are employed prior to extending the server out of the rack Extending the Server from the Rack NOTE Ensure that there is enough area approximately 1 5 meters 4 5 ft to fully extend the server from the front of the rack to work on it To extend the server from the rack 1 Flip out the two pull handles located on both ends of the front bezel This allows the server to slide out of the rack 2 Slowly pull the server forward by the handles until it is fully extended NOTE The server is fully extended when the rail clips are locked in place and the top cover is completely accessible Figure 37 Extending the Server from the Rack Inserting the Server into the Rack To insert the server into the rack 1 Press the rail clips on both sides of the server inward 2 Push the server into the rack until it stops Accessing a Pedestal Mounted Server The server is also designed for use in a pedestal mount configuration The pedestal mount kit is a sheet metal enclosure that positions the server vertically See the HP Integrity rx2660 Server Pedestal Installation Guide pedestal mounting kit documentation for the installation and access procedures Accessing a Rack Mounted Server 141 Removing and Replacing the Top Cover NOTE When the top cover is open or removed whi
326. x Eight 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs three PCle PCI X cards on Contig public I O slots and RAID card in private slot Typical Four 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs one PCle PCI X card on public Config O slots and RAID card in private slot l Derate maximum dry bulb temperature 1 degree 300 meters above 900 meters Table 20 Physical and Environmental Specifications of the Office Friendly Server Condition Weight Server Dimensions Typical Heat Release Nominal Airflow Maximum Airflow 35 100 127 200 240 degrees C Server Pedestal Pedestal VAC VAC Watts Watts CFM m3 hr CFM m3 hr 21 kg 30 kg D 69 cm W 27 6 28 kg 46 37 kg cm with feet W Minimum 363 W 363 W 45 76 162 275 lb 61 lb 66 Ib 12 7 cm w o Config 81 lb feet H 50 8 D Maximum 782 W 782 W 45 76 162 275 ae o Contig 5 0 in w o feet Typical 483 W 483 W 45 76 162 275 H 20 0 in Config ASHRAE Airflow cooling scheme front to rear Min Two 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs no PCle PCI X Class 1 Config public cards or RAID card on private gt A I O slot Max Eight 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs three Contig PCle PCI X cards on public O slots and RAID card in private slot Typical Four 4 GB DDR2 DIMMs one Contig PCle PCI X card on public I O slots and RAID card in private slot Derate maximum dry bulb temperature 1 degree 300 meters above 900 meters Physical and Environmental Specifications 39
327. y data in the display screen 6 Click Refresh to update the display The iLO 2 MP web interface has a robust help system To launch iLO 2 MP help click the Help tab in the display screen or click the question mark key at the top right corner of each page to display help about that page Accessing the Graphic Console Using VGA 76 VGA is a method you can use to access the graphic console NOTE You cannot access the LO 2 MP using VGA This method requires the following elements e Monitor VGA connector e Keyboard USB connector e Mouse USB connector The graphic console output displays on the monitor screen IMPORTANT The server console output does not display on the console device screen until the server boots to the EFI Shell Start a console session using the RS 232 serial port method to view console output prior to booting to the EFI Shell or to access the iLO 2 MP See Configuring the iLO 2 MP LAN Using the RS 232 Serial Port page 71 To access the graphic console with VGA 1 Connect the monitor keyboard and mouse cables a Connect the monitor VGA cable to the appropriate VGA port on your server b Connect the keyboard USB cable to the appropriate USB port on your server c Connect the mouse USB cable to the appropriate USB port on your server 2 Power on the server The EFI Shell prompt appears Installing the Server Powering On and Powering Off the Server This section provides i
328. you to select console output and input devices as well as various boot options It contains the following items e Boot From File e Add Boot Entry e Edit Boot Entry e Remove Boot Entry e Edit OS Boot Order e AutoBoot Configuration e BootNext Configuration e Driver Configuration e Console Configuration e System Reset NOTE Your server might have different options available based on the server configuration and installed hardware components These items are described in the following sections The following selections are available on all menus e Help Displays the help available for the command e Exit Returns to the main Boot Options Maintenance menu e Enter Selects an item after using the arrow keys to highlight the item e Save Settings to NVRAM Saves your changes All devices in servers are represented by paths in the EFI Shell To identify the correct slot or disk drive use the following tables NOTE The device path might be different depending on which I O riser is installed in your server Table 73 PCI Slots and Device Path Slots Device Path 1 PCI Acpi HWP0002 400 pci 1 0 2 PCI Acpi HWP0002 300 pci 1 0 3 PCI Acpi HWP0002 200 pci 1 0 4 PCI Acpi HWP0002 600 pci 1 0 Table 74 Disk Drives and Device Path Disk Drive Device Path SCSI Disk HDD1 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 1 Scsi Pun2 Lun0 SCSI Disk HDD2 Acpi HWP0002 100 Pci 1 0 Scsi Pun1 Lun0
329. you want to shut down 3 Issue the shut down command with the desired commandline options and include the required t ime argument to specify when the operating system shutdown is to occur For example shutdown r 20 shuts down and reboots the server in twenty minutes Booting and Shutting Down Linux 103 5 Troubleshooting This chapter provides a preferred methodology strategies and procedures and tools for troubleshooting server error and fault conditions General Troubleshooting Methodology There are multiple entry points to the troubleshooting process dependent upon your level of troubleshooting expertise the tools processes procedures which you have at your disposal and the nature of the system fault or failure Typically you select from a set of symptoms ranging from very simple system LED is blinking to the most difficult Machine Check Abort MCA has occurred The following is a list of symptom examples NOTE Your output might differ from the output in the examples in this book depending on your server and its configuration e Front panel LED blinking e System alert present on console e System won t power up e System won t boot e Error Event Message received e Machine Check Abort MCA occurred Narrow down the observed problem to the specific troubleshooting procedure required Isolate the failure to a specific part of the server so you can perform more detailed troubleshooting For example e

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

取扱説明書・電源トランス（PDF）  Samsung Galaxy Tab 10.1 Hướng dẫn sử dụng  Manual de usuario Activación de certificado vía Hardware  candeeiro decorativo de névoa para cromoterapia e aromaterapia  AURICAL Aud - Otometrics Extranet  User Manual MP84E - Physik Instrumente  POSE POTEAUX sur CAMION TA 60.33 IVECO 4X4 100TA30  Stiga DINO 45 EURO User's Manual  Seagate S-series 2.5" 320GB  C0-02DR-D CPU Technical Specs  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file